MPW Standard Spec 2010

MOTAA I!I!IC WO!
KS
STAA! SIICIIICATIOS

MOTAA I!I!IC WO!KS
STAA! SIICIIICATIOS

Sixth Edition
April, 2010
Distributed by:
Montana Contractors
Association
1717 11th Ave
PO Box 4519
Helena, MT 59604
Telephone (406)442-4162
Fax (406)449-3199

The Montana Contractors Association, a chapter of the Associated General Contractors
of America, is pleased to serve in a coordinating role for the Montana Public Works
Specifications, and as publisher of this book.

As the primary voice of public works construction companies in Montana, we strive to
ensure an open, competitive and level playing field exists for the benefit of government
entities, private sector firms, and taxpayers. These specifications are intended to serve
those interests, and our members are proud to be part of the collaborative effort that went
into the development process.

The Montana Contractors Association seeks to:

Deliver quality projects with quality people;
Promote fair and honorable dealings with the owners and designers of public and
private construction projects, as well as with subcontractors, suppliers and the
general public;
Ensure that safety of construction workers and the general public is a top priority;
Foster an economic climate that is conducive to maintaining funding levels
adequate to continually enhance public infrastructure that in turn improves the
quality of life for all Montanans;
Maintain a political climate that fosters a thriving business community, including
reasonable regulation, taxation and permitting processes.

We invite general contractors, specialty contractors, suppliers, design firms, and other
businesses involved in the construction profession to join the largest, most influential
construction trade association in Montana and the U.S. To learn more about our
insurance programs, political affairs representation, training programs, plans room, and
informational services, contact us at:

Montana Contractors Association
1717 11
th
Ave.
P.O. Box 4519
Helena, MT 59644
(406) 442-4162

www.mtagc.org
www.agc.org

FORWARD

This is the Sixth edition of the MONTANA PUBLIC WORKS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS first
published in 1978.

For editorial purposes, this book is divided into 6 sections. A chairman was appointed for each section.
Each chair had the responsibility to revise that section with the aid of a committee chosen from an
array of professionals in that field. Each committee has at least 4 members and required to have an
Owner, Engineering consultant, publics works Contractor and a material supplier. This balanced
approach assures a broad based opinion and fairness to all.

Important changes have been made in this edition include but are not limited to:

The format and numbering follow the CSI MASTER FORMAT was completed with the fifth
edition. Several sections necessarily were moved and renumbered. Each section was divided
into the four-part system as designated by the CSL (Part 1 General, Part 2 Products, Part 3
Execution and Part 4 Measurement and Payment).

This book is metricated to comply with anticipated regulatory changes. This is considered to be
a transitional edition. The metric equivalents have been parenthesized after the English
measurements. The conversions to metric are soft conversions. They are not extended beyond
the 2 decimal places and are often rounded.

REVISIONS

Sections have been updated to reflect changes in the industry standards. To assure that the sixth
edition is being used, the designation 6
th
Edition has been added to the footer on each page of the
specifications.

STANDARD FORMS

In conjunction with the above-suggested outline, 'it is advisable to bind into the Project Manual any
forms or documents either added to or modified during the bidding process and up to the time the
Agreement is executed, and any forms which will be used during, construction.

USERS RESPONSIBILITY

Users of the, Montana Public Works Standard Specifications must understand the contents of the
document. They must know which item specifications are applicable and can be used, which item
specifications are NOT applicable and may need to be deleted, and which item specifications are not
addressed in the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications and, therefore, need to be written or
otherwise included. It is imperative the specification writer understands the unique nature of each
project, and conditions, physical or otherwise, may dictate the need for additional specifications. How
FORWARD
Page 2 of 3

the items are included, deleted, or written is decided during, the outline stage. At that time, the writer
should also decide on both the method of measurement and basis of payment to the Contractor. A
suggested Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment format has been included in the Montana
Public Works Standard Specifications. The writer may choose other options by writing a paragraph in
the Special Provision covering that section of any item specification. Other decisions of a general
nature will be discussed under the item to which they pertain.

Three basic decisions have to be made on any item specification used. They are:

A. Which class of material or manufactured item is acceptable (i.e. ductile iron pipe
ONLY, ductile iron pipe with polyvinyl chloride as an alternate, PVC pipe with
steel as an alternate, etc.)?

B. Decisions to change word(s), sentence(s), or paragraph(s) to new or different
meanings.

C. Decision(s) to add or delete from a section for supplementary meaning.

DISCLAIMER

The authors of these Montana Public Works Specifications shall not be liable for any errors or
omissions on the part of the design engineer, contractor, owner, or any other user of this specification.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
As the MPWSS Committee Chair, I would like to take a moment to thank the subcommittee chairs,
and their members, for their time and effort put forth on behalf of the Montana Public Works Standard
Specifications Book. It is always a pleasure to create partnerships among different entities in the
construction industry.
Subcommittee chairmen:
Gary Simonich, HKM Engineering - Butte
Dave Orbe, Knife River - Missoula
Ken Munski, NTL Engineering & Geosciences Great Falls
Rich Selensky, DOWL HKM - Billings
Steve Morrical, Holcim, Inc. - Trident
Gary Rome, Terracon Consultants, Inc. - Billings
Subcommittee members:
Guy Huestis, Falls Construction - Great Falls
Chris Budeski, Madison Engineering Bozeman
Jerry Bowser, Helena Sand & Gravel Helena
Doug Dahlberg, Director - Missoula County Public Works Department
Kurt Grabow, DOWL HKM Material Laboratory Billings
Dave Resch, Knife River Billings
Brad Newcomb, Montana Refining Great Falls
Woody Germany, WGM Group, Inc. Missoula
Chris Holman, Holman Consulting Engineers, LLC. Missoula
Jim Pierce, Thomas Dean & Hoskins, Inc. Bozeman
Marty Logan, Titan Machinery, Inc. - Billings
Traver Hunter, Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. Billings
Dennis Dirks, Contech Construction Products Helena
Mike Richards, HD Supply & Waterworks Missoula
Debbie Meling, City of Billings
Duane Loken, Cretex Concrete Billings
Bob Glasgow, Knife River Billings
Bill Oberlander, Riverside Sand & Gravel, Inc. Billings
Cal Keith, Engineer from the City of Great Falls
I want to thank everyone involved for their efforts to make this book a success.
And a special thanks to Monte Johnson for chairing this committee.
Dave Orbe
MPWSS acting Committee Chairman
Knife River-Missoula
CREDITS

MCA Public Works Committee would like to thank all involved for the pictures within this
publication.

Front page
Photo of a Canyon Ferry Lake sunrise
Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Condition of the Contract
Photo provided by MCA Office Staff
Division 2 SITE WORK
Section 02110 Site Preparations
Photo provided by Madison Engineering, Bozeman, MT
Sections 02200 Earthwork
2008 photo provided by CJ Beardsley, L.S. Jenson, Missoula, MT
Sections 02500 Paving & Surfacing
Sections 02600 Water Distribution
Sections 02700 Utility Systems
Photo provided by Madison Engineering, Bozeman, MT
Sections 02900 Landscaping
Massough Ponds, 2008 photo provided by Robie Culver Company, MT
Division 3 CONCRETE
South Hills Interchange, 2008 photo provided by Helena Sand & Gravel, Helena, MT
Appendix B Chlorine Disinfecting Procedures
2005 photo provided by HKM Engineering, Inc., Butte, MT
Appendix C Suggestions/Comments
2005 photo provided by JTL Group, Inc., Missoula, MT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 3

MONTANA PUBLIC WORKS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE CONTRACT

SECTION 00100 Invitation to Bid
SECTION 00200 Instructions to Bidders
SECTION 00300 Bid Form
SECTION 00500 Agreement Form
SECTION 00700 General Conditions for Public Works Projects EJCDC 00700
SECTION 00810 Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions

FORM C-410 Suggested Bid Bond
FORM C-430 Bid Bond penal Sum Form
FORM C-510 Notice of Award
FORM C-520 Suggested Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor,
Stipulated Price
FORM C-550 Notice to Proceed
FORM C-610 Performance Bond
FORM C-615 Payment Bond
FORM C-620 Contractors Application for Payment
FORM C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion
FORM C-940 Work Change Directive
FORM C-941 Change Order
FORM C-942 Field Order

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01010 Summary of Work
SECTION 01041 Project Coordination
SECTION 01050 Field Engineering
SECTION 01090 References
SECTION 01300 Submittals
SECTION 01400 Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance
SECTION 01500 Construction and Temporary Facilities
SECTION 01570 Construction Traffic Control
SECTION 01580 Temporary Water Supply
SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout

DIVISION 2 SITEWORK

SECTIONS 02100 SITE PREPERATION

SECTION 02110 Geotextiles
SECTION 02112 Removal of Existing Pavement, Concrete Curb, Sidewalk,
Driveway and/or Structures

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 3

SECTION 02113 Adjusting Existing Manholes, Lampholes, Inlets, Water Valve
Boxes, Water Services and Fire Hydrants to Grade
SECTION 02114 Relocating or Removing Utility Poles, Street Signs and Mailboxes

SECTIONS 02200 EARTHWORK

SECTION 02221 Trench Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines and Appurtenant
Structures
SECTION 02222 Low Permeability Trench Backfill Plugs
SECTION 02225 Flowable Fill
SECTION 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction
SECTION 02234 Sub Base Course
SECTION 02235 Crushed Base Course

SECTIONS 02500 - PAVING AND SURFACING

SECTION 02502 Asphalt Prime and/or Tack Coat
SECTION 02504 Asphalt Seal Coat
SECTION 02505 Construction Seal
SECTION 02510 Asphalt Concrete Pavement
SECTION 02515 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
SECTION 02528 Concrete Curb and Gutter
SECTION 02529 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, Approaches, Curb Turn Fillets,
Valley Gutters and Miscellaneous New Concrete Construction
SECTION 02581 Pavement Markings and Markers (Pre-Formed Plastic, Paints and
Enamels)
SECTION 02582 Reflective Thermoplastic Pavement Markings

SECTIONS 02600 WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 02660 Water Distribution Systems

SECTIONS 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE

SECTION 02720 Storm Drain Systems
SECTION 02725 Drainage Culverts
SECTION 02730 Sanitary Sewer Collection System

SECTIONS 02900 - LANDSCAPING

SECTION 02910 Seeding
SECTION 02920 Hydraulic Seeding

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

SECTIONS 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 03210 Reinforcing Steel

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3

SECTION 03310 Structural Concrete

APPENDIX

APPENDIX A Standard Drawings

Standard Drawing No. 02213-1: Manhole Adjustment
Standard Drawing No. 02213-2: Water Valve Adjustment
Standard Drawing No. 02221-1: Typical Utility Trench
Standard Drawing No. 02221-2: Pipe Bedding Alternate
Standard Drawing No. 02222-1: Trench Plug Excavation
Standard Drawing No. 02528-1: Standard Curb & Gutter
Standard Drawing No. 02528-2: Drive Over Curb & Gutter
Standard Drawing No. 02529-1: Double Gutter Detail for Street Intersections
Standard Drawing No. 02529-2: Standard Fillet
Standard Drawing No. 02529-3: Type 1 Street Monument
Standard Drawing No. 02529-5A: Boulevard Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-5B: Curb Walk Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-6: Retrofit Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-7A: Boulevard Alley Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-7B: Curb Walk Alley Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-8: Accessibility Ramp
Standard Drawing No. 02529-9: Swale Crossing
Standard Drawing No. 02529-10: Mail Box Mounting for Curbline Delivery
Standard Drawing No. 02660-1: Thrust Blocking for Water Main Fittings
Standard Drawing No. 02660-2: Water and Sewer Main Separation
Standard Drawing No. 02660-3: Thrust Blocking for Water Main Valves
Standard Drawing No. 02660-4: Fire Hydrant Setting
Standard Drawing No. 02660-5: Hydrant Location Detail
Standard Drawing No. 02660-6: Water Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02660-7: Blowoff Valve
Standard Drawing No. 02720-1: 30 (76 cm) Standard Storm Drain Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-2: 24 (61 cm) Standard Riser Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-3: Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-4: Standard Straight Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-5: 48" (122 cm) Standard Manhole Showing
Two Types of Cone Sections
Standard Drawing No. 02720-6: Precast Manhole Bases
Standard Drawing No. 02720-7: Typical Manhole Channel Details
Standard Drawing No. 02720-8: Standard Cast Iron Cover
Standard Drawing No. 02720-9: Standard 24" (61 cm) Cast Iron Ring
Manhole Frame
Standard Drawing No. 02720-10: Storm Drain Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02730-1: Nomograph for Air Testing Gravity Sewer
Mains
Standard Drawing No. 02730-2: Sanitary Sewer Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02730-3: Deep Sanitary Sewer Service Line

APPENDIX B Chlorine Disinfection
APPENDIX C Suggestion and Re-Order Form

Division 0
Bidding Requirements,
Contract Forms and
Conditions of the Contract

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF
CONTRACT

SECTION 00100 Invitation to Bid
SECTION 00200 Instructions to Bidders
SECTION 00300 Bid Form
SECTION 00500 Agreement Form
SECTION 00700 General Conditions for Public Works Projects EJCDC 00700
SECTION 00810 Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions

FORM C-410 Suggested Bid Form
FORM C-430 Bid Bond Penal Sum Form
FORM C-510 Notice of Award
FORM C-520 Suggested Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated
Price
FORM C-550 Notice to Proceed
FORM C-610 Performance Bond
FORM C-615 Payment Bond
FORM C-620 Contractors Application for Payment
FORM C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion
FORM C-940 Work Change Directive
FORM C-941 Change Order
FORM C-942 Field Order

Section 00100 6
th
Edition
INVITATION TO BID
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 00100
INVITATION TO BID

Separate sealed bids for construction of______________________________________________
will be received by __________________________________________________ at the office of
__________________________________________________until ____________ local time on
____________________, and then publicly opened and read aloud.

The project consists of: __________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________.

The contract documents consisting of Drawings and Project Manual may be examined or
obtained at the office of_________________________________________________________
in accordance with Article 2.01 of Instructions To Bidders. Required deposit is $_____________
per set, which is not refundable.

In addition, the Drawings and Project Manual may also be examined at the following locations:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________.

There will be a Pre-Bid Conference at the office of ____________________________________
at_________ oclock on _____________________________. Interested CONTRACTORS are
encouraged to attend.

CONTRACTOR and any of the CONTRACTORS subcontractors bidding or doing work on this
project will be required to be registered with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry
(DLI). Forms for registration are available from the Department of Labor and Industry, P.O. Box
8011, 1805 Prospect, Helena, Montana 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained
by calling 1-406-444-7734. All laborers and mechanics employed by CONTRACTOR or
subcontractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be
required by the laws of _________________(County) and the state of Montana. The
CONTRACTOR must ensure that employees and applicants for employment are not
discriminated against because of their race, color, religion, sex or national origin.

Each bid or proposal must be accompanied by a Certified Check, Cashiers Check, or Bid Bond
payable to ____________________________________, in an amount not less than ten percent
(10%) of the total amount of the bid. Successful BIDDERS shall furnish an approved
Performance Bond and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred

Section 00100 6
th
Edition
INVITATION TO BID
Page 2 of 2

percent (100%) of the contract amount. Insurance as required shall be provided by the successful
BIDDER(s) and a certificate(s) of that insurance shall be provided.

This project is funded in part or in whole with grant/loan funding from:____________________
______________________________________________________________________________

Award of the project will be contingent upon receiving funding and award concurrence from __
_____________________________________________________________________________

No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled time for the public opening of bids, which is
_______ .m. local time, ___________ 20___.

The right is reserved to reject any or all proposals received, to waive informalities, to postpone
the award of the contract for a period of not to exceed sixty (60) days, and to accept the lowest
responsive and responsible bid which is in the best interest of the OWNER.

________________________________________, is an Equal Opportunity Employer.
(Owner)

Published at ____________________, Montana, this _______day of ________ 20___.

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________
(Title)

Address: _____________________________________

_____________________________, Montana 59_____

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
Page 1 of 12

SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ARTICLE 1- DEFINED TERMS

1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the
General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these
Instructions To Bidders have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both
the singular and plural thereof:

A. Bidder - The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to OWNER

B. Issuing Office - The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued
and where the bidding procedures are to be administered.

C. Successful Bidder - The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid
to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNERs evaluations as hereinafter
provided) makes an award.

ARTICLE 2- COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,
stated in the Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office. The deposit will
not be refunded.

2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER
nor ENGINEER assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from
the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.3 OWNER and ENGINEER in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the
above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a
license or grant for any other use.

ARTICLE 3- QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

3.1 To demonstrate Bidders qualifications to perform the Work, within five (5) days of
OWNERs request, Bidder shall submit written evidence, such as financial data, previous
experience in performing comparable work, present commitments and other such data as
may be called for in the Special Provisions.

3.2 In determining the lowest responsible bid, the following elements will be considered:

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 12

whether the BIDDER involved (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has
adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has a
suitable financial status to meet obligations incident to the work; and (d) has appropriate
technical experience.

3.3 Each BIDDER may be required to show that former work performed by him has been
handled in such a manner that there are no just or proper claims pending against such
work. No BIDDER will be acceptable if he is engaged on any other work which impairs
his ability to finance his contract. The BIDDER shall demonstrate his ability by meeting
all requirements herein stipulated, if asked for them.

3.4 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidders
representations and certifications.

ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA
AND SITE

4.1 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. The Special Provisions identify:

1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding
Documents.

2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface
and subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground
Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.

4.2 Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.02.A will be made available by
OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the
Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which Bidder is
entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions has been
identified and established in paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is
responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any technical data
or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings.
4.3 Underground Facilities

A. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect
to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based upon
information and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by owners of such
Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or others. OWNER and ENGINEER

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 12

do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless
expressly provided otherwise elsewhere.

4.4 Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. The Special Provisions identify those reports and drawings relating to a
Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that
ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents.

B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.03.A will be made
available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are
not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein
upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in the Special Provisions has
been identified and established in paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary
Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder
draws from any technical data or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or
information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings.

4.5 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical
conditions, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or
unanticipated conditions appear in paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General
Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to
prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if
any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous
Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or
indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be
within the scope of the Work appear in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.

4.6 Upon request, OWNER will provide Bidder access to the site to conduct such
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary
for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill and compact all holes and clean up and restore
the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations,
tests, and studies. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relative
to excavation and utility locates.

A. Reference is made to the Special Provisions for the identification of the general
nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by OWNER or others
(such as utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the Work for which a
Bid is to be submitted. On request, OWNER will provide to each bidder for
examination access to or copies of Contract Documents (other than portions
thereof related to price) for such work.

B. Paragraph 6.13.C of the General Conditions indicates that if an Owner safety
program exists, it will be noted in the Special Provisions.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 12

4.7 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. Examine and carefully study the Biding Documents including any Addenda and
the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents;

B. Visit the site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local,
and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;
including but not limited to those general and local conditions affecting
transportation, disposal, handling and storage facilities, availability of labor,
water, power, roads, climactic conditions and seasons, physical conditions at the
work Sites and project area as a whole, job site topography and ground
conditions, equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during work
prosecution,

C. Become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all Federal, State and Local Laws
and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work;

D. Carefully study all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except
underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Special Provisions as
provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and carefully study all
reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site
which have been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph
4.06 of the General Conditions;

E. Obtain and carefully study (or assume responsibility for doing so) all additional or
supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or
contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the
Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences
and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto;

F. Agree at the time of submitting its bid that no further examinations,
investigations, exploration, tests, studies or data are necessary for the
determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within
the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents;

G. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and
others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicted in the Bidding Documents;

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 12

H. Correlate the information know to Bidder, information and observations obtained
from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents,
and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and
data with the Bidding Documents.

I. Promptly give ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that
the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to the Bidders; and

J. Determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the
Work.

4.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding
Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the
Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts,
errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in Bidding Documents
and the written resolutions thereof by ENGINEER are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the
Work.

ARTICLE 5 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

5.1 A pre-Bid conference will be held at the time and place listed in the Invitation To Bid.
Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the project.
Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will
transmit to all prospective bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers
necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be
relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

ARTICLE 6- SITE AND OTHER AREAS

6.1 The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto
required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of
materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for
by CONTRACTOR Easement for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the
Bidding Documents.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 12

ARTICLE 7-INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted
to ENGINEER in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by
ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered
to all parties recorded by ENGINEER as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not
be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral
and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7.2 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct or change the Bidding Documents as deemed
advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER.

7.3 Any addenda issued during the time of bidding, or forming a part of the Contract
Documents loaned to the Bidder for the preparation of his proposal, shall be covered in
the Bid and shall be made a part of the Agreement. Receipt of each addendum shall be
acknowledged in the Bid. Any Bid in which all issued addenda are not acknowledged
will be considered incomplete and will not be read.

ARTICLE 8-BID SECURITY

8.1 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in an amount of
ten percent (10%) of Bidders maximum Bid price and in the form of cash, a cashiers
check, certified check, bank money order, or bank draft, in any case drawn and issued by
a national banking association located in Montana or by any banking corporation
incorporated under the laws of Montana; or a Bid Bond (on a form attached if a form is
prescribed) issued by a surety authorized to do business in Montana meeting the
requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02 of the General Conditions.

8.2 The Bid Security of the Successful BIDDER will be retained until such BIDDER has
executed the Contract Documents and furnished the required contract security and met
the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned.
If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish
the required contract security within fifteen (15) days after the Notice of Award,
OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a
reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of
(7) seven days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or (61) sixty-one days after the
Bid opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned.

8.3 Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance
of receiving the award will be returned within seven days after Bid opening.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 12

ARTICLE 9- CONTRACT TIMES

9.1 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a)
Substantially Completed and (b) also completed and ready for final payment are set forth
in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10- LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.1 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 11- SUBSTITUTE AND OR-EQUAL ITEMS

11.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or
described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or or-
equal items. Whenever it is indicted in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or or
equal item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if
acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by
ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for
submission of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by
ENGINEER is set forth in Paragraphs 6.05 of the General Conditions and may be
supplemented in the General Requirements or Special Provisions.

ARTICLE 12 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS

12.1 If the Special Provisions require or the OWNER would request the identity of certain
Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance
of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful
Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall will within five (5) days after Bid
opening submit to OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals or
entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required.
Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information
regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity if requested by OWNER. If OWNER or
ENGINEER alter due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, Supplier, individual or entity OWNER may, before the Notice of Award is
given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute, without an increase in
the Bid.

12.2 If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the OWNER
may determine such Bidder to be non-responsive and reject the Bid. Declining to make

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 12

requested substitution will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid Security of any
Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual or entity so listed and against which
OWNER and ENGINEER makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of
Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of
such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in Paragraph 6.06
of the General Conditions.

12.3 CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual,
or entity against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.

ARTICLE 13- PREPARATION OF BID

13.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be
obtained from the ENGINEER. Bids shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed
form. Any modifications thereof or deviations there from may be considered as sufficient
cause for rejection. Bids carrying riders or qualifications to the Bid being submitted may
be rejected as irregular.

13.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter and the
Bid signed. A Bid price shall be indicated for each Bid item listed therein, or the words
No Bid, No Change, or Not Applicable entered.

13.3 Bids by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president or other corporate officer who is authorized to bind the corporation, and the
corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The
corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. The Bid
of a corporation, which is signed by a person other than a corporate officer, must be
accompanied by evidence of authority to sign.

13.4 A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature.

13.5 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a
member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The State of formation of the
firm and the official address of the firm must be shown below the signature.

13.6 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidders name and official address.

13.7 A Bid by a Joint Venture shall be executed by each Joint Venturer in the manner indicated
on the Bid form. The official address of the Joint Venture must be shown below the
signature.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 12

13.8 All signatures are to be in ink and names must be typed or printed below the signature.
The title of the person(s) executing the Bid shall be clearly indicated beneath the
signature.

13.9 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form). Bids in which all issued addenda are not
acknowledged will be considered incomplete and will not be read.

13.10 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown.

13.11 Current Montana Contractors registration number, if any, must be shown.

ARTICLE 14- BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BIDS

14.1 Bids.

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price and/or lump sum basis for each item of
Work listed in the Bid schedule as provided in the Bid form. The Bid will not be
considered unless the Bid Form contains prices for all unit price and/or lump sum
items, and alternates, as shown on the Bid Form. Bids and totals shall be shown
legibly in their proper locations. The total amount of the Bid shall be legibly
written and numerically presented in the proper places and the Bid Form shall be
manually signed.

B. The total of all estimated prices will be determined as the sum of the products of
the estimated quantity of each item and the unit price bid for the item. The final
quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with paragraph
11.03 of the General Conditions.

C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit price will be
resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of
any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the
correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of
the words.

ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITFAL OF BID

15.1 Each prospective Bidder is to execute one copy of the Bidding Documents. The Bid form
is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security along with additional documents,
if any, as identified in the Special Provisions.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 10 of 12

15.2 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place
indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope,
plainly marked with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the
Project for which the bid is submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and, shall be
accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail
or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a
separate envelope plainly marked on the outside with the notation BID ENCLOSED. A
mailed bid shall be addressed to the address shown in the Invitation To Bid.

15.3

A. The Bid will not be considered unless accompanied by proper Bid Security in
accordance with Article 8 of these Instruction to Bidders.

B. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for.

C. Bids by telephone, telegraph, fax or other telecommunication systems will not be
considered.

ARTICLE 16- MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

16.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by art appropriate document duly executed in the
manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids as called for in the Invitation
to Bid. Requests for modification or withdrawal must be written and must be signed in
the same manner and by the same person(s) who signed the Bid.

16.2 If, within twenty-four hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written
notice with OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction
of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid,
that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the
Work is rebid or negotiated, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the
Work.

ARTICLE 17- OPENING OF BIDS

17.1 Bids will be opened at the time set for opening in the Invitation to Bid and, unless
obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base
Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of
Bids.

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 11 of 12

ARTICLE 18 BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

18.1 All bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid
opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid
security prior to the end of this period.

ARTICLE 19- AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.1 OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, including without limitation,
nonconforming, non responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. OWNER further
reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry
and evaluation, to be non-responsible. OWNER also reserves the right to waive all
informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract
terms with the Successful Bidder. OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any
Bidder if OWNER believes it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an
award to that Bidder whether because Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified
or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria
established by OWNER.

19.2 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or
different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder
has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of the
Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that bidder has an interest.

19.3 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the
prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be
requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

19.4 In evaluating Bidders, OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may
consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other
individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided
in the Special Provisions.

19.5 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors,
Suppliers, individuals or entities to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.

19.6 If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will award the Contract to the responsible
bidder whose Bid, conforming with all material terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents, is lowest price, in the best interest of the Project, and other factors
considered, The OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject the Bids, or portions of

Section 00200 6
th
Edition
Page 12 of 12

Bids if denoted in the Bid as separate schedules, and to award more than one Bid or
schedule for the same Bid if any of the aforementioned combination of Bids or schedules
will be in the best interest of the OWNER. The OWNER reserves the right to cancel the
award of any Agreement at any time before the complete execution of said Agreement by
all parties without any liability against the OWNER.

ARTICLE 20 CONTRACT SECURITY

20.1 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary
Conditions, sets forth OWNERs requirements as to Performance Bond, Payment Bond,
and certificates of insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed
Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied by such Bonds and insurance.

ARTICLE 21- SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21. 1 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be
accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with the
other Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto.
Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver at least six
(6) counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER. Within fifteen
(15) days thereafter OWNER shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Successful
Bidder with a complete set of the Drawings and Specifications.

ARTICLE 22- STATE LAWS AND REGULATIONS

22.1 All applicable laws, ordinances and the rules and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout. State
laws and ordinances which the CONTRACTOR must comply with, include but are not
limited to, those involving workmens compensation insurance, contractor registration,
employment preference to Montana contractors and Montana residents, and gross receipts
tax.1

END OF SECTION 00200
Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 00300

BID FORM

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:

(Name of Project)

(Location)

(If applicable, Project or portion of Project for which Bid is submitted)

CONTRACT IDENTIFICATION AND NUMBER:

(Title, Number, etc. that appears elsewhere in Bidding Documents.)

THIS BID SUBMITTED TO:

(Organization)

(Street; P.O. Box)

(City) (State) (Zip Code)

1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents, to perform and furnish all
Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times
indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents.

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, and
Instructions to Bidders, including without limitations those dealing with the disposition of Bid
Security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the Bid opening, or
for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 2 of 7
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that:

A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, other related data
identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby
acknowledged:

Addendum No. Addendum Date
___________ __________
___________ __________
___________ __________

B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general,
local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work

C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Bidder has carefully studied all (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities)
which have been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions, and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazard Environmental Condition, if any, which has
been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.

E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so)
all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data
concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site
which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the
Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto.

F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations,
tests, studies or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at
the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the
Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of the Work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations
obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Bidding
Documents.

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 3 of 7
I. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution
thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder .

J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.

4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf
of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or
rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly
induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or
induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by
collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over Owner.

The Bidder certifies that no official of the Owner, Engineer or any member of such officials
immediate family, has direct or indirect interest in the pecuniary profits or Contracts of the Bidder.

5.01 The Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the
following price(s):

UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE

ITEM ESTIMATED UNIT TOTAL
NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT PRICE PRICE

TOTAL ESTIMATED BID PRICE $_______________________________________________
(Figures)
TOTAL ESTIMATED BID PRICE________________________________________________
(Words)
{ or }

LUMP SUM BID

TOTAL LUMP SUM BID PRICE$_________________________________________________
(Figures)
TOTAL LUMP SUM BID PRICE
(Words)

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 4 of 7
A. Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.B. of the General
Conditions.

B. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on
actual quantities provided, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.

C. The undersigned agrees that the unit prices shall govern in checking the Bid, and should
a discrepancy exist in the Total Estimated Price and Total Amount of Unit Prices Bid as listed
above after extensions are checked and corrections made, if any, the Total Amount of Unit Prices
Bid as corrected shall be used in awarding this Contract.

D. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all bids.

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed and competed and ready for final
payment in accordance with 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the
number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of
failure to complete the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in the
Agreement.

7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of the Bid:

A. Required Bid security in the amount of 10% of the maximum Bid price including
alternates, if any, and in the form of a Bid Bond identified in the Instructions To Bidders.

{Specific for each project}

B. AGENCY required certifications. (Refer to Special Provisions, for AGENCY
certifications and requirements.)

C. Any requirements per Special Provisions, including: (1) tabulation of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and others; (2) individuals and entities required to be identified in this Bid; (3) required
Bidder qualifications statement with supporting data; and,

D. List other documents as pertinent.

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 5 of 7
8.01 The terms used in this Bid with the initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the
Instructions To Bidders, General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

SUBMITTED on , .
(Date)

Montana Contractor's Registration # (if any) .

Employers Tax ID No. ____________________________________________

If BIDDER is:

An Individual:
(Name typed or printed)
By:
(Individual's Signature)
Doing business as:

Business Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

A Partnership:
(Partnership Name)
By:
(Signature)

(Name, typed or printed)
Business Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 6 of 7
A Corporation:
(Corporation Name)
State of Incorporation:

Type(General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):

By:
(Signature of person authorized to sign)
Title:

Attest:
(Signature)

Business Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

Date of Qualification To Do Business Is:

(Corporate Seal)

A Joint Venture: Each Joint Venture Must Sign

Joint Venturer Name:
(Name)
By:
(Signature of Joint Venture Partner)
Name:
(Name, printed or typed)
Title:

Business Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

Section 00300 6
th
Edition
BID FORM
Page 7 of 7
Joint Venturer Name:
(Name)
By:
(Signature of Joint Venture Partner)
Name:
(Name, printed or typed)
Title:

Business Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

Address of Joint Venture for Receipt of Official Communication:
Address:

Phone No.: FAX No:

(Each Joint Venture must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and
corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.)

END OF SECTION
Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 1 of 8

SECTION 00500

AGREEMENT FORM

This Agreement is dated as of the day of in the year , by and between
, hereinafter called "Owner" and
hereinafter called
Contractor. Owner and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth,
agree as follows:

Article 1. WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:

Article 2. THE PROJECT

2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a
part is generally described as follows:

Article 3. ENGINEER

3.01 The Project has been designed by:

____ _
who is hereinafter called Engineer and who is to act as Owner's representative, assume all duties
and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract
Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.

Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 2 of 8
Article 4. CONTRACT TIME

4.01 Time of the Essence.

A. All the time limits for milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and
readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Days to achieve Substantial Completion.

A. The Work will be substantially complete within days after the date when the
Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions.

4.03 Liquidated damages.

A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement
and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified
in paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the
General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in
proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not
completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree
that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner
dollars ($ ) for each day that expires after the time specified in
paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.

Article 5. CONTRACT PRICE

5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified
item of Unit Price Work times the quantity of that item that is constructed and accepted. Unit
prices are those listed in the Unit Price Schedule of the Bid Form attached as Exhibit A to this
Agreement. Estimated quantities used for bidding purposes are not guaranteed. Payment will be
for actual quantities as determined by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 9.07 of the General
Conditions. Unit prices have been computed as provided in paragraph 11.03 of the General
Conditions.

Article 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments:

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the
General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the
Contract Documents.

Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 3 of 8
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage:

A. Owner shall make progress payments in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions on account of the Contract Price on the basis of Contractor's Applications for Payment
as recommended by Engineer, once each month during construction as provided below. All
progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the number of units
of each bid item completed times the bid unit price in the Unit Price Schedule of the Bid Form for
that item.

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to
the sum of the unit price items less the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the
aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine
or Owner may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions.

a. The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of the amount of each payment until
final completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract Documents.

b. Retainage will be five percent (5%) of materials and equipment not incorporated
in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation
satisfactory to Owner as provided in paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions).

2. Upon Substantial Completion and at the Owners discretion, the amount of retainage may
be further reduced if requested by the Contractor.

6.03 Final Payment:

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.07
of the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by
Engineer as provided in said paragraph 14.07.

Article 7. INTEREST:

7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear
interest at the maximum rate allowed by law at the place of the Project.

Article 8. CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATION:

8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the following
representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents (including all
Addenda) listed in paragraph 9 and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents

Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 4 of 8
B. Contractor has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the
general, local and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the
Work.

C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work.

D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities)
which have been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the
Site which has been identified in the Special Provisions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the
General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that such reports and drawings are not Contract
Documents and may not be complete for Contractor's purposes. Contractor acknowledges that
Owner and Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information
and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site.

E. Contractor has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done
so) all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and
data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the
site or otherwise, which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which
relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to
be employed by Contractor including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences
and procedures of construction, if any, expressly required by the Contract Documents to be
employed by the Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

F. Contractor does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the performance and furnishing of the Work at
the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.

G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others
at the site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has correlated the information known to Contractor, information and
observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract
Documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data
with the Contract Documents.

I. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution
thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of
all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 5 of 8
Article 9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:

9.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (Pages 1 to , inclusive);

2. Performance Bond (pages 1 to , inclusive);

3. Payment Bond (pages 1 to , inclusive);

4. Other Bonds (pages 1 to , inclusive);
a. (pages to , inclusive);
b. (pages to , inclusive);
c. (pages to , inclusive);

5. General Conditions (pages 1 to , inclusive);

6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to , inclusive);

7. Special Provisions (pages 1 to , inclusive);

8. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual;

9. Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered through with each
sheet bearing the following general title: _____;

10. Addenda (Numbers __________to _________, inclusive);

11. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. Notice To Proceed (pages 1 to , inclusive);
b. Contractor's Bid (pages _____ to ____, inclusive);
c. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award
(pages________ to ________, inclusive);

12. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto:
a. Written Amendments;
b. Work Change Directives;
c. Change Order(s).

B. The documents listed in paragraph 9.01.A. are attached to this Agreement (except as
expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.

Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 6 of 8
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided
in paragraphs 3.04 of the General Conditions.

Article 10. MISCELLANEOUS:

10.01 Terms.

A. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions
will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.

10.02 Assignment of Contract.

A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract
Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought
to be bound; and specifically, but without limitation, moneys that may come due and moneys that
are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this
restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written
consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract Documents.

10.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in
respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

10.04 Severability

A. Any provision of part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under
and Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be
reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision
that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.
Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 7 of 8
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed 6 copies of Agreement. Three
counterparts have been delivered to Owner, two to Contractor and one to Engineer. All portions
of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by Owner and Contractor or by
Engineer on their behalf.

This Agreement will be effective on , (which is the effective
date of the Agreement).

This Agreement shall not be effective unless and until concurred by Funding Agencys (if any)
designated representative.

Owner Contractor

By By
(Signature) (Signature)

Attest Attest
(Signature) (Signature)

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

Phone No. Phone No.

FAX No. FAX No.

(CORPORATE SEAL) (SEAL)

(If OWNER is a public body, attach evidence Contractor Registration No.
of authority to sign and resolution or other
documents authorizing execution of Owner - Agent for service of process:
Contractor Agreement.

(If CONTRACTOR is a corporation or a
partnership, attach evidence of authority to
sign.)
Section 00500 6
th
Edition
AGREEMENT
Page 8 of 8
Owners Designated Representative: Contractors Designated Representative:

Name: Name:

Title: Title:

Address: Address:

Phone No.: Phone No.:

FAX No.: FAX No.:

AGENCY CONCURANCE:

As lender or insurer of funds to defray the costs of this Contract, and without liability for any
payments thereunder, the Agency hereby concurs in the form, content, and execution of this
Agreement.

By:
(Agency Officials Signature)
Title:

Date:

END OF SECTION

EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract
Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its
use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated
Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly by

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES
______________________

ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA
______________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
_______________________

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE
A Practice Division of the
NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS

Endorsed by

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE


These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a
change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the
Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in
the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions
(EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition).

Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers
1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
(703) 684-2882
www.nspe.org

American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005
(202) 347-7474
www.acec.org

American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org

Associated General Contractors of America
2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308
(703) 548-3118
www.agc.org

The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four
EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE.

Page i

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 5
Article 2 Preliminary Matters ......................................................................................................................... 6
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 6
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 6
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................... 6
2.04 Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7
2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives .................................. 7
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .................................................................................................... 7
Article 3 Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................ 8
3.01 Intent .............................................................................................................................................. 8
3.02 Reference Standards ...................................................................................................................... 8
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ....................................................................................... 9
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ................................................................... 9
3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10
3.06 Electronic Data ............................................................................................................................ 10
Article 4 Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental
Conditions; Reference Points ........................................................................................................... 11
4.01 Availability of Lands ................................................................................................................... 11
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ........................................................................................... 11
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................. 12
4.04 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 13
4.05 Reference Points .......................................................................................................................... 14
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site .............................................................................. 14
Article 5 Bonds and Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 16
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ................................................................................... 16
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................................................................................... 16
5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 17
5.04 Contractors Insurance ................................................................................................................ 17
5.05 Owners Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................ 19
5.06 Property Insurance ....................................................................................................................... 19
5.07 Waiver of Rights ......................................................................................................................... 20
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds ......................................................................... 21

Page ii

5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................................................... 21
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer .......................................................... 22
Article 6 Contractors Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 22
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ............................................................................................... 22
6.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 22
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 22
6.04 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 23
6.05 Substitutes and Or-Equals ....................................................................................................... 23
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 25
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 27
6.08 Permits ......................................................................................................................................... 27
6.09 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 28
6.10 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 28
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 28
6.12 Record Documents ...................................................................................................................... 29
6.13 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 29
6.14 Safety Representative .................................................................................................................. 30
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs.............................................................................................. 30
6.16 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 30
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ...................................................................................................... 31
6.18 Continuing the Work ................................................................................................................... 32
6.19 Contractors General Warranty and Guarantee .......................................................................... 33
6.20 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................... 33
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ............................................................................... 34
Article 7 Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................................... 35
7.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 35
7.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................ 35
7.03 Legal Relationships ..................................................................................................................... 36
Article 8 Owners Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 36
8.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................... 36
8.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................ 36
8.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 36
8.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 36
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 36
8.06 Insurance...................................................................................................................................... 36
8.07 Change Orders ............................................................................................................................. 37
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 37
8.09 Limitations on Owners Responsibilities ................................................................................... 37
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................................................... 37
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .......................................................................................... 37
8.12 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 37
Article 9 Engineers Status During Construction ......................................................................................... 37
9.01 Owners Representative .............................................................................................................. 37

Page iii

9.02 Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................ 37
9.03 Project Representative ................................................................................................................. 38
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 38
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ........................................................................................................... 38
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .......................................................................... 39
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work .......................................................................................... 39
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ..................... 39
9.09 Limitations on Engineers Authority and Responsibilities ........................................................ 39
9.10 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................... 40
Article 10 Changes in the Work; Claims ..................................................................................................... 40
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 40
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................ 41
10.03 Execution of Change Orders ....................................................................................................... 41
10.04 Notification to Surety .................................................................................................................. 41
10.05 Claims .......................................................................................................................................... 41
Article 11 Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ....................................................................... 42
11.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................... 42
11.02 Allowances .................................................................................................................................. 45
11.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 45
Article 12 Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times ............................................................... 46
12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 46
12.02 Change of Contract Times .......................................................................................................... 47
12.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 47
Article 13 Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....................... 48
13.01 Notice of Defects ......................................................................................................................... 48
13.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 48
13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 49
13.04 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................ 49
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................... 50
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 50
13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 50
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ................................................................................................... 51
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work ......................................................................................... 52
Article 14 Payments to Contractor and Completion .................................................................................... 52
14.01 Schedule of Values ...................................................................................................................... 52
14.02 Progress Payments ...................................................................................................................... 52
14.03 Contractors Warranty of Title .................................................................................................... 55
14.04 Substantial Completion ............................................................................................................... 55
14.05 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 56
14.06 Final Inspection ........................................................................................................................... 57
14.07 Final Payment .............................................................................................................................. 57
14.08 Final Completion Delayed .......................................................................................................... 58

Page iv

14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................ 58
Article 15 Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................ 59
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ......................................................................................................... 59
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................... 59
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................... 60
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate................................................................................... 60
Article 16 Dispute Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 61
16.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................. 61
Article 17 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 61
17.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 61
17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 62
17.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 62
17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 62
17.05 Controlling Law .......................................................................................................................... 62
17.06 Headings ...................................................................................................................................... 62

Page 1 of 62

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial
capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to
both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial
capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs,
and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. AddendaWritten or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,
correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents.
2. AgreementThe written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and
Contractor covering the Work.
3. Application for PaymentThe form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor
during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
4. AsbestosAny material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is
releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United
States Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
5. BidThe offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the Work to be performed.
6. BidderThe individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner.
7. Bidding DocumentsThe Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents
(including all Addenda).
8. Bidding RequirementsThe advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid
security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements.
9. Change OrderA document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and
Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
10. ClaimA demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract
Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A
demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. ContractThe entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor
concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or
agreements, whether written or oral.

Page 2 of 62

12. Contract DocumentsThose items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard
copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop
Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and
physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
13. Contract PriceThe moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work).
14. Contract TimesThe number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve
Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it
is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineers written recommendation of final
payment.
15. ContractorThe individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.
16. Cost of the WorkSee Paragraph 11.01 for definition.
17. DrawingsThat part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by
Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined.
18. Effective Date of the AgreementThe date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes
effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed
and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
19. EngineerThe individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
20. Field OrderA written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work
but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
21. General RequirementsSections of Division 1 of the Specifications.
22. Hazardous Environmental ConditionThe presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs,
Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances
that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto.
23. Hazardous WasteThe term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section
1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time.
24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or RegulationsAny and all applicable laws, rules, regulations,
ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and
courts having jurisdiction.
25. LiensCharges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or
personal property.
26. MilestoneA principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

Page 3 of 62

27. Notice of AwardThe written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon
timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein,
Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement.
28. Notice to ProceedA written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which
the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the
Work under the Contract Documents.
29. OwnerThe individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and
for whom the Work is to be performed.
30. PCBsPolychlorinated biphenyls.
31. PetroleumPetroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard
conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square
inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and
oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.
32. Progress ScheduleA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the
sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractors plan to accomplish the
Work within the Contract Times.
33. ProjectThe total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole, or a part.
34. Project ManualThe bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing
the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or
more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents.
35. Radioactive MaterialSource, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the
Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time.
36. Resident Project RepresentativeThe authorized representative of Engineer who may be
assigned to the Site or any part thereof.
37. SamplesPhysical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative
of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the
Work will be judged.
38. Schedule of SubmittalsA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required
submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
39. Schedule of ValuesA schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions
of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing
Contractors Applications for Payment.

Page 4 of 62

40. Shop DrawingsAll drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted
by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
41. SiteLands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon
which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,
and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.
42. SpecificationsThat part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and
certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto.
43. SubcontractorAn individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any
other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
44. Substantial CompletionThe time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has
progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part
thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended.
The terms substantially complete and substantially completed as applied to all or part of
the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
45. Successful BidderThe Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an
award.
46. Supplementary ConditionsThat part of the Contract Documents which amends or
supplements these General Conditions.
47. SupplierA manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a
direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor.
48. Underground FacilitiesAll underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,
manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements
containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater,
storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
49. Unit Price WorkWork to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
50. WorkThe entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to
be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or
providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and
furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction,
all as required by the Contract Documents.
51. Work Change DirectiveA written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective
Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an

Page 5 of 62

addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen
subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to
emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract
Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a
Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order
following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract
Times.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in
the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:
1. The Contract Documents include the terms as allowed, as approved, as ordered, as
directed or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment
by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives reasonable, suitable, acceptable, proper,
satisfactory, or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or
determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional
judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for
compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of
the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless
there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is
not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake
responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the
Contract Documents.
C. Day:
1. The word day means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight.
D. Defective:
1. The word defective, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or
b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
c. has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).

Page 6 of 62

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:
1. The word furnish, when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other
specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word install, when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
3. The words perform or provide, when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete
and ready for intended use.
4. When furnish, install, perform, or provide is not used in connection with services,
materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, provide
is implied.
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall
also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.
B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each
deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any
additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are
required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project
Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction.
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the
Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after
the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever
date is earlier.

Page 7 of 62

2.04 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to
run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence
to run.
2.05 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless
otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely
review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting
and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the
Contract Documents;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of
items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into
component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during
performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and
profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer,
and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as
to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling
Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining
required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to
act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the
Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information,
render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party.
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by
Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to
Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A.
Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete
and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable
schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of
the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on

Page 8 of 62

Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of
the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractors full responsibility
therefor.
2. Contractors Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable
arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractors Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it
provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required
by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the
Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the
indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to
Owner.
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as
provided in Article 9.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations
1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or
by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations
in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there
were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or
Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set
forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign
to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of
the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions
of the Contract Documents.

Page 9 of 62

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies:
1. Contractors Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each
part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and
check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor
shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy
which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected
thereby.
2. Contractors Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the
performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy
within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable
Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of
any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall
not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph
6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by
one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual
knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies:
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of
the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or
discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any
Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract
Documents); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in
violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in
the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work
Change Directive.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways:

Page 10 of 62

1. A Field Order;
2. Engineers approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph
6.17.D.3); or
3. Engineers written interpretation or clarification.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its
consultants, including electronic media editions; or
2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of
the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific
written verification or adaptation by Engineer.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
3.06 Electronic Data
A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or
Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are
limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text,
data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any
conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the users sole
risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies
govern.
B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or
otherwise without authorization of the datas creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees
that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party
shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day
acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.
C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting
from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing
from those used by the datas creator.

Page 11 of 62

ARTICLE 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions
not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must
comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are
unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owners furnishing the Site
or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of
record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and
Owners interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanics or construction
lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or
contiguous to the Site; and
2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such technical data is identified in the Supplementary
Conditions. Except for such reliance on such technical data, Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractors purposes, including, but not
limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any technical data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.

Page 12 of 62

4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or
revealed either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any technical data on which Contractor is entitled to
rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and
generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract
Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the
subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an
emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such
condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection
therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so.
B. Engineers Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will
promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owners obtaining additional
exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor)
of Engineers findings and conclusions.
C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:
1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent
that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or
decrease in Contractors cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject,
however, to the following:
a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph
4.03.A; and
b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract
Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the
submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or
b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a
result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and

Page 13 of 62

contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be
conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractors making such final commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be
made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any
of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
4.04 Underground Facilities
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on
information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground
Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such
information or data provided by others; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall
have full responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all such information and data;
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents;
c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including
Owner, during construction; and
d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Not Shown or Indicated:
1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was
not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith
(except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such
Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer.
Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to
which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the

Page 14 of 62

consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time,
Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility.
2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change
Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An
equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the
extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that
was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the
Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been
expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price
or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
4.05 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in
Engineers judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior
written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or
property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in
grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings
known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the
Site.
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and
drawings are not Contract Documents. Such technical data is identified in the Supplementary
Conditions. Except for such reliance on such technical data, Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractors purposes, including, but not
limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of
construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any technical data or any such
other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

Page 15 of 62

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or
revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified
in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible
for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible.
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall
immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with
such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph
6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in
writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to
retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly
after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to
timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph
4.06.E.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any
affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered
written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has
been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under
which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement
to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to
be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a
reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special
conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such
condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to
or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a
result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by
Owners own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition,
provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the
Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the
scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is
responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual
or entity from and against the consequences of that individuals or entitys own negligence.

Page 16 of 62

H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys,
and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to
indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individuals or
entitys own negligence.
I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractors
obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after
the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified
in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or
by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the
Contract Documents.
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided
otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list
of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial
Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed
by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individuals
authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date
the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond.
C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its
right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases
to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and
Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another
bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and
5.02.
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed
or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance
policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also

Page 17 of 62

meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions.
5.03 Certificates of Insurance
A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to
purchase and maintain.
B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of
insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to
purchase and maintain.
C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance
with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from
the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractors obligation to maintain
such insurance.
D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor.
E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on
Contractors liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents.
5.04 Contractors Insurance
A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being
performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from Contractors performance of the Work and Contractors other obligations under the
Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier,
or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
1. claims under workers compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit
acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
Contractors employees;
3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other
than Contractors employees;
4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which
are sustained:

Page 18 of 62

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of
such person by Contractor, or
b. by any other person for any other reason;
5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage
arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall:
1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be
written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary
exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional
insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional
insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary
coverage for all claims covered thereby;
2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability
provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is
greater;
3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractors indemnity obligations under
Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20;
4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially
changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner
and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of
insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);
5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may
be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07;
and
6. include completed operations coverage:
a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence
satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at
final payment and one year thereafter.

Page 19 of 62

5.05 Owners Liability Insurance
A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner,
at Owners option, may purchase and maintain at Owners expense Owners own liability
insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the
Contract Documents.
5.06 Property Insurance
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof
(subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or
required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of
them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss
payee;
2. be written on a Builders Risk all-risk policy form that shall at least include insurance for
physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and
equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss:
fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake,
collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,
water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may
be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in
writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and
equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;
5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner;
6. include testing and startup; and
7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by
Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to
whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.
B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property
insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which
will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors,

Page 20 of 62

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,
each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee.
C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be
purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal
refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to
each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver
provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07.
D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified
in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work
to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The
risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors,
or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within
the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchasers own expense.
E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance
policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and
the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to
commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not
such other insurance has been procured by Owner.
5.07 Waiver of Rights
A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will
protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such
policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or
causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the
event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of
the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other
and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or
resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property
insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors
and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as
loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused.
None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have
to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so
issued.
B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any
of them for:

Page 21 of 62

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond
direct physical loss or damage to Owners property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or
resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and
2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting
from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained
on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to
Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final
payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.
C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss
referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment
of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery
against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them.
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with
Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear,
subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner
shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance
with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached,
the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account
thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order.
B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to
Owners exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall
adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest,
Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties.
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace
A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of
the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance
with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party
shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other
evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to
the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may
reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance
required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in
writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain
prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the
other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other partys

Page 22 of 62

interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change
Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer
A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall
commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have
acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated
thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the
policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on
account of any such partial use or occupancy.
ARTICLE 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in
and expressly required by the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident
superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except
under extraordinary circumstances.
6.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work
and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times
maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at
the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the
performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owners written
consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer.
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment
and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing,
start-up, and completion of the Work.

Page 23 of 62

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified,
shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All
special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit
of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including
reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected,
used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except
as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
6.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07
as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07)
proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract
Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements
applicable thereto.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times
may only be made by a Change Order.
6.05 Substitutes and Or-Equals
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless
the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent,
or or-equal item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or
material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the
circumstances described below.
1. Or-Equal Items: If in Engineers sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed
by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in
related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an or-equal item, in
which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineers sole discretion, be
accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of
proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of
material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;

Page 24 of 62

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
2. Substitute Items:
a. If in Engineers sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor
does not qualify as an or-equal item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a
proposed substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute
items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than
Contractor.
c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as
supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate
under the circumstances.
d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute
item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:
1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general
design,
b) be similar in substance to that specified, and
c) be suited to the same use as that specified;
2) will state:
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice
Contractors achievement of Substantial Completion on time,
b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in
any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract
with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed
substitute item, and

Page 25 of 62

c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with
the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;
3) will identify:
a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and
b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and
4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of
other contractors affected by any resulting change.
B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique,
sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents,
Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure
of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow
Engineer, in Engineers sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to
that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer
will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
C. Engineers Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate
each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require
Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole
judge of acceptability. No or equal or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until
Engineers review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a
substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an or equal. Engineer will advise Contractor in
writing of any negative determination.
D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractors expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
E. Engineers Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineers costs in evaluating a substitute
proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not
Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall
reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed
substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for
making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with
Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
F. Contractors Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
or-equal at Contractors expense.
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others
A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including
those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a
replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be

Page 26 of 62

required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or
perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other
individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a
specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list
thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owners acceptance (either in writing
or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in
the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other
individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due
investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in
the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No
acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether
initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject
defective Work.
C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractors own acts and omissions. Nothing in the
Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other individual or entity; nor
2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of
any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may
otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the
Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor.
E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities
performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor.
F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
Work to be performed by any specific trade.
G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a
Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in
Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will
contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner,

Page 27 of 62

Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss
covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers
on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier,
Contractor will obtain the same.
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including
but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals,
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device
specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license
fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights.
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
6.08 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or,
if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility
owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.

Page 28 of 62

6.09 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for
monitoring Contractors compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all
court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.
However, it shall not be Contractors responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of
Contractors obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective
Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance
of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner
and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any
such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
6.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by
Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and
the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and
shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or
other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to
any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas
resulting from the performance of the Work.
2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the
Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise
resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.
3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought

Page 29 of 62

by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified
hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractors performance of the Work.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work
Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other
debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the
Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall
remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus
materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the
Contract Documents.
D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in
any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or
adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
6.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written
interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during
construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of
all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the
Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for
Owner.
6.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve
Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of
their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall
take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for
removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of
persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and

Page 30 of 62

shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall
notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation, and replacement of their property.
C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owners safety programs, if any.
The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owners safety programs that are applicable to the
Work.
D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractors safety
program with which Owners and Engineers employees and representatives must comply while
at the Site.
E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except
damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions
of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or
negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or
indirectly employed by any of them).
F. Contractors duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue
until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as
otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).
6.14 Safety Representative
A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose
duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and
supervising of safety precautions and programs.
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or
other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between
or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.
6.16 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss.
Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant
changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are
required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is

Page 31 of 62

required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work
Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in
accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each
submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show
Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to
enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph
6.17.D.
2. Samples:
a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications.
b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog
numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable
Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.
B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of
Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineers review and approval of the pertinent
submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Submittal Procedures:
1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:
a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and
Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents;
b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar information with respect thereto;
c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the
indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation
pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractors responsibilities for
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety
precautions and programs incident thereto.

Page 32 of 62

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied
Contractors obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractors review
and approval of that submittal.
3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations
that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract
Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop
Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop
Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.
D. Engineers Review:
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the
Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineers review and approval will be only
to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in
the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents.
2. Engineers review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents)
or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate
item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions.
3. Engineers review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied
with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each
such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop
Drawing or Sample. Engineers review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.
E. Resubmittal Procedures:
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number
of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and
approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.
6.18 Continuing the Work
A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor
may otherwise agree in writing.

Page 33 of 62

6.19 Contractors General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the
Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on
representation of Contractors warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractors warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor,
Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is
responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractors obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is
not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractors obligation to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:
1. observations by Engineer;
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related
thereto by Owner;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice
of acceptability by Engineer;
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.
6.20 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible
property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the
extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or
any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable .

Page 34 of 62

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or
personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph
6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or
other individual or entity under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other
employee benefit acts.
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the
liability of Engineer and Engineers officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors arising out of:
1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions,
reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the
injury or damage.
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are
specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services
are required to carry out Contractors responsibilities for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional
services in violation of applicable law.
B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,
materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner
and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.
Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed
professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop
Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if
prepared by others, shall bear such professionals written approval when submitted to Engineer.
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of
the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner
and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services
must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineers review and approval of design calculations and
design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Engineers review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except
design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph
6.17.D.1.

Page 35 of 62

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria
required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 7 OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
7.01 Related Work at Site
A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owners employees, or
through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such
other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then:
1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a
result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility
owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owners employees, proper and safe
access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials
and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with
theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to
properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with
such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or
otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work
with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and
other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor
in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractors Work depends upon work performed
by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractors Work. Contractors
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for
integration with Contractors Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work.
7.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the
Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions:
1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various contractors will be identified;
2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided.

Page 36 of 62

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility for such coordination.
7.03 Legal Relationships
A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner.
B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other
contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs
incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractors wrongful actions or inactions.
C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for
the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of
Contractors wrongful action or inactions.
ARTICLE 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITIES
8.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications
to Contractor through Engineer.
8.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom
Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be
that of the former Engineer.
8.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
8.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C
and 14.07.C.
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
A. Owners duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys
to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to
Owners identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and
tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site.
8.06 Insurance
A. Owners responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in Article 5.

Page 37 of 62

8.07 Change Orders
A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owners responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
Paragraph 13.03.B.
8.09 Limitations on Owners Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractors means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for
Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owners responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set
forth in Paragraph 4.06.
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to satisfy Owners obligations under the Contract Documents.
8.12 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Owners employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractors safety programs of which Owner has been informed
pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.
ARTICLE 9 ENGINEERS STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.01 Owners Representative
A. Engineer will be Owners representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owners representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents.
9.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction
as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design
professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of
Contractors executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations,
Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or

Page 38 of 62

continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineers efforts
will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed
Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and
observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor
to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineers visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineers authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result
of Engineers visits or observations of Contractors Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct,
control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractors means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work.
9.03 Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities
of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in
Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the
Site who is not Engineers consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and
limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary
Conditions.
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work
A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and
are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be
binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If
Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work
A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that
Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents
or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning
whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require
special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the
Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.

Page 39 of 62

9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. In connection with Engineers authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and
Samples, see Paragraph 6.17.
B. In connection with Engineers authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and
design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see
Paragraph 6.21.
C. In connection with Engineers authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
D. In connection with Engineers authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineers preliminary determinations on
such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application
for Payment or otherwise). Engineers written decision thereon will be final and binding (except
as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner
and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge
of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between
Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of
the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the
performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the
event giving rise to the question.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If
Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date
of Engineers decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the
purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B.
C. Engineers written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and
Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show
partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or
decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.
9.09 Limitations on Engineers Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineers authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of
the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not

Page 40 of 62

exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any
authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract,
tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other
individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractors means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for
Contractors failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor,
any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work.
D. Engineers review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection,
tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will
only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the
case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate
compliance with, the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply
to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any.
9.10 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineers employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractors safety programs of which Engineer has been informed
pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D.
ARTICLE 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or
from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a
Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed
with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any,
of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a
result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.

Page 41 of 62

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the
case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as
provided in Paragraph 13.04.D.
10.03 Execution of Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer
covering:
1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii)
required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owners
correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including
any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a
Work Change Directive; and
3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of
executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the
Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A.
10.04 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the
general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not
limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractors
responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any
such change.
10.05 Claims
A. Engineers Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09,
shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a
condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such
Claims.
B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant
to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after
the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with
the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data

Page 42 of 62

shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start
of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more
accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be
prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in
Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each
Claim shall be accompanied by claimants written statement that the adjustment claimed is the
entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The
opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after
receipt of the claimants last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).
C. Engineers Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last
submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the
following actions in writing:
1. deny the Claim in whole or in part;
2. approve the Claim; or
3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineers sole
discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further
resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial.
D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be
deemed denied.
E. Engineers written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or
10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor
invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or
denial.
F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
ARTICLE 11 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
11.01 Cost of the Work
A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in
Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the
Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an
adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be
reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of
the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may
be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing
in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and
shall include only the following items:

Page 43 of 62

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the
Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such
employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel
employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the
Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall
include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall
include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers
compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay
applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by
Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs
of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers field services required in connection
therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with
Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to
Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and
equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be
obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If
required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable
to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with
the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that
the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the
Subcontractors Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as
Contractors Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related
to the Work.
5. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of
Contractors employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not
owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost,
less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of
Contractor.
c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented
from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with
the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of

Page 44 of 62

said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease
when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may
be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the
performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of
property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such
losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor,
any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose
acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the
written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be
included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractors fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the
Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the
Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract
Documents to purchase and maintain.
B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractors officers, executives, principals (of
partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers,
architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents,
expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the
Site or in Contractors principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and
not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in
Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be
considered administrative costs covered by the Contractors fee.
2. Expenses of Contractors principal and branch offices other than Contractors office at the
Site.
3. Any part of Contractors capital expenses, including interest on Contractors capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not

Page 45 of 62

limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly
supplied, and making good any damage to property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically
and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A.
C. Contractors Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractors fee
shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a
Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of
Cost of the Work, Contractors fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.
D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to
Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in
accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to
Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
11.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by
such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances:
1. Contractor agrees that:
a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of
materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all
applicable taxes; and
b. Contractors costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,
profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the
Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on
account of any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Contingency Allowance:
1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover
unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer
to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the
Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
11.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to

Page 46 of 62

the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the
estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the
actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by
Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to
cover Contractors overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance
with Paragraph 10.05 if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and
significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and
3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of
having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in
Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or
decrease.
ARTICLE 12 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the
Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
10.05.
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents,
by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not
necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents
and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the
Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractors fee for
overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).

Page 47 of 62

C. Contractors Fee: The Contractors fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various
portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractors fee shall
be 15 percent;
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractors fee shall be five percent;
c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee
and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is
that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a
fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1
and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a
fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor;
d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4,
11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B;
e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results
in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
deduction in Contractors fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease;
and
f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in
Contractors fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with
Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.
12.02 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in
the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to
the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
10.05.
B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this
Article 12.
12.03 Delays
A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount
equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph
12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or

Page 48 of 62

neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as
contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God.
B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as
contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractors
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being
essential to Contractors ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.
C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic,
abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the
control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor,
then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment
is essential to Contractors ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an
adjustment shall be Contractors sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this
Paragraph 12.03.C.
D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants,
or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor
on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays
within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor
or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
ARTICLE 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Notice of Defects
A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be
given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this
Article 13.
13.02 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will
have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and
testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them
of Contractors safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable.

Page 49 of 62

13.03 Tests and Inspections
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections,
tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required
inspections or tests.
B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except:
1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;
2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph
13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and
3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such
inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the
required certificates of inspection or approval.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection
with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owners and Engineers acceptance of
materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs,
or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractors purchase thereof for incorporation in
the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to
Owner and Engineer.
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer,
uncover such Work for observation.
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractors expense unless
Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractors intention to cover the same and
Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by
Engineer, be uncovered for Engineers observation and replaced at Contractors expense.
B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or
inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineers request, shall uncover, expose, or
otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that
portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment.

Page 50 of 62

C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,
or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05.
D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will
conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any
portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the
benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any
surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or
not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it
from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited
to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others).
B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,
Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owners special warranty and
guarantee, if any, on said Work.
13.07 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract
Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be
defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractors use
by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to
be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owners
written instructions:

Page 51 of 62

1. repair such defective land or areas; or
2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it
with Work that is not defective, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work
of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owners written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the
defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All
claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and
replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will
be paid by Contractor.
C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run
from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or
removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to
such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal
and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
E. Contractors obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or
warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a
waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and,
prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may
do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owners evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by
Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineers
recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.
If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate
amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.

Page 52 of 62

13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective
Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with
Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents,
Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude
Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend
Contractors services related thereto, take possession of Contractors tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owners representatives, agents and employees,
Owners other contractors, and Engineer and Engineers consultants access to the Site to enable
Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies
under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable
to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all
costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or
replacement of Contractors defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owners rights and remedies
under this Paragraph 13.09.
ARTICLE 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14.01 Schedule of Values
A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for
progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to
Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.02 Progress Payments
A. Applications for Payments:
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but
not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an

Page 53 of 62

Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as
of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and
equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at
another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied
by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the
materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and
equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect
Owners interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.
2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an
affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the
Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractors legitimate obligations
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the
Agreement.
B. Review of Applications:
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in
writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the
Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineers reasons for refusing to recommend
payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application.
2. Engineers recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will
constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineers observations of the
executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineers
review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the
best of Engineers knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject
to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial
Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a
final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph
9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractors being entitled to such payment appear to have
been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineers responsibility to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or

Page 54 of 62

involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically
assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor
to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.
4. Neither Engineers review of Contractors Work for the purposes of recommending payments
nor Engineers recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose
responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or
c. for Contractors failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractors
performance of the Work, or
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the
moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner
free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineers
opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in
Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise
or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be
necessary in Engineers opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or
replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with
Paragraph 13.09; or
d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraph 15.02.A.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineers
recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph
14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

Page 55 of 62

D. Reduction in Payment:
1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:
a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractors performance or
furnishing of the Work;
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has
delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of
such Liens;
c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or
d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.
2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will
give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for
such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the
amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any
adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons
for such action.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owners refusal of payment was not justified, the
amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph
14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
14.03 Contractors Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no
later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.
14.04 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items
specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of
Substantial Completion.
B. Promptly after Contractors notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the
Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There
shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before

Page 56 of 62

final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which
to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If,
after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially
complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner,
notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owners
objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14
days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such
changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any
objections from Owner.
D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will
deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities
pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety,
and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and
guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in
writing prior to Engineers issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineers
aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.
E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and
complete or correct items on the tentative list.
14.05 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or
which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part
of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractors performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:
1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any
such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,
Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D
for that part of the Work.
2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers
any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request
Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall
make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer
does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify
Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part
of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with
respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.

Page 57 of 62

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance
with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance.
14.06 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will
notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is
incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.07 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment:
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record
documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make
application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and
d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien
rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved
by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor
that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for
which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or
which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid
or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or
receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to
indemnify Owner against any Lien.
B. Engineers Review of Application and Acceptance:
1. If, on the basis of Engineers observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Engineers review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying

Page 58 of 62

documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and Contractors other obligations under the Contract Documents have
been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for
Payment, indicate in writing Engineers recommendation of payment and present the
Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give
written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to
Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in
which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for
Payment.
C. Payment Becomes Due:
1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is
entitled to set off against Engineers recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated
damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
14.08 Final Completion Delayed
A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractors final Application for Payment
(for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without
terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have
been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of
the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by
Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made
under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a
waiver of Claims.
14.09 Waiver of Claims
A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:
1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled
Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06,
from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees
specified therein, or from Contractors continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;
and
2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in
accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as
still unsettled.

Page 59 of 62

ARTICLE 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period
of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will
fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so
fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause:
1. Contractors persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or
suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established
under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);
2. Contractors disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
3. Contractors repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or
4. Contractors violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving
Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of
Contractor:
1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractors
tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the
full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or
conversion);
2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner
has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and
3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive
any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price
exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work,
such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such
unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and
damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when

Page 60 of 62

so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or
remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the
Work performed.
D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractors services will not be terminated if
Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure
to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of
said notice.
E. Where Contractors services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect
any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue.
Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from
liability.
F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of
Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of
Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C.
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case,
Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior
to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on
such expenses;
3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and others; and
4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive
days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on
any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days

Page 61 of 62

to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days
written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment
on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer
has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has
failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven
days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such
amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are
not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an
adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly
attributable to Contractors stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.
ARTICLE 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a
decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation
will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration
Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall
be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the
Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.
B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall
be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation
shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above.
C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineers action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial
pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after
termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor:
1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary
Conditions; or
2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or
3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of
competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will
be deemed to have been validly given if:

Page 62 of 62

1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the
corporation for whom it is intended; or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business
address known to the giver of the notice.
17.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on
a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,
such day will be omitted from the computation.
17.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies
available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way
as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise
imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if
repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,
obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
17.04 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given
in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the
Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or
termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
17.05 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
17.06 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of
these General Conditions.
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions
Page 1 of 12
SECTION 00810

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS

These Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions amend or supplement the Standard
General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. C-700, 2007 Edition) and other provisions
of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or
supplemented remain in full force and effect.

SC - 2.01 DELIVERY OF BONDS

Add the following to Paragraph: 2.01.A

Engineer shall furnish to Contractor six copies of the Agreement and other Contract
Documents bound therewith. Contractor shall execute the Agreement, attach executed
copies of the required Bonds, Power of Attorney, and Certificate of Insurance and submit
all copies to Engineer who will forward them to the Owner. Owner shall execute all
copies and return two copies to the Contractor. Owner shall also furnish a counterpart or
conformed copy to the Engineer and shall retain three copies.

SC 2.03 NOTICE TO PROCEED

Delete the first sentence of Paragraph 2.03.A of the General Conditions and insert the following
in its place:

Following the execution of the Agreement by the Owner and the Contractor, written
Notice to Proceed with the Work shall be given by the Owner to the Contractor. The
Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed.

SC - 2.05 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 2.05.A.3 of the General Conditions which is
to read as follows:

2.05.A.4 Contractor shall submit a preliminary list of construction equipment with hourly
rates, owned or rented by the Contractor and all Subcontractors that will be used in the
performance of the Work. The equipment list will include information necessary to
confirm the hourly rates per Paragraph 11.01.A.5.c of the General Conditions and these
Supplementary Conditions including: make, model, and year of manufacture as well as
the horse power, capacity or weight, and accessories.

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 12
SC - 2.07 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE OF SCHEDULES

Delete the first paragraph of 2.07.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the
following in its place:

Prior to the first application for payment all schedules and documents identified in
paragraph 2.05.A shall be finalized and acceptable to the Engineer and Owner. No
progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to
Engineer and Owner as provided below. Acceptance of these schedules and documents
by either Engineer or Owner will neither impose on Engineer or Owner responsibility for
the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work and will not interfere with or relieve
Contractor from Contractors full responsibility therefore.

Add the following after Paragraph 2.07.A.3:

Contractors Schedule of Construction Equipment will be acceptable to Engineer as to
form and substance if it provides the necessary information to reference the equipment
and establish the hourly rates in accordance with paragraph 11.01.A.5.c.

SC - 4.01 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS

Add to Paragraph 4.01.C of the General Conditions the following:

If it is necessary or desirable that the Contractor use land outside of the Owners
easement or right-of-way, the Contractor shall obtain consent from the property owner
and tenant of the land. The Contractor shall not enter for materials delivery or occupy for
any other purpose with men, tools, equipment, construction materials, or with materials
excavated from the site, any private property outside the designated construction
easement boundaries or right-of-way without written permission from the property owner
and tenant.

SC - 4.02 - SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

Delete the first sentence of 4.02.A and replace with the following:

A. Reports and Drawings: The Special Provisions identify:

Delete the reference to Supplementary Conditions in paragraph 4.02.B and replace with Special
Provisions.

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 12
SC 4.03 - DIFFERING SUBSURFACE OR PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

Add the following to the end of Paragraphs 4.03.A.

Contractor to notify Owner and Engineer in writing about differing subsurface or
physical conditions within 15 days of discovery and before disturbing the subsurface as
stated above.

No claim for an adjustment in the contract price or contract times (or Milestones) will be
valid for differing subsurface or physical conditions if procedures of this paragraph 4.03
are not followed.

SC - 4.04 - UNDERGROUND FACILITIES

Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.04.A.2.

3. At least 2 but not more than 10 business days before beginning any excavation,
the Contractor shall according to MCA 69-4-501, notify all owners of
underground facilities and coordinate the Work with the owners of such
underground facilities. The information shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents with respect to existing underground facilities is based on information
and data obtained from the owners of the facilities without field exploration, and
as such, Owner and Engineer are not responsible for the accuracy or completeness
of such information or data.

SC - 4.06 - HAZARDOUS ENVIORNMENTAL CONDITION AT SITE

Change the first sentence of paragraph A to read as follows:

A. Reports and Drawings: The Special Provisions identify those reports.

SC- 5.02 LICENSED SURETIES AND INSURERS

Add the following to the end of Paragraph 5.02.A

Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of the Contractor, Contractor
shall secure and maintain such insurance from an insurance company (or companies)
authorized to write insurance in the State of Montana, with minimum A.M. Best Rating
of A-, VI, as will protect the Contractor, the vicarious acts of subcontractors, the Owner
and the Engineer and their agents and employees from claims for bodily injury, or
property damage which may arise from operations and completed operations under this
Agreement. Contractor shall not commence work under this Agreement until such
insurance has been obtained and certificates of insurance, with binders, or certified
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 12
copies of the insurance policy shall have been filed with the Owner and the Engineer.

All insurance coverage shall remain in effect throughout the life of the Agreement,
except that the Contractor shall maintain the Commercial General Liability Policy
including product and completed operations coverage for a period of at least one year
following the substantial completion date for property damage resulting from
occurrences during the agreement period.

SC 5.04 CONTRACTORS LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.04.B:

C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.04 of the General
Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater
where required by Law or Regulations:

1. Workers Compensation, etc. under Paragraphs 5.04.1 and 5.04.2 of the General
Conditions.

a. State Statutory
b. Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoremans) Statutory
c. Employers Liability $ 500,000.00

2. Contractors Liability Insurance under Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04. A.6 of
the General Conditions which shall also include completed operations and product
liability coverage.

a. GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 3,000,000.00

b. Products-Completed
Operations Aggregate $ 3,000,000.00

c. Personal and Advertising

d. Each Occurrence
(Bodily Injury and
Property Damage) $ 1,000,000.00

e. Coverage will include:

1. Premises - Operations
2. Operations of Independent Contractor
3. Contractual Liability
4. Personal Injury
5 Products and Completed Operations
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 12
6. Broad Form Property Damage will include explosion,
collapse, blasting and underground where applicable.
7. Per Project Aggregate Endorsement

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 5.04.A.6 of the General Conditions:

a. Bodily Injury:
Each Person $ 500,000.00
Each Accident $ 1,000,000.00

Property Damage:
Each Accident $1,000,000.00

(or)

b. Combined Single Limit $ 1,000,000.00

Coverage to Include

1. All Owned
2. Hired
3. Non-Owned

4. Contractors Liability Insurance under 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 may be satisfied
by primary insurance or a combination of primary and excess or umbrella
insurance. Primary occurrence limit cannot be less than $1,000,000.00.
Deductible not to exceed $5,000.00 per occurrence on property damage.

5. Add a new paragraph at the end of Paragraph 5.04.B. 1 of the General Conditions
as follows:

The Contractors insurance coverage shall name the Owner, and Engineer and
Engineers Consultants as an additional insured under Commercial General
Liability, Automobile Liability, Excess or Umbrella polices.

6. The Contractual Liability coverage required by Paragraph 5.04.B.4. of the
General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following
amounts:

Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000.00
Aggregate $ 3,000,000.00

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 12
SC- 5.04.B.5 CANCELATION NOTICE

Amend paragraph 5.04.B.5 of the General Conditions by striking out the words 30
days and replacing them with the words 45 days and as so amended paragraph
5.04.B.5 remains in effect.

SC - 5.06 PROPERTY INSURANCE

Delete Article 5.06.A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its
place:

A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the work at the
site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible
amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by
Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. Include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-
Subcontractors Engineer, Engineers Consultants, and any other
persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each
of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed
as an insured or additional insured;

2. be written on a Builders Risk all risk or open peril or special
causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for
physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false
work and materials and equipment in transit and shall insure against
at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning,
extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief,
earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by
enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than
caused by floods), and other perils or causes of loss as may be
specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions.

3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to the fees and charges of
engineers and architects);

4. cover materials and equipment in transit for incorporation in the
Work or stored at the site or at another location prior to being
incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and
equipment have been included in an Application for Payment
recommended by Engineer; and

5. be endorsed to allow occupancy and partial utilization of the Work
by Owner.
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 12
6. include testing and start-up; and

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise
agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with thirty
days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured retention.

C. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor
in accordance with this Paragraph SC5.06 shall comply with the requirements of
Paragraph 5.06.C of the General Conditions.

D. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by Contractor
in accordance with this Article 5.06.A shall comply with the requirements of GC -
5.06.C. The qualifications of the insurance company shall comply with the
requirements of SC- 5.02.A.

SC-6.02 Working Hours

Add the following to Paragraph 6.02.B:

Regular working hours are defined as 8:00 AM. to 5:00 P.M. Emergency work may be
done without prior permission.

SC-6.04 PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Delete Paragraph 6.04.A.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the
following:

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer with each application for payment an updated
progress schedule reflecting the amount of work completed and adjustments to future
work. Such adjustments will be acceptable to Engineer as providing an orderly
progression of the Work to completion within any specified milestones and the Contract
Time. No progress payment will be made to Contractor until the updated schedules are
submitted to and acceptable to Engineer and Owner. Review and acceptance of progress
schedules by the Engineer will neither impose on Engineer responsibility for the
sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor
from Contractors full responsibility therefore.

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 12
SC- 6.13 SAFETY AND PROTECTION

Change Supplementary Conditions in paragraph 6.13.C to Special Provisions.

Add new paragraphs to the end of paragraph 6.13.F of the General Conditions as follows:

G. It is expressly understood by the parties to this Agreement that the Contractor is
solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. The right of the Owner and Engineer
to observe or otherwise review the Work and operations shall not relieve the
Contractor from any of his covenants and obligations hereunder. Contractor shall
incorporate all safety requirements into his construction progress and work
schedules including preconstruction and scheduled monthly safety meetings,
posted safety rules, tailgate meetings, and site inspections by safety and other
inspectors employed by the Contractor.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take necessary precautions and
provide all material and equipment to protect, shore, brace, support and maintain
all underground pipes, conduits, drains, sewers, water mains, gas mains, cables,
etc., and other underground construction uncovered in the proximity, or otherwise
affected by the construction work performed by him. All pavement, surfacing,
driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, grass areas, trees, utility poles or guy wires
damaged by the Contractors operations in the performance of this work shall be
repaired and/or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner, Engineer, and effected
property owner at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for all damage to streets, roads, highways, shoulders, ditches,
embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property or facility,
regardless of location or character, which may be caused by moving, hauling, or
otherwise transporting equipment, materials, or men to and from the work or any
part of site thereof; whether by him or his subcontractors. The Contractor shall
make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with owner of, or the agency or
authority having jurisdiction over, the damaged property or facility concerning its
repair or replacement or payment of costs incurred in connection with said
damage.

I. The Contractor shall conduct his work so as to interfere as little as possible with
public travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross,
obstruct, or close roads, driveways, and walks, whether public or private, the
Contractor shall obtain approval from the governing party and shall, at his own
expense, provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, and other
temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private drives before
interfering with them. The provisions for temporary expedients will not be
required when the Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant
of the private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public
property involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 12
J. Safety provisions must be entirely adequate and meet with City or State and
Federal regulations to protect the public on these streets and roads.

SC- 6.20 INDEMNIFICATION

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.20.A. of the General Conditions which is to
read as follows:

While Owner and Engineer may have the right under this Contract to observe or
otherwise review the work, progress and operations of the Contractor, it is
expressly understood and agreed that such observation shall not relieve the
Contractor from any of its covenants and obligations hereunder.

SC-9.03 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE

Refer to the Special Provisions for identification of the responsibilities and authority and
limitations of the Engineers Resident Project Representative (if any).

SC- 11.01 COST OF THE WORK

Delete paragraph 11.01 .A.5.c of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in
its place:

11.01.A.5.c The rental of all construction equipment and machinery and parts thereof
whether rented from Contractor or rented from others. The cost shall be calculated as
follows and will include the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling and removal thereof for equipment involved only in the changed portion of
the work covered under the cost of the Work method. Transportation, loading and
assembly costs will not be included for equipment already on the site which is being used
for other portions of the Work. The cost of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall
cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. Hourly equipment and
machinery rates shall be calculated from the Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction
Equipment, and the Equipment List submitted according to SC 2.05 and SC 2.07, and as
follows:

1. For working equipment, the hourly rate shall be the monthly rental rate
divided by 176 hours per month plus the hourly operating cost.

2. For equipment on standby, the hourly rate shall be 50% of the monthly
rental rate divided by 176 hours per month, and the hourly operating cost
shall not be applied.

3. For specialized equipment rented for a short duration used for change
order work or additional work not part of the scope of work bid, the
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 10 of 12
equipment rental rates will be negotiated prior to the work being
performed.

SC-l1.03 UNIT PRICE WORK

Delete paragraph 11.03.D.1 and 2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the
following in its place:

l. the quantity of a particular item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by
more than 25% from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement, and

2. the total cost of the particular individual item of Unit Price Work amounts to 10% or
more of the Contract Price which is the total sum of all schedules (if any), and

SC- 14.02.A APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTS

Add the following language at the end of paragraph 14.02.A.1 of the General Conditions:

Payments for materials in storage shall be based only upon the actual cost of the materials
and equipment to Contractor and shall not include any overhead or profit. Bill of Sale,
invoice or other document warranting clear title for materials in storage will be waived
for the material in storage included in the first progress payment application. However,
proof of payment and clear title must be submitted with Application No. 2 for all material
included in Application No. 1. Without such documentation amounts paid for materials in
storage will be deducted from subsequent payments. Beginning with the second
application, all requests for payment for materials in storage shall be accompanied by Bill
of Sale, invoice or other document warranting clear title as required above.

Add the following to Paragraph 14.02.A.3:

In accordance with state law the Owner may accept deposited securities in lieu of cash
retainage. Retainage may be used by the Owner to offset costs for any of the losses
enumerated in Paragraphs l4.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.d inclusive, 14.02.D.1.a. through
14.02.D.1.d inclusive, or 15.02.C. In addition retainage may be used by the Owner to
protect against loss from failure by the Contractor to complete necessary work and to
offset any liquidated damages due Owner.

Add a new paragraph after paragraph to 14.02.A.3 to read:

4. Each application for progress payment shall be accompanied by Contractors
updated progress schedule, shop drawing schedule, procurement schedule, and
other data specified herein or reasonably required by Owner or Engineer. The
Owner reserves the right to require submission of monthly certified payrolls by the
Contractor.

Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 11 of 12
SC 14.02.C PAYMENT BECOMES DUE

Delete Paragraph 14.02.C.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in
its place:

1. The Owner will, upon presentation to him of the Contractors Application for
Payment with Engineers recommendation, review and act upon said payment
request once each month on or about the day of each month stipulated by the
Owner at the preconstruction conference. Payment will become due when Owner
approves the application for payment and when due, will be paid by Owner to
Contractor.

SC- 14.02.D.1.c

Amend the sentence of Paragraph 14.02.D.1.c to read:

entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, including liquidated
damages;or...

SC-14.03 CONTRACTORS WARRANTY OF TITLE

Add the following at the end of Paragraph 14.03.A of the General Conditions:

Neither recommendation of any progress payment by Engineer nor payment by the
Owner to Contractor, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof will
release the Contractor from complying with the Contract Documents. Specifically the
Contractor shall maintain in accordance with Article 5, property insurance on all Work,
materials, and equipment whether incorporated in the project or not and whether included
in an application for payment or not, for the hull insurable value thereof. Passing title to
Owner for materials and equipment included in an application for payment does not
relieve the Contractor of the Contractors obligation to provide insurance (including
property insurance) as required in Article 5 of the General Conditions and these
Supplementary Conditions. All insurance shall remain in effect as provided in Article 5.

SC- 14.05 PARTIAL UTILIZATION

Add the following to Paragraph 14.05.A:

Owner has the right to take possession of or use any completed or substantially
completed portions of the work at any time, but such taking possession or use will not be
deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Owners use of any facilities so identified in the Contract Documents will
not be grounds for extension of the contract time or change in the contract price. Owners
use of any facilities not specifically identified in the Contract Documents will be in
Section 00810 6
th
Edition
Page 12 of 12
accordance with conditions agreed to prior to such use, and any extra costs or delays in
completion incurred and properly claimed by Contractor will be equitably adjusted with a
Change Order. Facilities substantially completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents which are occupied or used by Owner prior to substantial completion of the
entire work will be done in accordance with General Conditions 14.04. Guarantee
periods for accepted or substantially completed work including mechanical and electrical
equipment will commence upon the start of continuous use by Owner. All tests and
instruction of Owners personnel must be satisfactorily completed, and Owner shall
assume responsibility for and operation of all facilities occupied or used except as may
arise through portions of work not yet completed by Contractor If the work has been
substantially completed and the Engineer certifies that full completion thereof is
materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall, without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for the portion of the work
fully completed and accepted.

SC- 14.06 FINAL INSPECTION

Add the following to Paragraph 14.06.A:

After Contractor has remedied all deficiencies to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
delivered all construction records, maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, and other documents (all as required by the
Contract Documents), Owner and Contractor shall be promptly notified in writing by
Engineer that the work is acceptable.

SC- 17.01 GIVING NOTICE

Add the following to Paragraph 17.0l.A:

The mailing address for giving notices to Contractor given in the Agreement is hereby
designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communication to
Contractor will be mailed or delivered. The mailing address for giving notices to Owner
given in the Agreement is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and
other communication to Owner shall be mailed or delivered. Either party may change his
address at any time by an instrument in writing delivered to Engineer and to other party.

EJCDC C-410 Suggested Bid Form for Construction Contracts

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to
its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated
Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

SUGGESTED BID FORM
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Prepared by


and


______________________

______________________

_______________________


Endorsed by



(703) 684-2882
www.nspe.org

(202) 347-7474
www.acec.org

(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org

(703) 548-3118
www.agc.org

Page iii

SECTION 00410
BID FORM

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:

(Name of Project)

(Location)

CONTRACT IDENTIFICATION AND NUMBER:

Page iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article 1 Bid Recipient ................................................................................................................................... 1
Article 2 Bidders Acknowledgements .......................................................................................................... 1
Article 3 Bidders Representations................................................................................................................. 1
Article 4 Bidders Certification ...................................................................................................................... 2
Article 5 Basis of Bid ..................................................................................................................................... 3
Article 6 Time of Completion ........................................................................................................................ 7
Article 7 Attachments to This Bid .................................................................................................................. 3
Article 8 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................. 3
Article 9 Bid Submittal ................................................................................................................................... 4

Page 1 of 5

ARTICLE 1 BID RECIPIENT
1.01 This Bid is submitted to:
[Insert Name and Address of Owner]
1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement
with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or
indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2 BIDDERS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without
limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to
acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may
agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
ARTICLE 3 BIDDERS REPRESENTATIONS
3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:
A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, other related data identified
in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of which is hereby
acknowledged:
Addendum No. Addendum Date

B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and
Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost,
progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at
or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or
subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) that have been identified in
Special Provisions as containing reliable "technical data," and (2) reports and drawings of
Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been identified in Special
Provisions as containing reliable "technical data."
E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder; information commonly known to
contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained
from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings
Page 2 of 5

identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such information,
observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by
Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures
of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents; and (3) Bidders safety
precautions and programs.
F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 3.01.E above, Bidder does
not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are
necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and
within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents.
G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site
that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies
that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by
Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.
1. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all
terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted.
ARTICLE 4 BIDDERS CERTIFICATION
4.01 Bidder certifies that:
A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or
entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or rules of any group,
association, organization, or corporation;
B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or
sham Bid;
C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and
D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing for
the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:
1. corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value
likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;
2. fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence
the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at artificial non-
competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
Page 3 of 5

3. collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or
without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices at artificial,
non-competitive levels; and
4. coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or
their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution
of the Contract.
ARTICLE 5 BASIS OF BID
5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following
price(s):

[SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR UNIT PRICE BID]
Item No. Description Unit
Estimated
Quantity Bid Unit Price Bid Price
$ $
$ $
$ $
Total of All Bid Prices $

Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 11.03.B of the General Conditions.
Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids, and final payment for all unit price Bid items will be based on actual
quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 6 TIME OF COMPLETION
6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for
final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before the dates
or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.
6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.
ARTICLE 7 ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID
7.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:
A. Required Bid security in the amount of 10% of the maximum bid price including alternatives, if
any, and in the form indentified in the Instructions to Bidders.
ARTICLE 8 DEFINED TERMS
8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to
Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.
Page 4 of 5

ARTICLE 9 BID SUBMITTAL
9.01 This Bid is submitted by:
If Bidder is:

An Individual

Name (typed or printed):

By:
(Individuals signature)

Doing business as:

A Partnership

Partnership Name:

By:
(Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


A Corporation

Corporation Name: (SEAL)

State of Incorporation:
Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability):_______

By:
(Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


Title:
(CORPORATE SEAL)

Attest

Date of Qualification to do business in [State where Project is located] is
____/____/____.

Page 5 of 5

A Joint Venture

Name of Joint Venture:

First Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL)

By:
(Signature of first joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


Title:

Second Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL)

By:
(Signature of second joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign)


Title:

(Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership,
and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated
above.)

Bidder's Business Address

Phone No. _____________________________________ Fax No.

E-mail ______________________________ _______

SUBMITTED on , 20____.

State Contractor License No. . [If applicable]

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.
Page 1 of 2

BID BOND
Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
BIDDER (Name and Address):

SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business):

OWNER (Name and Address):

BID
Bid Due Date:
Description (Project Name and Include Location):

BOND
Bond Number:
Date (Not earlier than Bid due date):
Penal sum $
(Words) (Figures)

Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this
Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

BIDDER SURETY
(Seal) (Seal)
Bidders Name and Corporate Seal Suretys Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:
Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature

Title Title
Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional
parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form)
Page 2 of 2

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,
and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of
the penal sum is the extent of Bidders and Suretys liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this
Bond shall be Owners sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding
Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the
Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation shall be null and void if:
3.1 Owner accepts Bidders Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or
any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding
Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents
(or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when
required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after
receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable
promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of
Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award
including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Suretys written
consent.
6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default
required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due
date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in
the state in which the Project is located.
8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses
shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United
States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective
upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the
authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and
deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any
applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at
length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall
govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.
11. The term Bid as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
EJCDC C-510 Notice of Award
Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by the Construction Specifications Institute.
Page 1 of 1

Notice of Award

Date: __________________

Project:
Owner: Owner's Contract No.:
Contract: Engineer's Project No.:
Bidder:
Bidder's Address: [send Notice of Award Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]

You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been considered. You are the
Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for

[Indicate total Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded.]
The Contract Price of your Contract is Dollars ($ ).
[Insert appropriate data if unit prices are used. Change language for cost-plus contracts.]
copies of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award.
sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within [15] days of the date you receive this
Notice of Award.
1. Deliver to the Owner [ ] fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents.
2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents the Contract security [Bonds] as specified in the
Instructions to Bidders (Article 20), General Conditions (Paragraph 5.01), and Supplementary
Conditions (Paragraph SC-5.01).
3. Other conditions precedent:

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in
default, annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed
counterpart of the Contract Documents.

Owner
By:
Authorized Signature

Title
Copy to Engineer

EJCDC C-520 Suggested Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price)

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with
respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of
the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations.

SUGGESTED FORM OF AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

Prepared by


and


______________________

______________________

_______________________


Endorsed by



This Suggested Form of Agreement has been prepared for use with the Standard General Conditions
of the Construction Contract (EJCDC C-700, 2007 Edition). Their provisions are interrelated, and a
change in one may necessitate a change in the other. The language contained in the Suggested
Instructions to Bidders (EJCDC C-200, 2007 Edition) is also carefully interrelated with the language
of this Agreement. Their usage is discussed in the Narrative Guide to the 2007 EJCDC Construction
Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition).

(703) 684-2882
www.nspe.org

(202) 347-7474
www.acec.org

(800) 548-2723
www.asce.org

(703) 548-3118
www.agc.org


Page 1 of 9

SUGGESTED FORM OF AGREEMENT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

This Agreement is dated as of the day of in the year , by
and between , hereinafter called Owner
and ereinafter called Contractor,
in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 WORK
1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:

ARTICLE 2 THE PROJECT
2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is
generally described as follows:

ARTICLE 3 ENGINEER
3.01 The Project has been designed by (Engineer), which is to act as Owners representative,
assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in
the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time of the Essence
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for
final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

Page 2 of 9

4.02 Days to Achieve Substantial Completion and Final Payment
A. The Work will be substantially completed within days after the date when the Contract
Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and
completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the General
Conditions within days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.
4.03 Liquidated Damages
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01 above
and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified
in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of
the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved
in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is
not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor
agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay Owner
$ for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for
Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion,
if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract
Time or any proper extension thereof granted by Owner, Contractor shall pay Owner $
for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.02 above for completion and
readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.
ARTICLE 5 CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to
Paragraphs 5.01.A, 5.01.B, and 5.01.C below:
A. For all Work other than Unit Price Work, a lump sum of: $
All specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph 11.02
of the General Conditions.
B. For all Unit Price Work, an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each
separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the actual quantity of that item:

UNIT PRICE WORK
Item
No. Description Unit
Estimated
Quantity
Bid Unit
Price Bid Price

Page 3 of 9

Total of all Bid Prices (Unit Price Work) $

The Bid prices for Unit Price Work set forth as of the Effective Date of the Agreement are
based on estimated quantities. As provided in Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions,
estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and
classifications are to be made by Engineer as provided in Paragraph 9.07 of the General
Conditions.

C. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractors Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit.
NOTES TO USER
1. If adjustment prices for variations from stipulated Base Bid quantities
have been agreed to, insert appropriate provisions.
2. Depending upon the particular project bid form used, use 5.01.A alone,
5.01.A and 5.01.B together, 5.01.B alone, or 5.01.C alone, deleting
those not used and renumbering accordingly. If 5.01.C is used,
Contractors Bid is attached as an exhibit and listed as a Contract
Document in A-9.
ARTICLE 6 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General
Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage
A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of
Contractors Applications for Payment on or about the day of each month during
performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below. All such payments will be
measured by the schedule of values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A of the General
Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in
the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements.
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the
percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously
made and less such amounts as Engineer may determine or Owner may withhold, including
but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General
Conditions.
a. 95% percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If the Work has
been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character and progress
of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then as long as the character

Page 4 of 9

and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, there will be no
additional retainage; and
b. 95% percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with the
balance being retainage).
B. Upon Substantial Completion, and at the Owners discretion, tha amount of retainage may be
further reduced if requested by the Contractor. In no event will the payment exceed an amount
sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor to 100% percent of the Work completed,
less such amounts as Engineer shall determine in accordance with Paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the
General Conditions and less 200% percent of Engineers estimate of the value of Work to be
completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.03 Final Payment
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 14.07 of the
General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by
Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 7 INTEREST
7.01 All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear
interest at the rate of 12% percent per annum.
ARTICLE 8 CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIONS
8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, Contractor makes the following
representations:
A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related
data identified in the Bidding Documents.
B. Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local,
and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and
Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to
existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities), if any, that
have been identified in the Special Provisions and as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General
Conditions containing reliable "technical data," and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at the Site that have been identified in the Special Provisions
and paragraph 4.06 of the Generals conditions containing reliable "technical data."

Page 5 of 9

E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor; information commonly known
to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations obtained
from visits to the Site; the Contract Documents; and the Site-related reports and drawings
identified in the Contract Documents, if any, with respect to the effect of such information,
observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (2) the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by
Contractor, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of
construction expressly required by the Contract Documents; and (3) Contractors safety
precautions and programs.
F. Based on the information and observations referred to in Paragraph 8.01.E above, Contractor
does not consider that further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data
are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times,
and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the
Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all
terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.
ARTICLE 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.01 Contents
A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:
1. This Agreement (pages 1 to __, inclusive).
2. Performance bond (pages to , inclusive).
3. Payment bond (pages to , inclusive).
4. Other bonds (pages to , inclusive).
a. (pages to , inclusive).
b. (pages to , inclusive).
c. (pages to , inclusive).
5. General Conditions (pages to , inclusive).
6. Supplementary Conditions (pages to , inclusive).

Page 6 of 9

7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.
8. Drawings consisting of sheets with each sheet bearing the following general title:
[or] the Drawings listed on attached sheet index.
9. Addenda (numbers to , inclusive).
10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):
a. Contractors Bid (pages to , inclusive).
b. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award (pages to
, inclusive).
c. [List other required attachments (if any), such as documents required by funding or
lending agencies].
11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and are not attached hereto:
a. Notice to Proceed (pages to , inclusive).
b. Work Change Directives.
c. Change Orders.
NOTE TO USER
If any of the items listed are not to be included as Contract Documents,
remove such item from the list and renumber the remaining items.
B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly
noted otherwise above).
C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in
Paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 10 MISCELLANEOUS
10.01 Terms
A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the
Supplementary Conditions.

Page 7 of 9

10.02 Assignment of Contract
A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding
on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and,
specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may
not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may
be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an
assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility
under the Contract Documents.
10.03 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal
representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the
Contract Documents.
10.04 Severability
A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any
Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be
valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be
reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable
provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision.

10.05 Contractors Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph
10.05:
1. corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of value
likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the Contract
execution;
2. fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to influence
the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of Owner, (b) to
establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner
of the benefits of free and open competition;
3. collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders, with or
without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices at artificial,
non-competitive levels; and

Page 8 of 9

4. coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or
their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or affect the execution
of the Contract.
10.06 Other Provisions
NOTES TO USER
1. If Owner intends to assign a procurement contract (for goods and
services) to the Contractor, see Notes to User at Article 23 of Suggested
Instructions to Bidders for Procurement Contracts (EJCDC P-200, 2000
Edition) for provisions to be inserted in this Article.
2. Insert other provisions here if applicable.

Page 9 of 9

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement. Counterparts have been
delivered to Owner and Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or have been
identified by Owner and Contractor or on their behalf.

This Agreement will be effective on (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement).

NOTE TO USER
The Date on page one (1) of the Agreement and the dates of any
Construction Performance Bond (EJCDC C-610) and Construction
Payment Bond (EJCDC C-615) should be the same, if possible. In no case
may the date of any bonds be earlier then the Date of the Agreement liste
don page one (1).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR

By: By:
Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership,
or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority
to sign.)
Attest: Attest:
Title: Title:
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

License No.:

(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence
of authority to sign. If Owner is a public body,
attach evidence of authority to sign and resolution
or other documents authorizing execution
of this Agreement.)

(Where applicable)
NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other
jurisdictions where applicable or required.
Agent for service of process:

EJCDC C-550 Notice to Proceed
Page 1 of 1

Notice to Proceed

Date: _________________

Project:
Contractor:
Contractor's Address: [send Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested]

You are notified that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run
on . On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract
Documents. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion
is , and the date of readiness for final payment is [(or) the number of days to achieve
Substantial Completion is , and the number of days to achieve readiness for final payment is
].

Before you may start any Work at the Site, Paragraph 2.01.B of the General Conditions
provides that you and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other
identified additional insureds and loss payees) certificates of insurance which each is required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must:

__________________________________ [add other requirements].

Owner

Given by:
Authorized Signature

Title

Date
Copy to Engineer
EJCDC C-610 Performance Bond
Page 1 of 3

PERFORMANCE BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):


CONTRACT
Effective Date of Agreement:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):

BOND
Bond Number:

Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of
Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause
this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(Seal) (Seal)
Contractor's Name and Corporate Seal Suretys Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:


Title Title

Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature

Title Title

Note: Provide execution by additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.
Page 2 of 3

Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns to Owner for the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by
reference.

1. If Contractor performs the Contract, Surety and Contractor have no obligation under this Bond, except to
participate in conferences as provided in Paragraph 2.1.

2. If there is no Owner Default, Suretys obligation under this Bond shall arise after:
2.1 Owner has notified Contractor and Surety, at the addresses described in Paragraph 9 below, that
Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a
conference with Contractor and Surety to be held not later than 15 days after receipt of such notice
to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If Owner, Contractor, and Surety agree, Contractor
shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive
Owners right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and
2.2 Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated Contractors right to complete
the Contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after Contractor
and Surety have received notice as provided in Paragraph 2.1; and
2.3 Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to:
1. Surety in accordance with the terms of the Contract; or
2. Another contractor selected pursuant to Paragraph 3.3 to perform the Contract.

3. When Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 2, Surety shall promptly, and at Suretys expense,
take one of the following actions:

3.1 Arrange for Contractor, with consent of Owner, to perform and complete the Contract; or
3.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent
contractors; or
3.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to Owner for a contract
for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution
by Owner and contractor selected with Owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and
payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Contract, and
pay to Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 5 in excess of the Balance of the
Contract Price incurred by Owner resulting from Contractor Default; or
3.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and
with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:
1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to Owner and, as soon as
practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to Owner; or
2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify Owner citing reasons therefor.

4. If Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 3 with reasonable promptness, Surety shall be
deemed to be in default on this Bond 15 days after receipt of an additional written notice from Owner to
Surety demanding that Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and Owner shall be entitled to enforce
any remedy available to Owner. If Surety proceeds as provided in Paragraph 3.4, and Owner refuses the
payment tendered or Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice Owner shall be
entitled to enforce any remedy available to Owner.

5. After Owner has terminated Contractors right to complete the Contract, and if Surety elects to act under
Paragraph 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3 above, then the responsibilities of Surety to Owner shall not be greater than those
of Contractor under the Contract, and the responsibilities of Owner to Surety shall not be greater than those
of Owner under the Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by Owner
of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Contract, Surety is obligated
without duplication for:
Page 3 of 3

5.1 The responsibilities of Contractor for correction of defective Work and completion of the Contract;
5.2 Additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from Contractors Default, and
resulting from the actions of or failure to act of Surety under Paragraph 3; and
5.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract, actual damages
caused by delayed performance or non-performance of Contractor.

6. Surety shall not be liable to Owner or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated to the
Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than Owner
or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors.

7. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

8. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located, and shall be instituted within
two years after Contractor Default or within two years after Contractor ceased working or within two years
after Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the
provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to
sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

9. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature
page.

10. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the
Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be
deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common
law bond.

11. Definitions.

11.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the
Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to Contractor of any
amounts received or to be received by Owner in settlement of insurance or other Claims for
damages to which Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on
behalf of Contractor under the Contract.
11.2 Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on the signature page,
including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.
11.3 Contractor Default: Failure of Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform
or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Contract.
11.4 Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay Contractor
as required by the Contract or to perform and complete or otherwise comply with the other terms
thereof.

FOR INFORMATION ONLY (Name, Address and Telephone)
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owners Representative (Engineer or other party):

EJCDC C-615 Payment Bond
Page 1 of 3

PAYMENT BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of
Business):


CONTRACT
Effective Date of Agreement:
Amount:
Description (Name and Location):

BOND
Bond Number:

Date (Not earlier than Effective Date of
Agreement):
Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each
cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(Seal) (Seal)
Contractor's Name and Corporate Seal Suretys Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:


Title Title

Attest: Attest:
Signature Signature

Title Title

Note: Provide execution by additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

Page 2 of 3

1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns to Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished by Claimants for use
in the performance of the Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. With respect to Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor:
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and
2.2 Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless Owner from all claims, demands, liens, or suits alleging
non-payment by Contractor by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or equipment
for use in the performance of the Contract, provided Owner has promptly notified Contractor and
Surety (at the addresses described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens, or suits and
tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to Contractor and Surety, and provided
there is no Owner Default.
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if Contractor promptly makes payment,
directly or indirectly, for all sums due.
4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until:
4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with Contractor have given notice to
Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner,
stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the
claim.

4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with Contractor:
1. Have furnished written notice to Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, within
90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the
claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to
whom the materials or equipment were furnished or supplied, or for whom the labor was done or
performed; and
2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from Contractor, or not received within 30
days of furnishing the above notice any communication from Contractor by which Contractor had
indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and
3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to Surety (at the
address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to Owner, stating that a
claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice
furnished to Contractor.
5. If a notice by a Claimant required by Paragraph 4 is provided by Owner to Contractor or to Surety, that is
sufficient compliance.
6. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at Suretys
expense take the following actions:
6.1 Send an answer to that Claimant, with a copy to Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim,
stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed.
6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7. Suretys total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be
credited for any payments made in good faith by Surety.
8. Amounts owed by Owner to Contractor under the Contract shall be used for the performance of the
Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any performance bond. By Contractor furnishing and Owner
accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by Contractor in the performance of the Contract are
dedicated to satisfy obligations of Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to Owners priority to use
the funds for the completion of the Work.
Page 3 of 3

9. Surety shall not be liable to Owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of Contractor that are unrelated
to the Contract. Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this
Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or
otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Contract or to related
subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent
jurisdiction in the location in which the Work or part of the Work is located or after the expiration of one
year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Paragraph 4.1 or Paragraph 4.2.3,
or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were
furnished by anyone under the Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this
paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense
in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
12. Notice to Surety, Owner, or Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the addresses shown on the
signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, Owner, or Contractor, however accomplished, shall be
sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory requirement in the location where the
Contract was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory requirement shall be
deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory Bond and not as a common
law bond.
14. Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, Contractor
shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
15. Definitions
15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor, or with a first-tier
subcontractor of Contractor, to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of
the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms labor,
materials or equipment that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service,
or rental equipment used in the Contract, architectural and engineering services required for
performance of the Work of Contractor and Contractors subcontractors, and all other items for
which a mechanics lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or
equipment were furnished.
15.2 Contract: The agreement between Owner and Contractor identified on the signature page,
including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.
15.3 Owner Default: Failure of Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay Contractor
as required by the Contract, or to perform and complete or otherwise comply with the other terms
thereof.

FOR INFORMATION ONLY (Name, Address, and Telephone)
Surety Agency or Broker:
Owners Representative (Engineer or other):

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion
Page 1 of 2

Certificate of Substantial Completion

Project:

This [tentative] [definitive] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:
All Work under the Contract Documents: The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial Completion

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion
of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of
commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below.

A [tentative] [definitive] list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not
be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as
amended as follows:
Amended Responsibilities Not Amended
Owner's Amended Responsibilities:

Contractor's Amended Responsibilities:

EJCDC C-625 Certificate of Substantial Completion
Page 2 of 2

The following documents are attached to and made part of this Certificate:

This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.

Executed by Engineer Date

Accepted by Contractor Date

Accepted by Owner Date

EJCDC C-940 Work Change Directive
Page 1 of 1

Work Change Directive
No.

Date of Issuance: Effective Date:

Project:

Owner:

Owner's Contract No.:

Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:

Engineer's Project No.:

Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):
Item No. Description

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

Purpose for Work Change Directive:
Authorization for Work described herein to proceed on the basis of Cost of the Work due to:

Nonagreement on pricing of proposed change.
Necessity to expedite Work described herein prior to agreeing to changes on Contract
Price and Contract Time.

Estimated change in Contract Price and Contract Times:
Contract Price $ (increase/decrease) Contract Time (increase/decrease)
days

Recommended for Approval by Engineer: Date
Authorized for Owner by: Date
Received for Contractor by: Date
Received by Funding Agency (if applicable): Date:

EJCDC C-941 Change Order
Page 1 of 2

Change Order
No.

Project:

Owner:


Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:


The Contract Documents are modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:

Attachments (list documents supporting change):

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES:
Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times: Working days Calendar days
Substantial completion (days or date):
$ Ready for final payment (days or date):

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved
Change Orders No. to No. :

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change Orders
No. to No. :
Substantial completion (days):
$ Ready for final payment (days):

Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:

[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:

Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:

RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED:
By: By: By:
Engineer (Authorized Signature)

Owner (Authorized Signature)

Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Date: Date: Date:
Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable):
____________________________________________________________

Date:
EJCDC C-941 Change Order
Page 2 of 2

Change Order
Instructions
A. GENERAL INFORMATION
This document was developed to provide a uniform format for handling contract changes that affect Contract
Price or Contract Times. Changes that have been initiated by a Work Change Directive must be incorporated
into a subsequent Change Order if they affect Price or Times.
Changes that affect Contract Price or Contract Times should be promptly covered by a Change Order. The
practice of accumulating Change Orders to reduce the administrative burden may lead to unnecessary
disputes.
If Milestones have been listed in the Agreement, any effect of a Change Order thereon should be addressed.
For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or Contract
Times, a Field Order should be used.
B. COMPLETING THE CHANGE ORDER FORM
Engineer normally initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and attachments based
upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, or requests from Owner, or both.
Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner or Contractor for
approval, depending on whether the Change Order is a true order to the Contractor or the formalization of a
negotiated agreement for a previously performed change. After approval by one contracting party, all copies
should be sent to the other party for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies after
approval by both parties.
If a change only applies to price or to times, cross out the part of the tabulation that does not apply.

EJCDC C-942 Field Order
Page 1 of 1

Field Order
No.


Project:

Owner:


Contract:

Date of Contract:

Contractor:


Attention:
You are hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order issued in accordance with General
Conditions Paragraph 9.04.A, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price
or Contract Times. If you consider that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is
required, please notify the Engineer immediately and before proceeding with this Work.
Reference:

(Specification Section(s)) (Drawing(s) / Detail(s))

Description:

Attachments:

Engineer:

Receipt Acknowledged by Contractor: Date:

Copy to Owner
Division 1
General Requirements

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01010 Summary of Work
SECTION 01041 Project Coordination
SECTION 01050 Field Engineering
SECTION 01090 References
SECTION 01300 Submittals
SECTION 01400 Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance
SECTION 01500 Construction and Temporary Facilities
SECTION 01570 Construction Traffic Control
SECTION 01580 Temporary Water Supply
SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout

Section 01010 6
th
Edition
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Invitation to Bid contains a general description of the project work to be
performed under this Contract. The Supplemental Conditions and Special
Provisions and other documents contain additional information necessary to
perform the work.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Portions of the Contract Documents are written in the imperative mode. Except
where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is
the Contractor. For example, Furnish... means Contractor shall furnish...,
Provide means Contractor shall provide.... For imperatives specifically
addressing the Engineer/Owner, see paragraph 1.02, General Conditions.

B. Contract Documents are defined in Article 1, paragraph 1.01.A.12, General
Conditions, as modified by Montana Public Works Standard Specifications, any
supplemental conditions, and Article 9 of the Agreement Form.

C. The Contract Documents are intended to provide the basis for proper completion
of the work suitable for the intended use of the Owner. Comply with Article 3,
General Conditions. Specifications and Drawings included in these contract
documents establish the performance, quality requirements, location and general
arrangement of materials and equipment, and establish the minimum standards for
quality of workmanship and appearance. Anything not expressly set forth but
which is reasonably implied or necessary for proper performance of the project
shall be included.

D. The various portions of the Contract Documents, of which these specifications are
a part, are essential parts of the Agreement, and a requirement occurring in any
portion or part is binding as though occurring in all. All portions are intended to
be complementary and to describe and provide for a complete work as referenced
in Article 3, General Conditions. Unless specifically noted otherwise, in the case
of discrepancy the following hierarchy shall be observed:

1. Addenda, which will govern over;
2. Special Provisions, which will govern over;
3. Standard Modifications, which will govern over;
4. Supplementary Specifications, which will govern over;

Section 01010 6
th
Edition
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 3
5. Project Drawings, which will govern over;
6. These Specifications and Standard Drawings, which will govern over;
7. Montana Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction

E. The bound copy of the Montana Public Works Standard Specifications, as
distributed by the Montana Contractors Association, Inc., will govern as the legal
set of these specifications over any unbound copy, or any CD-ROM or floppy
disk versions

F. A requirement mentioned in one part/section of the Contract Documents shall be
considered as having been mentioned in all parts/sections.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Comply with paragraph 2.07 and 6.04 of the General Conditions and Milestones
specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Submit detail schedules as specified in the Contract Documents.

C. Field verify dimensions indicated on drawings before fabricating or ordering
materials. Do not scale drawings.

D. Notify Engineer/Owner of existing conditions differing from those indicated on
the drawings. Comply with paragraph 4.03, of the General Conditions and any
Supplementary Conditions. Verify the existence and location of underground
utilities along the route of the proposed work. Omission of an existing or previous
abandoned utility location on the Drawings is not to be considered as its
nonexistence. Inclusion of existing utility locations on the Drawings is not to be
considered as its definite location. Do not remove or alter existing utilities without
prior written approval.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES:

A. Comply with paragraph 6.11, General Conditions, and as specified in the Contract
Documents.

B. Do not park vehicles or equipment or store materials on private property without
written permission from the property owner. Provide Engineer/Owner with copy
of authorization.

1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS

A. Owner-furnished items are listed in the Contract Documents.

Section 01010 6
th
Edition
SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 3

PART 2 PRODUCT NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED

PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 PAYMENT

4.1.1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, the work of Division 1 shall be incidental to
the work, and no separate payment shall be made.


Section 01041 6
th
Edition
PROJECT COORDINATION
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01041

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the requirements for coordinating and sequencing the work
under the Contract documents, and requirements regarding existing site
conditions.

1.2 COORDINATION WITH PUBLIC AND PRIVATE AGENCIES

A. Comply with Article 7, General Conditions. Permit utility companies to repair or
replace their lines in the project limits.

B. Contact the Montana one-call system for utility locations before starting work.

C. Comply with paragraph 6.20, General Conditions.

PART 2: PRODUCT NOT USED

PART 3: EXECUTION NOT USED

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Section 01050 6
th
Edition
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01050

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 ENGINEERING SURVEYS

A. Notify Engineer of required survey work at least 48 hours before starting work.

B. Preserve all benchmarks, control points and stakes.

C. Replace benchmarks, control points and stakes destroyed or disturbed by
Contractor or subcontractor.

D. Comply with paragraph 4.04, General Conditions.

1.2 STREET MONUMENTS AND PROPERTY CORNERS

A. Mark and protect existing property pins and/or street monuments.

B. Use a licensed land surveyor to replace all property corners or other monuments
marked or shown on the plans that are destroyed by the work.




END OF SECTION

Section 01090 6
th
Edition
REFERENCES
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01090

REFERENCES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. These specifications use Article 1 - Definitions of the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract, Form No. C-700 prepared and issued by
the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC), for the definition
of terms herein. Changes to definitions are by either substitution for the article or
in Supplementary Conditions.

1.3 REFERECNCES

A. This section lists some of the construction industry organizations, professional
and technical associations, societies and institutes, and government agencies
issuing, promoting, or enforcing standards in the Contract Documents along with
the abbreviations commonly used for those references. Also included are general
requirements for using industry standards specified, and for applying quality
control standards.

1.4 USE OF REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Work specified by reference to a published standard or specification of a
government agency, technical association, trade association, professional society
or institute, testing agency, or other organization must meet or exceed the
minimum quality standards for the material and workmanship in the designated
standard or specification.

B. Where specified, assure products or workmanship meet the prescriptive or
performance requirements in the Contract Documents when it is a more stringent
standard than the referenced standard. Contract should reference only one
specification to prevent argument as to which specification is most stringent.

C. Where the specific issue date of the standard is not identified in the standard, the
edition and all published amendments available on the date of the Invitation to
Bid applies.

Section 01090 6
th
Edition
REFERENCES
Page 2 of 4

D. If two or more standards are specified, provide the product and workmanship
meeting or exceeding the requirements of the most stringent standard.

E. If a conflict exists between standards, meet the more stringent standard.

F. Where both a standard and a brand name are specified, assure the proprietary
product names meet or exceed the specified reference standard. The listing of a
trade name in a Contract Document does not warrant that the product meets the
referenced standard.

G. Copies of Standards

1. Copies of applicable referenced standards are not bound in this Contract
Document.

2. Where the contractor needs copies of standards for work superintendence
and quality control, obtain a copy or copies directly from the publication
sources and maintain copies at the job site, making them available to
Contractor personnel, subcontractors, Owner, and Engineer.

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations for Trade Organizations and Government Agencies: Following is a
list of construction industry organizations and government agencies commonly
referenced in the Contract Documents, with abbreviations used.

AA Aluminum Association
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALS American Lumber Standards
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
AREA American Railway Engineering Association
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

Section 01090 6
th
Edition
REFERENCES
Page 3 of 4

ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
CBMA Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association
CDA Copper Development Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FM Factory Mutual
Fed Spec. Federal Specifications
FS Federal Specification
GA Gypsum Association
HI Hydraulic Institute
HMI Hoist Manufacturers Institute
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
ISA Instrument Society of America
JIC Joint Industry Conferences of Hydraulic Manufacturers
MIA Marble Institute of America
Mil. Sp. Military Specification
MS Military Specifications
MMA Monorail Manufacturers Association
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

Section 01090 6
th
Edition
REFERENCES
Page 4 of 4

NLMA National Lumber Manufacturers Association
NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OECI Overhead Electrical Crane Institute
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act (both Federal and State)
PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
PS Product Standards Section - U.S. Department of Commerce
RLM RLM Standards Institute, Inc.
RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
SWI Steel Window Institute
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
TCA Tile Council of America
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFC Uniform Fire Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WWPA Western Wood Products Association




END OF SECTION

Section 01300 6
th
Edition
SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES:

A. Submit to the Engineer a progress schedule under Sections 2.05, 2.07, and 6.04 of
the General Conditions.

B. Submit to the Engineer adjusted progress schedules under Section 6.04 of the
General Conditions.

C. Submit to the Engineer, value schedules under Sections 2.05, 2.07 and 14.01 of

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATE, AND SAMPLES:

A. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer under Sections 2.05 and 6.17 of the
General Conditions. Submit all shop drawings for the Contractor, subcontractor(s)
and supplier(s)

B. Review all shop drawings prior to submittal in accordance with Section 6.17 of

C. Submit in writing any substitutions to previously approved items for review by
the Engineer.

D. Within 15 days after Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of products
proposed for use, providing manufacturers name, trade name, and model or
catalog numbers, and manufacturer data.

Submit the number of copies needed by the Contractor, plus three copies for
Engineer use.

E. Where specified, submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic
characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices.

Where specified, submit samples of finishes including colors, textures, and
patterns.



PART 4: BASIS & METHOD OF PAYMENT NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Section 01400 6
th
Edition
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND OWNER QUALITY ASSURANCE
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01400

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND
OWNER QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes the Contractor quality control testing requirements and
Owners quality assurance program.

1.2 References

A. The following ASTM publication is a part of this specification.

ASTM E 329 Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in
Construction


PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Be responsible for quality control tests and inspections to control contractor
production and construction processes. Include in the Contractor quality control
system an internal organization, plans, and procedures to produce the specified
end product. Assure the system covers all construction operations, both on-site
and off-site, and is keyed to the construction sequence. Quality control testing
frequency is at Contractor discretion, except where tests are specifically required
in the technical specifications for individual products.

B. Sampling and testing to assure specification conformance are performed by the
Owner or the Owners testing agency as quality assurance testing.

C. The Owner may select a testing agency to perform quality assurance testing.
(ASTM E329 is referenced as a guide to the selection of a qualified testing
agency.) The Owner will pay for (or provide) the quality assurance testing.
Quality assurance testing frequency is at Owner discretion for individual
products.

D. Quality assurance testing is performed following the standards in the technical
specifications for individual products.

Section 01400 6
th
Edition
CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL AND OWNER QUALITY ASSURANCE
Page 2 of 2

3.2 CONTRACTOR COOPERATION WITH QUALITY ASSURANCE AGENCY

A. Assure the Owners personnel and quality assurance agency have access to all
work areas at all times work is in progress. Provide any special facilities or
equipment to access work areas at Contractor expense.

B. Notify the Engineer of the work ready for quality assurance testing. Establish and
update as the construction schedule to provide the Engineer estimated
sampling/testing dates and times.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 PAYMENT FOR TESTING

A. Pay for all quality control testing as outlined in Subsection 3.1 above. Mix
designs for Portland Cement Concrete and Flowable Fill, mix designs for Asphalt
Concrete, and all initial aggregate quality tests are quality control tests and are at
Contractor expense. Testing costs are incidental to the work and to be included in
the unit price bid for the respective item.

B. Owner will pay all quality assurance testing costs.

4.2 RETESTING

A. Quality assurance re-testing due to failing initial tests will be performed by the
Owner or the Owners quality assurance testing agency, and the re-test costs
deducted from the contract amount for the affected bid item.

END OF SECTION

Section 01500 6
th
Edition
CONSTRUCTION AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Furnish temporary services and utilities, including use fees and operation costs
for: potable and non-potable water; lighting and power; and, materials storage.

B. Furnish personnel support facilities including: sanitary facilities; drinking water;
first aid supplies and facilities; and, trash removal.

C. Do not park vehicles or equipment or store materials on private property without
written permission from the property owner under Section 01010.1.4.B.

1.2 SECURITY

A. Provide fencing, barricades, warning signs, and lights to secure all work areas,
equipment, and materials.

1.3 DUST CONTROL

1.4 Be responsible for dust control, providing all equipment and personnel for the work.
Furnish Engineer name(s) and telephone number(s) of the person(s) responsible for dust
control during evenings and weekends. If this person cannot be contacted, Owner may at
Contractor expense, perform the work or contract the work out.

1.5 HAUL ROUTES

A. Obtain Owner approval of haul routes.

PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED



4.1 PAYMENT

A. All items in Part 1 are incidental to the work and no separate payment is made for
these items.

END OF SECTION

Section 01570 6
th
Edition
CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC CONTROL
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01570


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the furnishing of labor, materials and equipment for installing,
maintaining and operating traffic control devices to insure the safety of the
general public and project personnel.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform work under this section meeting Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Services (MUTCD) and contract requirements.

1.3 NOTIFICATIONS

A. Coordinate all construction activities to reduce traffic conflicts at the work site,
off-site events or other construction projects.

B. Furnish the Engineer, for Owner review, the construction traffic control plan at
least one week before construction begins or before changes in segments or
phases of the work on the project. The Owner will review and approve the Traffic
Control Plan considering known off-site activities and may require modification
to the plan or construction timing to coordinate events. Work shall not commence
until said plan is approved.

C. For project sites involving a through street, provide the Engineer with a news
release. Include in the news release, as a minimum, the work activity and
duration. Once approved, furnish the news release to the local media at least three
days before starting work. Notify all landowners or residents adjacent to the work
of the type and duration of the construction.

PART 2: PRODUCT

2.1 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. Assure all signs and barricades are reflectorized. Assure all night time traffic
control devices meet MUTCD lighting requirements.

B. Use traffic control devices meeting the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices and the Traffic Control Devices Handbook requirements, available
from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 20492.

C. Assure all traffic control devices are clean, legible, reflective for night-time use,
and operable.

Section 01570 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WORK METHODS:

A. Place all traffic control devices as planned before permitting men or equipment on
the traveled way. Install signs, cones and barricades in that order.

B. Inspect the work area at least twice each day during construction and maintain
records of traffic control devices used and their location.

C. Assure traffic control is appropriate to the work. Assure traffic control devices are
appropriate and clean before suspending work for the day.

D. Remove traffic control devices in reverse order of installation at the end of each
shift.

E. Remove and store all unnecessary traffic control devices away from traffics
view.

3.2 NONCOMPLIANCE

A. Remove, repair or replace any traffic control device not providing its intended
function.

B. Do not begin work until all required traffic control devices are placed.

C. The Engineer will periodically inspect the traffic control and inform the
Contractor of any deficiencies.

D. Contractor failure to correct any deficiency in the traffic control within 4 hours of
notification is cause to deduct monies from the contract payment on the next
progress payment.

E. The Engineer may direct correcting traffic control deficiencies immediately.
Failure to immediately correct the deficiency is cause for the Engineer to correct
the deficiency at Contractor expense.

3.3 FLAGGING

A. Furnish competent and properly equipped flag persons as described in the booklet
Instructions for Flag persons furnished by the Montana Department of
Transportation.

Section 01570 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 3


4.1 PAYMENT

A. Separate measurement for each traffic control device is not made unless the on-
site field traffic plan requirements differ materially from the original traffic
control plan in the contract. Measurement and payment for the Contractors off-
site traffic control plan and the designed on-site traffic control plan is on a lump
sum basis. The lump sum payment is full reimbursement for all costs of
furnishing, installing, maintaining, replacing and operating the construction traffic
control systems throughout the work period. The construction traffic control
system includes but is not limited to, signs, barricades, pavement markings,
watering, flag persons and pilot cars.

B. Progress payments are in proportion to total construction completed.

C. If changes in the approved Traffic Control Plan are directed by the Engineer,
additional payment or reduction in payment is made for the additional or deleted
items as agreed to between the Contractor and the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

Section 01580 6
th
Edition
Temporary Water Supply
Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01580

TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide temporary water service to all residential and commercial service
connections interrupted by water system replacement projects. The Contractor
shall verify with the Engineer and Owner at least 72 hours (excluding weekends
and holidays) prior to the suspension of service the areas where consumers will
require a temporary water supply. Temporary water service shall not include
temporary service for commercial fire protection unless specifically indicated on
the drawings.

B. The Contractor shall not disrupt a residential water service for more than 8 hours
without providing temporary water. The Contractor shall provide homes that are
subject to more than two water shut downs with temporary water. The Contractor
also shall not disrupt service to commercial customers unless:

1. The Contractor obtains an authorization letter from the property owner and
business owner (if different) at least 7 days prior to the interruption of
service. The owners shall agree in the letter to the time and dates of the
interruption of the water service and;

2. The Contractor submits a comprehensive work plan to the Engineer for
approval that details the planned methodology to be used to ensure the
commercial facility is not out water for more than the time detailed in the
above letter.

1.2 STANDARD DRAWINGS

A. The Owner may have atlas maps showing the water system in the work zones. It
shall be the Contractors responsibility to determine the extent of water system to
be taken out of service to perform the work and the subsequent configuration of
the temporary water system to provide service to all affected water customers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit a shop drawing including all materials proposed to be
used for temporary water. Additionally, a temporary water plan shall be
submitted for each zone prior to starting the layout of the temporary water system.
This submittal shall include as a minimum, connection points, hydrants and/or
valves to be operated by the Owner, layout for connection to each service, and the
location of all street crossings. Depending on the circumstances of the zone,

Section 01580 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 5

additional information may be required by the Engineer. These submittals shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01300 of these specifications.

B. Contractor shall notify the Fire Department at least 48 hours in advance whenever
the fire supply to any commercial buildings is interrupted.

1.4 APPLICABLE LAWAS AND REGULATIONS

A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPRARY WATER PIPING

A. The water piping of temporary hoses, piping, etc. shall be a 160 psi rating, NSF
approved hose, flexible polyethylene pipe, or PVC pipe. All pipe used for the
temporary water system must have a visible NSF approval stamp by the
manufacturer. A short section of high pressure flexible rubber hose may be used
for the connection to each residence. The temporary system must be leak proof.

2.2 SHUT OFF VALVE

A. The distribution pipe shall have a manual shut-off valve at each service tee. Shut-
off valves shall be NSF approved valves.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. The backflow prevention assembly shall be approved by the Engineer and the
Owner during the submittal process. Backflow prevention devices shall be
designed in accordance with the current AWWA Standard for Double Check
Valve Backflow-Prevention Assembly.

B. Each backflow preventer shall be properly supported to protect the assembly and
the attached piping from breakage.

C. The first time a backflow prevention assembly is set up on a project it shall be
tested to verify its integrity. If the project is suspended over the winter, all
backflow preventers shall be re-tested in the spring. All costs associated with this
testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested upon relocation. The cost for
all subsequent tests shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

Section 01580 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 5

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Following the Engineers and Owners review and approval of any proposed
shutdown request, the Contractor shall be required to give a minimum 24 hour
advance notice (excluding weekends and holidays) to all residential consumers
whose service will be temporarily affected, by means of individual notices
delivered to each consumer. If the notices are not issued or the temporary service
is not ready to be put in use, the Owner shall be free to exercise their authority in
not closing down the existing valves and water main system.

B. The Contractor must have available all the necessary materials to complete the
restoration of water to each of residential service within eight (8) hours after the
suspension begins or before 5:00 p.m., whichever comes first. House-to-house or
building-to-building connections will not be allowed unless approved by the
Owner.

C. Special arrangements shall be made by the Contractor to provide temporary water
service for all commercial services regardless of the length of time the water main
is out of service. The Contractor shall supply all hoses, fittings, etc., for providing
temporary water service at his expense. Copper piping or other non-taste
inducing pipe shall be necessary if the commercial consumer serves food or water
products as part of the business.

D. Fire protection is not included unless specifically shown by the Engineer. The Fire
Department may require the Contractor to provide personnel for continuous fire
watch at assisted living facilities where residents may require assistance in the
event of a fire.

3.2 LOCATING CURB STOPS

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all activities related to locating,
exposing and operating curb stop valves to the individual properties. Existing
conditions shall be identified and noted by the Contractor. Any existing condition
that is suspected to indicate a defect of the curb stop valve, box, or service shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer.

3.3 LAWN WATERING CONNECTIONS

A. Each house connection shall be equipped with a tee connection for lawn watering.
The tee shall be NSF approved and shall be equipped with an NSF approved
vacuum breaker and shut off valve. The connection to each customer shall require
a short section of high pressure flexible rubber hose at the connection point.

Section 01580 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 5

3.4 TEMPORARY WATER SYSTEM SIZING

A. All pipe sizes shall be adequate to meet ordinary water supply demands of the
consumers. The Contractor shall upsize the service at no additional cost if the
home or business can show reasonable cause as to service deficiency.

3.5 TEMPORARY WATER SYSTEM DISINFECTION

A. All temporary water systems shall be assembled, flushed, and disinfected in place
and approved by the Engineer and Owner before being placed into service. The
disinfection procedures shall be equal to the procedures required for the new
water main.

B. Temporary hoses, piping, fittings, etc. to be flushed and disinfected in accordance
with the State of Montana Department of Environmental Quality standards, and
the standards of this specification prior to being put into service.

3.6 CONNECTION TO BUILDINGS

A. Once the temporary water system has been assembled, pressure tested and
disinfected, the Contractor will make the final connection to the building. The
Contractor should expect to find the existing plumbing on some services to have
been in service for several years. The Contractor shall use an ordinary degree of
care while working on these services. Also, there may not be any convenient
point of temporary connection on some services. In this case, temporary fittings
must be provided to achieve the connection. This work will be incidental to the
temporary water work. Any damage to the existing residential plumbing shall be
repaired at Contractors expense.

3.7 CROSSING ROADS, ALLEYS AND DRIVEWAYS

A. The Contractor will be required to protect the pipe at road crossings, alleyways, or
residential driveways. The method of pipe protection shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to placement.

B. The Contractor will be required to install the temporary water supply at street
crossings in a shallow trench or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. The
Engineer may not allow new asphalt to be cut for temporary water trenches in
which case the temporary water main is to be relocated or other crossing methods
are to be used. Aerial crossings of the temporary water lines at street crossings
will not be allowed. Temporary water supply pipes shall not be installed in storm
drain pipes. Mounding millings or cold mix over a temporary water pipe that has
been trenched into existing asphalt pavement will be allowed under the following
conditions:

Section 01580 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 5

1. The maximum height shall be 2-1/2 inches.
2. Provisions are made to avoid impact loads on the temporary water pipe.
3. Signs are erected indicating a bump ahead at 500 feet and 100 feet from
the bump and at the bump in both directions.

C. The asphalt crossings shall be cut straight and vertical shall have uniform width
and shall be cut perpendicular to the centerline of the street. Restoration shall
match the appropriate surface restoration detail and shall be a minimum of 2 feet
wide and shall be compacted with a small mechanical compactor. There will be
no payment for any street cuts or asphalt restoration under this item, this being
incidental to the work. Exceptions to this requirement shall be made only on a
case by case basis following the Contractors proposal and subsequent review and
approval by the Owner and Engineer.

3.8 RECONNECTION TO NEW WATER SYSTEM

A. After services are connected or reconnected and prior to flushing, testing and
chlorinating the new main, the water service piping shall be thoroughly
backflushed from the residence to the new main. Should any service include a
backflow prevention device, Contractor shall temporarily remove such device or
provide other means to backflush the service. The corporation stop for the
reconnected services shall not be left open to the new main until the Bac-T test for
the new main has been completed and is acceptable.


4. 1 GENERAL

A. Measurement for the complete temporary water system shall be on a Lump Sum
Basis and will include all incidentals to complete the temporary system.

END OF SECTION

Section 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 CLEANUP

A. Before Final inspection (as outlined in Section 14.06 of the General Conditions)
execute the following.

1. Where applicable, clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to
view. Remove temporary labels.

2. Where applicable, clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

3. Where applicable, clean debris from roof, gutters, and downspouts.

4. Remove debris, waste, surplus materials, and rubbish from right-of-way,
easements (construction or permanent) and private property.

5. Where applicable, remove debris, dirt, and silt from storm drain basins,
sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes, and water valve boxes.

6. Rake landscaped surfaces clean of debris.

7. Where applicable, remove temporary coverings from traffic control
devices.

8. Clean traffic control devices and signs.

9. Where applicable, remove temporary traffic striping.

10. Sweep dirt and debris from all paved areas affected by the work.

1.2 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit record documents as outlined in the General Conditions. Final payment
will not be processed until the documents are submitted to and approved by the
Engineer.

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Where applicable, submit two sets, before final inspection, bound in three ring
binders. Prepare a table of contents for each volume with each product or system
identified.

B. Where applicable, prepare the following:

Section 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page 2 of 2

1. Directory, listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of Engineer,
Contractor, Subcontractor, and Equipment Suppliers.

2. Operations and maintenance instructions, arranged by system. For each
category, identify the applicable Contractor(s) or Subcontractor(s) and
suppliers. Identify the following:

1. Significant design criteria
2. List of equipment
3. Parts list for each component
4. Operating instructions
5. Maintenance instructions

1.4 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Submit, with final payment request, all warranty certificates, lien releases, and
consent of security forms.

PART 2: PRODUCTS NOT USED



END OF SECTION
Division 2
Site Work
Section 02100
Site Preparation

SITE PREPARATION

SECTION 02110 Geotextile
SECTION 02112 Removal of Existing Pavement, Concrete Curb, Sidewalk, Driveway and/or
Structures
SECTION 02113 Adjusting Existing Manholes, Lampholes, Inlets, Water Valve Boxes, Water
Services, and Fire Hydrants to Grade
SECTION 02114 Relocating or Removing Utility Poles, Street Signs, and Mailboxes

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 02110

GEOTEXTILES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work consists of furnishing, and placing a geotextile as a subsurface drainage
fabric permeable separator between dissimilar materials (such as between
subgrade and sub base/base), stabilization fabric, temporary and/or permanent
erosion control measures or as waterproofing/stress releasing membrane within
pavement structures.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The current publications listed below form part of this specification.

B. ASTM Standards

D123 Standard Terminology Relating to Textiles
D276 Test Methods for Identification of Fibers in Textiles
D4354 Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing
D4632 Breaking; Load and Elongation Of Geotextiles (Grab Method)
D4533 Trapezoid Tearing, Strength of Geotextiles
D3786 Hydraulic Bursting, Strength of Knitted Goods and Nonwoven
Fabrics Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Methods
D4833 Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and
Related Products
D4491 Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
D4751 Determining, Apparent Opening, Size of a Geotextile
D4354 Sampling, of Geotextiles for Testing
D4759 Determining, the Specification Conformance of Geosynthetics
D276 Identification of Fibers in Textiles
D4355 Deterioration of Geotextiles from exposure to ultraviolet light &
water (Xenon-arc type apparatus)
D4873 Guide for Identification, Storage and Handling of Geotextiles
D5141 Test Method for Determining Filter Efficiency and Flow rate for
Silt Fence Application of a Geotextile Using Site Specific Soils
D5261 Test Methods for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles
D422 & D1140 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
D4318 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 2 of 6
D698 The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-kg (5.5-lb)
Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) drop

C. ASSHTO Specifications M288 Geotextile Specifications for Highway
Applications

1. Augmenting and prevailing over this specification section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Assure that fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in
joining geotextiles by sewing, consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed
of at least 95% by weight polyolefins or polyesters. They must be formed into a
network so the filaments on yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each
other, including selvedges. Furnish materials meeting the physical requirements
for the indicated application as described by the corresponding table(s) of
properties in ASSHTO M288, Geotextile Specifications for Highway
Applications.

2.2 CERTIFICATION

A. Assure the manufacturer furnishes the purchaser a certificate stating: the name of
the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and other
information fully describing the geotextile. The manufacturer must include in the
certificate, a guarantee stating that the geotextile furnished meets specifications.
The certificate must be attested to by a person having a legal authority to bind the
company. Mismarking, or misrepresentation by the manufacturer is reason to
reject the geotextile under these specifications. Notice sent to the manufacturer by
the purchaser regarding rejection of, will be considered to be notice to all
wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents and other intermediaries handling the
manufacturer's product.

B. Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturer's name and fabric type or
trade name, lot number and quantity.

2.3 SHIPMENT AND STORAGE

A. During shipment and storage, protect the fabric from direct sunlight, ultra-violet
rays, temperatures exceeding 160
0
F (71
o
C), mud, dust and debris. Keep the
fabrics in the manufacturer's wrapping until just before use. Include with each
shipping, a document, a certification showing that the geotextile meets the

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 3 of 6
manufacturer's certificate and a guarantee that has been previously filed with the
purchaser.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Where placing geotextiles on native ground, cut the trees and shrubs flush with
the ground surface. Do not remove the topsoil and vegetation mat. Remove all
sharp objects and large rocks. Fill depressions or holes with a suitable material to
provide a firm foundation.

B. Replace or repair all geotextile that is torn, punctured, or muddy. Remove the
damaged area and place a patch of the same type of geotextile overlapping 3 feet,
in all directions, (0.9m) beyond the damaged area.

3.2 DRAINAGE, SEPARATION AND STABILIZATION APPLICATIONS

A. Shape the subgrade to a smooth surface and to the cross section required. Shape
slopes to gradually transition into slope adjustments without noticeable breaks. At
the ends of cuts, the intersection of cuts, and embankments, adjust slopes in the
horizontal and vertical planes to blend into each other or into the natural ground.

B. Remove all material larger than 6 inches (15 cm) within the top 6 inches (15 cm)
of the roadbed. Remove unsuitable material from the roadbed and replace with
suitable material. Finish the roadbed and ditches to the required elevation and
cross-section.

C. Place the geotextile smooth and free of tension, stress, or wrinkles. Fold and cut
the geotextile to conform to curves. Overlap in the direction of construction.
Overlap the geotextile a minimum of 2 feet (0.6m) at the ends and sides of
adjoining sheets or sew the geotextile joints according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Do not place longitudinal overlaps below anticipated wheel
loads. Hold the geotextile in place with pins, staples, or piles of cover material.

D. End dump the cover material onto the geotextile from the edge of the geotextile or
from previously placed cover material. Do not operate equipment directly on the
geotextile. Spread the end-dumped pile of cover material maintaining a minimum
lift thickness of 10 inches (250mm). Compact the cover material with rubber-
tired or nonvibratory smooth drum rollers. Avoid sudden stops, starts, or turns of
the construction equipment. Fill all ruts from construction equipment with
additional cover material. Do not regrade ruts with placement equipment.

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 4 of 6
E. Place subsequent lifts of cover material in the same manner as the initial lift.
Vibratory compactors may be used for compacting subsequent lifts. If foundation
failures occur, repair the damaged areas and revert to the use of nonvibratory
compaction equipment.

3.3 TEMORARY AND PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL APPLICATIONS

A. Place and anchor the geotextile on the approved smooth-graded surface. For slope
protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile down the slope. For stream
bank protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile parallel to the
centerline of the channel.

B. Overlap the geotextile a minimum of 12 inches (300mm) at the ends and sides of
adjoining sheets or sew the geotextile joints according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Overlap the uphill or upstream sheet over the downhill or
downstream sheet. Offset end joints of adjacent sheets a minimum of 5 feet
(1.5m). Pins may be used to hold the geotextile sheets in place. Space pins along
the overlaps at approximately 3 foot (1m) centers.

C. Place aggregate, slope protection, or riprap on the geotextile starting at the toe of
the slope and proceed upward. Place riprap onto the geotextile from a height of
less than 12 inches (300 mm). Place slope protection rock or aggregate backfill
onto the geotextile from a height less than 3 feet (0.9m). In underwater
applications, place the geotextile and cover material in the same day.

3.4 PAVEMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Use SS-1 crack filler meeting the applicable section for crack filler for surface
preparation of cracks between 1/8-and 1/4-inch wide. Fill cracks exceeding 1/4-
inch (6 mm) width with an asphalt emulsion slurry consisting of 20 percent by
volume of SS-1, 2 percent by volume Portland cement and the remaining portion
fine sand.

B. Use distributors for spraying a Performance Graded (PG) Asphaltic Binder
meeting the specifications for the asphalt cement being used in the asphalt
concrete overlay.

C. Place fabric using manufacturer recommended equipment.

D. Handle and place all fabric following the manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Clean pavement to receive fabric of dirt, water and vegetation. Clean all cracks
between 1/8-inch (3 mm) and 1/4-inch (6 mm) wide and fill flush to the surface
with SS-1 bituminous material. Top with sand. Repair larger cracks or holes

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 5 of 6
using the asphalt emulsion slurry. Pour the mixture into the cracks until full. Re-
fill with slurry, the following day, any cracks which are not completely filled
initially. When a leveling course is required, place it before installing the fabric.
Areas to be covered with a leveling course do not require surface preparations for
cracks unless the leveling courses will be less than 0.3 foot (10cm).

F. Uniformly apply the asphaltic binder at the rate determined by the Engineer. The
quantity will vary with pavement porosity. Take care to place sufficient binder to
satisfy the fabric and make the membrane impervious to water without causing a
slippage plane. The applications rates are typically 0.25 to 0.30 gallon per square
yard. Apply binder using a distributor.

G. Heat the asphalt binder high enough to permit a uniform spray pattern. Ensure air
temperature is at least 50
0
F and rising before applying binder and fabric.

H. Place the paving geotextile onto the asphalt sealant with minimal wrinkling. Slit,
lay flat and tack all wrinkles or folds higher than 1inch (25 mm). Broom and/or
roll the paving geotextile to maximize fabric contact with the pavement surface.

I. At geotextile joints, overlap the geotextile 1 to 3 inches (25 to 75 mm) to ensure
full closure. Overlap transverse joints in the direction of paving to prevent edge
pickup by the paver. Apply additional asphalt sealant to paving geotextile
overlaps to ensure proper bonding of the double fabric layer.

J. If asphalt sealant bleeds through the fabric, treat the affected areas with blotter.
Minimize traffic on the geotextile. If circumstances require traffic on the fabric,
apply blotter and place "slippery when wet" signs.

K. Broom the excess blotter from the geotextile surfaces before placing the overlay.
Repair all damaged fabric before placing overlay. Apply a light tack coat before
placing the overlay. To avoid damaging the geotextile, do not turn equipment on
the geotextile.

L. Place a hot asphalt concrete overlay within 48 hours after placing the paving
geotextile. Limit the lay-down temperature of the mix to a maximum of 325
0
F
(163
0
C) except when the paving geotextile is composed of polypropylene fibers,
limit the lay-down temperature of the mix to a maximum of 300
0
F (149
0
C).


4.1 GENERAL

A. All geotextiles will be measured by the square yard (square meter) on a plane

Section 02110 6
th
Edition
GEOTEXTILES
Page 6 of 6
parallel to the ground surface, excluding overlaps. The accepted quantities,
measured as provided above, will be paid at the contract price per unit of
measurement for the pay item that is shown in the bid schedule.

B. Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment,
materials and incidentals required for the completion of the work.

4.2 PAVING FABRICS

A. Fabric is measured and paid per square yard of roadway surface covered, complete
and in place. No allowance is made for additional fabric required for overlap
joints. No allowance is made for blotter sand (if occasionally required).

B. Crack filling is measured per job and payment is at contract lump sum price,
complete in place.

C. Asphalt cement binder is measured and paid by the ton, corrected to standard
temperature, complete in place.

END OF SECTION

Section 02112 6
th
Edition
REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT, CONCRETE CURB,
SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND/OR STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 3

SECTION 02112


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work consists of removing and disposing of existing pavement, concrete curb,
combined curb and gutter, sidewalk, private driveways, and crosswalks, along with
any structures designated for removal in the contract documents. Details of removals
are specified in the contract documents.

PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Dispose of all existing pavement, concrete curb, crosswalk and/or combined curb
and gutter specified for removal in the contract documents or directed by the
Engineer. Exercise care in such removal to assure that remaining nearby facilities
and/or structures are not disturbed. Restore to original condition any such
existing facilities or structures damaged by construction activities.

B. Cut, remove and dispose of designated existing pavement to the lines indicated on
the contract documents, or directed by the Engineer. Make straight and
approximately vertical cuts of edges along which new pavement is to be placed.

C. Remove and dispose of existing private concrete driveways and/or sidewalks
which interfere with construction of street improvements or which do not match
new grade as shown on the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.
Remove such driveways and/or sidewalks to a distance of 8 inches (20cm) behind
curbs, or to greater distance if required to properly match the new curb and gutter
grade. Remove along the neat line produced by a concrete saw cut. Make cuts to
depths of at least 25 percent of the concrete thickness and take care in removing
the concrete assuring the slab breaks on the sawed neat line.

Section 02112 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 3


4. 1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL

A. Removal and disposal of asphalt concrete pavement is part of Section 2230, Street
Excavation, Backfill and Compaction. No separate payment will be made for this
item.

4. 2 CONCRETE REMOVAL

A. All concrete required to be removed shall be measured by the lineal foot (meter),
square yard (square meter) or cubic yard (cubic meter) as described by the contract
documents.

B. Concrete removal and disposal shall be paid for at the contract unit price bid,
constituting full compensation for all equipment, tools and labor, including the
performance of all work to provide incidentals necessary to complete this item.

C. Measurement and payment for concrete removal and disposal will be made only if
listed as a separate pay item in the contract documents. If not listed separately in the
contract as a bid item, concrete removal and disposal will be included as part of
Section 2230, Street Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction.

D. Payment will be made under one of the following if identified in the contract
documents:

1. Concrete Removal - Per Lineal Foot (Meter)
2. Concrete Removal - Per Square Yard (Square Meter)
3. Concrete Removal - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meter)

4. 3 CONCRETE SAW CUT

A. For those projects where concrete saw cutting is a substantial item of work, this item
may be measured and paid for at the contract unit price bid per lineal foot (meter),
constituting full compensation for all equipment, tools and labor, including the
performance of all work to provide incidentals necessary to complete this item.

B. Payment will be made under the following:

1. Saw Cut for Concrete Pavement, Sidewalk, Driveway, and Curb and Gutter
Per Lineal Foot (Meter).

Section 02112 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 3

C. Measurement and payment for concrete saw cuttings will be made only if listed as a
separate item in the bid documents. If not listed in the contract as a bid item, saw
cutting shall be part of the Concrete Removal in Section 4.2 above, or part of the
Excavation Above Subgrade item in Section 2230, Street Excavation, Backfill and
Compaction, Excavation.

4. 4 Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment, materials and
incidentals required for the completion of the work.

END OF SECTION

Section 02113 6
th
Edition
ADJUSTING EXISTING MANHOLES, LAMPHOLES, INLETS,
WATER VALVE BOXES, WATER SERVICES, AND FIRE HYDRANTS TO GRADE
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 02113


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section consists of locating and adjusting to grade existing manholes,
lampholes, inlets, water valve boxes or services, and fire hydrants as shown in the
contract documents, staked in the field or as required in the Special Provisions.


A. Standard drawings included in Appendix A of this specification book which are
applicable to this section are as follows:

Standard Drawing No. 02213-1 Manhole Adjustment Detail
Standard Drawing No. 02213-2 Water Valve Adjustment Detail

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide all materials including concrete, brick and mortar, complying with the
specification section for the particular material involved, or if the material is not
covered in these specifications, the material used for adjusting shall be equal, and
comparable to that in the existing structure. If extensions for water valve boxes or
services and fire hydrants are required beyond the length found to exist, provide
items comparable to those in the existing structure.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Bring to required grade all existing manholes, inlets, lampholes and water valve
boxes by either lowering or raising in accordance with the details shown in the
contract documents. Do not lower manholes, lampholes or inlets by removal of
portions of the cones or barrel sections. Accomplish downward adjustments by
replacement of existing sections with shorter sections. Assure that all structures
have a minimum of one 2-inch (5cm) concrete adjusting ring and a maximum of

Section 02113 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 3
12 inches (30cm) of rings under the casting. Do not use brick and/or mortar for
adjustment of castings.

B. On manholes requiring steps, assure that maximum spacing between steps is 16
inches (40cm) and that 10 inches (25cm) is the maximum distance from the top of the
manhole cone section to the first step.

C. Excavate water valve boxes and services to readily determine whether height
adjustment can be made without substituting a longer section. Adjust water valve
boxes and services laterally so the valve stems can be operated by the extension.
Adjust water services by raising or lowering the curb key stop and extension box.

D. Adjust manholes, lampholes and water valve boxes to final grade before placing
the final pavement surface. If required, make preliminary adjustment to allow
placement of base courses and paving adjacent to the manhole, lamphole or water
valve.

E. Provide backfill material conforming to the requirements of Section 02235, 1 inch
(25 cm) Minus Crushed Base Course, and compacted to at least 95 percent of the
maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.

F. If required, make minor adjustments 5 feet (1.5 meters) to 10 feet (3.0 meters) in
the horizontal location of existing fire hydrants to insure that they are the required
minimum distance behind the back of curb. At the time of construction staking,
any hydrants which require horizontal adjustment will be located by the Engineer
and the adjusted location will be staked by the Engineer.

G. Make any minor adjustments required as dimensioned in the contract documents
to the height of existing fire hydrants to insure that they are at a reasonable height
above the back of curb. At the time of construction staking, any hydrants which
require vertical adjustment will be located by the Engineer and the adjusted height
will be staked by the Engineer. Accomplish extension of fire hydrant height only
by the use of standard extension spools provided by the hydrant manufacturer.

H. Before final acceptance, clean all manholes, lampholes, inlets and water valve
boxes/services. Assure that all water valve boxes, services and fire hydrants are
operational.

I. All requirements of this section shall apply to new, as well as to existing,
manholes, lampholes, valve boxes, water services and fire hydrants.

Section 02113 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 3

4. 1 GENERAL

A. Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment,

4. 2 ADJUSTING EXISTING MANHOLES, LAMPHOLES, INLETS, WATER VALVE
BOXES AND WATER SERVICES

A. These items are measured and paid for by the number of existing facilities
adjusted, complete in place, at contract unit price bid for the item, constituting full
compensation for all necessary materials, excavation, backfill, compaction,
cleaning, labor, tools and incidentals.

B. Payment will be made under:

1. Existing Sewer Manholes to Adjust - Per Each
2. Existing Sewer Lampholes to Adjust - Per Each
3. Existing Storm Drain Inlets to Adjust - Per Each
4. Existing Water Valve Boxes to Adjust - Per Each
5. Existing Water Services to Adjust - Per Each

4. 3 LOCATION ADJUSTMENT FOR EXISTING FIRE HYDRANTS

A. This item is measured and paid for by the number of existing fire hydrants
adjusted horizontally, complete in place, at the contract unit price bid for
Horizontal Adjustment for Existing Fire Hydrants, constituting full
compensation for all material, excavation, backfill, compaction, labor, tools and
incidentals.


1. Horizontal Adjustment for Existing Fire Hydrant - Per Each

4. 4 VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT FOR EXISTING FIRE HYDRANTS

A. This item shall be measured and paid for by the vertical adjustment of existing fire
hydrants, complete in place, as measured in the field to the nearest one-half foot,
at the contract unit price bid for Vertical Adjustment for Existing Fire Hydrants,
materials, including any additional stem length, excavation, backfill, compaction,
concrete, labor, tools and incidentals.


1. Vertical Adjustment of Existing Fire Hydrant - Per Vertical Foot

END OF SECTION

Section 02114 6
th
Edition
RELOCATING OR REMOVING UTILITY POLES,
STREET SIGNS AND MAILBOXES
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02114


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This item consists of relocating or removing existing street lights, signs, power
poles, telephone poles and mailboxes as shown in the contract documents.

PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 POWER, STREET LIGHT AND TELEPHONE POLES

A. Affected utility companies are to move power, street light, and telephone poles,
unless they are designated in the contract documents to be removed or relocated
by the Contractor.

B. When relocating or removing power poles, street light poles and telephone poles,
comply with any applicable requirements of the contract documents.

3.2 STREET AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS

A. Remove and reinstall all street, stop and other traffic control/direction signs
designated to be relocated by the Contractor as shown in the contract documents,
or as designated by the Engineer. Include removing, temporarily installing,
storing, and permanently installing the signs.

B. The locations shown in the contract documents for street lights, street signs,
power poles, telephone poles and private mailboxes to be relocated are
approximate only. The specific locations are to be designated by the Engineer.

C. Relocate all signs within the staked grading limits whose existing locations do not
conform to final plan locations. Also relocate signs outside the staked grading
limits to conform to final plan locations.

Section 02114 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 4

D. Preserve all street, stop and other traffic control and direction signs that are to
remain in place. Should any such signs be moved for the contractors
convenience, permanently reinstall the signs after construction of curb and gutter
is complete. Assume responsibility for any damage to such signs. No extra
compensation will be allowed for preserving, removing or replacing stop and
traffic control and direction signs designated to remain in place, since this work is
considered incidental to the contract unit prices for the various items of the
contract.

E. Where stop signs and traffic direction or control signs are temporarily removed,
but are needed for traffic reasons during construction, temporarily install a similar
stop sign or traffic direction sign in locations acceptable to the Engineer. Assure
that the temporary signs remain in place until the permanent stop or traffic control
signs are in place.

F. Do not install street signs temporarily.

G. Store signs which are not used for temporary installation.

H. Set all permanent signs in fresh concrete, the pole supporting the sign being
vertical, and the bottom of the sign being 7'-0" (2.1m) above the top of the curb or
sidewalk. Replace all signs which are damaged during removal with new signs.

I. Assure that all sign locations conform to the latest issue of the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

J. Remove all signs designated for removal without damaging the signs. Salvage
and deliver all such damaged signs to the Engineer.

3.3 MAILBOXES

A. Mailboxes within the staked grading limits generally are not shown in the contract
documents. Remove mailboxes within the staked grading limits designated for
relocation by the Engineer and place the mailboxes on temporary posts outside,
but immediately adjacent to, the construction limits. Within 48 hours following
construction of the curb and removal of curb forms, reinstall the mailboxes behind
the curb in accordance with current U.S. Post Office regulations and applicable
City standards.

Section 02114 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 4


4. 1 GENERAL

A. Measurement and payment for the following items is made only if listed as
separate pay items in the contract documents. If not so listed separately, these
items will not be paid for separately but are to be included as incidental to the
other pay items of the contract documents.

4. 2 POWER, STREET LIGHT AND TELEPHONE POLES

A. Reinstall all power, street light and telephone poles removed for the contractors
convenience at no cost.

B. Power, street light and telephone poles designated for relocation or removal shall
be measured and paid for by the number of poles relocated or removed at the unit
price bid for Existing Power, Light and Telephone Poles to be Relocated or
Existing Power, Light and Telephone Poles to be Removed, which price and
payment constitutes full compensation for all materials, excavation, temporary
and/or permanent installation, forming and curing of concrete, equipment, tools,
labor, and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

C. Payment will be made under:

1. Existing Power, Light and Telephone Poles to be Relocated - Per Each.
2. Existing Power, Light and Telephone Poles to be Removed - Per Each.

4. 3 STREET AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS

A. Reinstall all street, stop and traffic control or direction signs removed for the
Contractors convenience at no cost.

B. Street, stop, and traffic control or direction signs designated for relocation or
removal shall be measured and paid for by the number of street, stop and traffic
control or direction signs relocated or removed at the unit price bid for Existing
Stop and Street Signs to be Relocated or Existing Stop and Street Signs to be
Removed, which price and payment constitutes full compensation for all
materials, excavation, temporary and/or permanent installation, forming and
curing of concrete, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete
the item. If two or more signs exist on one post, they are defined as one sign for
payment purposes.

Section 02114 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 4


1. Existing Stop and Street Signs to be Relocated - Per Each.
2. Existing Stop and Street Signs to be Removed - Per Each.

4. 4 MAILBOXES

A. Reinstall existing mailboxes removed for the Contractors convenience at no cost.

B. Mailboxes designated for relocation shall be measured and paid for by the number
of mailboxes relocated at the unit price bid for Existing Mailboxes to be
Relocated, which price and payment constitutes full compensation for all
materials, excavation, temporary and/or permanent installation, forming and
curing of concrete, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete
the item.


1. Existing Mailboxes to be Relocated - Per Each.

4. 5 GENERAL

A. Payment indicated to include complete compensation for all labor, equipment,

END OF SECTION

Section - 02200
Earthwork

EARTHWORK

SECTION 02221 Trench Excavation and Backfill for Pipelines and Appurtenance Structures
SECTION 02222 Low Permeability Trench Backfill Plugs
SECTION 02225 Flowable Fill
SECTION 02230 Street Excavation, Backfill and Compaction
SECTION 02234 Sub Base Course
SECTION 02235 Crushed Base Course

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
FOR PIPELINES & APPURTENANT STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 17 *

SECTION 02221


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the excavation, trenching and backfilling for pipelines and
appurtenances. It includes all clearing, grubbing, site preparation, removal and
disposal of debris from the excavation, handling and storing materials for fill and
backfill, all bracing, shoring and trench protection, construction dewatering, all
backfill, subgrade preparation , final grading, site dressing and cleanup.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The current publications listed below form a part of this specification.

AASHTO T99 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 5-lb (2.5kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305mm) Drop

ASTM D698 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 5-lb (2.5kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305mm) Drop

AASHTO T191 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method
(ASTM D1556)

AASHTO T310 In-Place density and water content of the soil and soil aggregate
(ASTM D6938) by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth)

AASHTO T11 Materials Finer Than 0.075mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
(ASTM C117) Aggregates by Washing

AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
(ASTM C136)

AASHTO T89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils

AASHTO T90 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 17 *


A. Standard Drawings applicable to this section are as follows:

1. Standard Drawing No. 02221-1 - Typical Utility Trench Detail

1.4 TESTING

A. Field Density Testing

1. Meet the quality control and quality assurance testing requirements in
Section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.

2. In-place field density tests for quality assurance are at Owner expense
meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556), Sand Cone Method; or by
AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938) Nuclear Densometer Methods. Quality
assurance field density testing frequency is at the Engineers discretion.

3. Re-testing failing areas is at the expense of the Contractor.

4. At the direction of the Engineer, provide necessary equipment and labor to
excavate and replace materials for test holes up to 5 feet deep into the
compacted backfill to allow testing below the surface of any layers
covered without inspection and approval by the Engineer.

B. Laboratory Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture

1. Quality assurance tests will be made by the Engineer for each on-site
natural soil or each source of off-site material, including borrow material,
to determine the laboratory maximum density values and optimum
compaction moisture content according to AASHTO T-99 or ASTM
D698.

C. Material Submittals

1. Submit to the Engineer material quality test results including Type 1
Bedding gradation and plasticity index; and Type 2 Bedding gradation.

2. Submit to the Engineer samples of on-site and off-site borrow soils for
laboratory moisture-density relationship testing by the Engineer.

3. If applicable, submit a blasting plan to the Engineer.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 17 *

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS

A. TYPE 1 PIPE BEDDING

1. Type 1 Pipe Bedding includes the material placed from 4 inches (100mm)
below the bottom of the pipe, around the pipe, and up to the springline of
the pipe.

2. Provide Type 1 Bedding consisting of sand, sandy gravel, or gravel having
a maximum 3/4 inch size (19mm) and a maximum plasticity index of 6,
determined by AASHTO T89 and T90 or by ASTM D4318.

3. Where trench excavation encounters wet or unstable material, Type 1 Pipe
Bedding must be free draining and non-plastic

4. Refer to Standard Drawing 02221-1 and Special Provisions for other
requirements.

B. SELECT TYPE 1 BEDDING

1. Select Type 1 Bedding includes the material placed from the springline of
the pipe to 6 inches (15cm) over the pipe.

2. Select Type I Bedding shall consist of soil, sand or fine gravel, free from
clods, lumps of frozen material, or rock exceeding 1-1/2 inches (38mm) in
its greatest dimension.

3. Excavated trench material may be screened or sorted for use as backfill
subject to approval of the Engineer.

4. Where trench excavation encounters wet or unstable material, Select Type
1 Bedding must be free draining and non-plastic.

C. TYPE 2 PIPE BEDDING

1. Type 2 Pipe Bedding is used as directed by the Engineer to replace
unsuitable material encountered in the trench bottom.

2. Place Type 2 Pipe Bedding from the bottom of the Type 1 Bedding
material to the depth required to adequately support the pipe.

3. Type 2 Bedding shall consist of granular material meeting the following
gradation.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 17 *

Sieve Opening % Passing
3 Inch 100
No. 4 0 - 25
No. 8 0 10

D. SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE

1. The plans may require, or the engineer may direct, the use of non-woven
geo-textile fabric intended to provide materials separation. The fabric will
wrap all or part of the Type 1 Pipe Bedding and Select Type 1 Pipe
Bedding to prevent materials migrating into the trench bottom and trench
walls as shown on the plans or as directed by the engineer. The fabric
shall be AASHTO M288 Class 1, 2, or 3 as specified or determined by the
Engineer and shall fully comply with MPW Section 2110.

2.2 TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Materials from Trench Excavation

1. Backfill material obtained from trench excavations must be free of
cinders, ash, refuse, organic or frozen material, boulders, or other
deleterious materials. Backfill materials and placement are further
described in the Execution Section of this specification.

B. Imported Backfill Material

1. Imported backfill material is from borrow source(s) outside the project
limits and is used when, in the opinion of the Engineer, an adequate
volume of suitable backfill material is not available within the project
limits. Imported Backfill Materials must comply with the requirements of
Section 2.2.A, MATERIALS FROM TRENCH EXCAVATION.

2.3 FLOWABLE FILL

A. If used, Flowable Fill is to meet the requirements of Section 2225, Flowable Fill.

2.4 DETECTABLE BURIED WARNING TAPE

A. Detectable buried warning tape is to have a minimum 6 inch (15cm) width and 5
mil (0.12mm) thickness and a solid aluminum core running the full length and
width of the tape enclosed in a color coded inert plastic jacket, impervious to
alkalis, chemical reagents and solvents in the soil. The tape is to meet
APWA/ULCC Color Code requirements and is to have a maximum 36
inch(90cm) imprint.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 17 *

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PROPERTIES

A. General

1. Take precautions to protect all adjoining private and public property and
facilities, including underground and overhead utilities, curbs, sidewalks,
driveways, structures, and fences. Restore or replace all disturbed or
damaged facilities to its original condition at Contractors expense.

2. Contact utility owners using the Montana One Call System in accordance
with Section 01041, PROJECT COORDINATION, Paragraph 1.2.B., for
utility locates before starting work. Protect the utilities exposed during
the work and prevent damaging underground utilities adjacent to
excavations. Immediately notify the utility owner of any construction
damage. Repairs of damage to marked utilities are at the expense of the
Contractor.

3. Re-locate existing water mains, sanitary sewers and storm drains shown
on the plans, that conflict with new pipelines or structures as indicated in
the contract documents. No separate payment will be made for this work
unless shown as a payment item. If the Owner authorizes the relocation of
mains or sewers which are not indicated in the bid documents, and the
Engineer determines the work was not included in the original contract,
payment will be made under the applicable sections of the General
Conditions.

4. Cut and replace existing service lines interfering with trenching operations
only with the engineers permission and at the contractors expense.
Show all repaired and/or adjusted water and sewer lines on the As-Built
Plans.

5. Protect existing water and sewer mains and water and sewer services from
freezing at all times during construction.

B. Privately Owned Utilities

1. If any existing private utility interferes with the work in either alignment
or grade, and has to be moved, the work will be performed by the
appropriate UTILITY Owner, unless otherwise specified in the contract
documents. Such private utilities may include gas mains, underground
electrical and telephone cables, telephone poles, light poles, etc.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 17 *

2. If, however, such private utility relocation is performed by the Contractor,
and the relocation is not a separate payment item, payment will be made
under the Section 02221 conditions covering such changes.

3. Such payment will be made only if the work is determined by the
Engineer to be a change from the original contract work scope.

C. Existing Structures

1. Prevent damage to existing buildings or structures in the work area.
Repair all construction related damage to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Existing Overhead Utilities

1. Use extreme caution to avoid conflict, contact or damage to overhead
utilities during the work.

E. Exploratory Excavation

1. The location of existing buried public utilities may need to be verified by
exploratory excavation before construction.

2. Where authorized by the Engineer, the Contractor will be reimbursed for
exploratory excavation work at the unit price bid per hour for a
backhoe/excavator with operator and a laborer to assist. Use a
backhoe/excavator having at least 60 horsepower (45kw), as rated by the
manufacturer.

3. The unit price per hour includes the backhoe/excavator, operator and one
laborer based upon the actual time, to the nearest one-half hour, that the
equipment and personnel are used in actual excavating and backfilling
operations including standby time between excavation and backfilling
which allows the Engineer to make the necessary survey of the
underground utilities.

4. Exercise care to prevent damaging all utilities and repair any utility
damage caused by exploratory excavation.

F. Pavement Removal and Stripping

1. Where trench excavation or appurtenant structure excavation requires
removing curb and gutter, concrete sidewalks, asphalt concrete pavement,
or Portland cement concrete pavement, cut the concrete or pavement in a
straight line parallel to the excavations edge using a spade-bitted air
hammer, concrete saw or other suitable equipment to produce a straight,
square and clean break. Re-cut edges broken during construction, before
concrete or paving operations.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 17 *

2. For trenches passing through existing pavement, cut the pavement along a
neat vertical line at least 12 inches (30cm) from the trench edge. Where
the neat line cut is less than 3 feet (0.9m) from the edge of the existing
pavement, remove and replace the entire pavement section between trench
and edge of pavement.

3. Dispose of the asphalt concrete and/or Portland cement concrete debris
off-site according to applicable state and local regulations.

G. When excavating across existing gravel streets or other developed surfaces,
remove the surfacing material full depth and stockpile for inclusion as trench
backfill or legally dispose of the surfacing material.

H. When excavating across cultivated or sodded areas, remove topsoil full depth or
to a maximum 12 inch (30cm) depth, whichever is less, and stockpile for possible
project use.

I. Re-sod or reseed, as specified in the contract documents, all established lawn
areas cut by trenching or damaged during the construction, in accordance with
Section 2910, and/or 2920, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.2 MAINTENANCE OF FLOWS

A. Maintain the flow of sewers, drains and water courses encountered during
construction. Restore culverts, ditches, fences, crosswalks and structures
disturbed by construction to their original condition upon completion of the work.

3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. General

1. Meet current OSHA Safety and Health Standards for all excavation,
trenching, shoring, and related work.

2. Excavate at the specified locations for pipeline installations and
appurtenant structures.

3. Crossings under sidewalks or curbs may be made by tunneling, if
approved by the Engineer. If a portion of a sidewalk or curb is removed,
use a concrete saw to make joints, compact the backfill as specified, and
replace the removed section with new concrete sidewalk or curb.

4. During excavation, stockpile backfill materials away from the trench
banks to assure trench wall stability. Stockpile excavated materials on
only one side of the trench without obstructing existing fire hydrants,

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 17 *

valves, manholes and other appurtenances. Assure surface drainage of
adjoining areas is unobstructed.

5. Remove and dispose of all excess or unsuitable excavated materials.

6. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavations. Promptly remove all
water accumulating in trench excavations. Do not permit water to
accumulate in any open trench. Remove and re-lay all pipe out of
alignment or grade caused by trench flooding.

7. Grade the trench bottoms to the specified lines and grades. Assure
bedding material provides uniform bearing and support for each pipe
section along its entire length. Excavate for bell and joints after the trench
bedding is graded, limiting the excavation to the required length, depth
and width for making the particular type of joint used. Backfill over-
excavations with Type 2 Bedding Material.

8. No differentiation between common and rock trench excavation is made,
except when listed as separate bid items on the bid proposal or bid form.
Excavation includes removing and subsequent handling of all earth,
gravel, bedrock or other material encountered regardless of the type,
character, composition or condition of the material.

9. The use of trench digging machinery is permitted, except in places where
its operation is likely to cause damage to existing structures or features, in
which case hand methods are to be employed.

B. Trench Dimensions

1. Excavate to the trench dimensions specified below.

2. Width

a. Excavate to provide room to install and join the pipe as specified.
The minimum trench width is 3'-6" (1.1m), for outside pipe
diameters of 18 inches (0.5m) or less. The minimum trench width
is 2'-0" (0.6m) plus the outside pipe diameter, for pipe sizes
exceeding 18 inches (0.5m). Maximum trench width may be
specified in the contract documents.

3. Depth

a. Excavate the trench as required for the invert grade or pipe bury as
specified in the contract documents, plus 4 inches (10cm) for the
Type 1 Pipe Bedding. If bedrock, boulders or large stones are
encountered at the bottom of the trench, excavate at least 6 inches

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 17 *

(15cm) below the bottom of the pipe for backfilling with Type 1
Pipe Bedding.

C. Soft or Unsuitable Trench Subgrade

1. When soft or unstable material is encountered at the trench subgrade
which will not uniformly support the pipe, excavate the material to the
depth directed by the Engineer and backfill to trench subgrade elevation
with Type 2 Pipe Bedding.

D. Blasting

1. Obtain Engineer approval to blast for excavation. If approved, the
Engineer will establish the time limits blasting will be permitted.

2. Use utmost care to protect life and property during blasting. Use only a
licensed blaster with experience in the type of blasting required for the
work.

3. Safely and securely store all blasting materials meeting local laws and
ordinances and clearly mark all storage places Dangerous Explosives.
Do not leave any explosives where they could endanger persons or
property.

4. Blasting Rock in Trenches

a. When blasting rock in trenches, cover the blasting area with earth
backfill or approved blasting mats. Before blasting, station
workers and provide danger signals to warn people and stop
vehicles.

b. Assume responsibility for all damage to property and injury to
persons resulting from blasting or accidental explosions during the
work.

c. Furnish the following information to the Owner and Engineer at
least 48 hours before the commencement of blasting operations:
Name of the contractors powder man, powder mans experience,
type of shot, type of explosives and detonator being used, proof of
insurance covering liability for such operation, traffic control plans
and planned procedures for protecting the public.

5. Assure blasting plan meets federal, state and local ordinances. Obtain all
required permits before blasting starts.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 10 of 17 *

E. Pavement Damage Cause by Equipment

1. Equip all track mounted equipment operated on pavement surfacing with
pads to prevent pavement damage.

2. Restore all pavement damaged by construction to its original condition.

F. Shoring, Bracing and Sheeting

1. Provide all shoring, bracing and tight sheeting required to prevent caving
and protect workers, meeting current Occupational Safety and Health Act
Requirements, and to protect adjacent property and structures. The cost of
this work is included in the cost for trench excavation.

G. Excavation for Appurtenances

1. Make excavations for manholes, hydrants, structures and other
appurtenances of the size and depth to permit compacting of backfill on all
sides to the specified density. The requirements for removing water and
other applicable portions of these specifications apply to excavation for
appurtenances.

3.4 DEWATERING

A. Remove all ground water encountered in trench excavations. Do not place pipe,
bedding or backfill materials below the groundwater elevation established by
dewatering operations. The cost of dewatering operations is considered a part of
the excavation cost.

3.5 EXCAVATION STABILITY AND SAFETY

A. The stability of construction excavations and associated worker safety, including
slope geometry and shoring/bracing considerations, are the responsibility of the
Contractor. Meet current OSHA regulations. This may require design of
temporary slopes and/or shoring by a licensed professional engineer.

3.6 TRENCH FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. General

1. Backfill all trenches as specified immediately after grade, alignment and
pipe jointing has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Conduct
any pipe testing as specified in the respective water distribution,
sewerage/drainage sections. Correct all defects discovered by tests prior
to backfilling.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 11 of 17 *

B. Pipe Bedding Placement

1. Type 1 Bedding.

a. Place Type 1 Pipe Bedding material 4 inches (10cm) under the
pipe, around the pipe, and up to the springline of the pipe. Place in
maximum lifts of 6 inches (15cm), using hand operated or other
compaction methods without damaging or disturbing the pipe.
Thoroughly compact each layer. Use special care to assure
compaction under the pipe haunches.

b. Place backfill material in equal lifts on both sides of the pipe for
the full trench width. Take care to prevent migration of Type 1
Bedding into surrounding soils during placement and compaction

2. Select Type 1 Bedding.

a. Place Select Type 1 Bedding material from the springline to 6
inches (15cm) over the pipe. Where wet or unstable material
exists, assure the material is free draining and non-plastic.

b. Place in maximum lifts of 6 inches (15cm) using hand or other
compaction methods without damaging or disturbing the pipe.
Thoroughly compact each layer.

c. Place backfill in equal lifts on both sides of the pipe for the full
trench width. Take care to prevent migration of Select Type 1
Bedding into surrounding soils during placement and compaction.

3. Type 2 Pipe Bedding.

a. Use Type 2 Pipe Bedding described in PRODUCTS SECTION as
specified or as directed by the Engineer to replace unsuitable
material encountered in the trench bottom, placing it from the
bottom of the Type 1 Bedding material to the depth required to
adequately support the pipe.

4. SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE

a. Place Separation Geotextile where shown on the plans or where
directed by the Engineer.

C. Trench Backfill

1. After the pipe bedding materials are placed and compacted as specified,
backfill the trench. Use backfill material free of cinders, ash, refuse,

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 12 of 17 *

organic or frozen material, boulders, or other deleterious materials. From
the top of the Select Type 1 Pipe Bedding to 6 inches (15cm) below the
ground surface, or to the subgrade elevation, material containing rock up
to 8 inches (20cm) in the greatest dimension may be used.

2. Trench backfill from the top of the pipe bedding to ground surface or to
the street subgrade is separated into three classifications.

a. Type A Trench Backfill is compacted backfill typically used in
streets or paved areas.

b. Type B Trench Backfill is typically used for unpaved alleys,
cultivated areas, borrow pits, unimproved streets or other un-
surfaced areas, and other areas where compaction is less critical.

c. Type C Trench Backfill is typically used in open and unimproved
areas outside of the public right-of-way.

3. Meet the backfill and compaction requirements for all of the backfill types
described in the contract documents.

4. Watering

a. Apply uncontaminated water, when required, at the locations and
in the amounts required to compact the backfill material to the
specified requirements. Maintain an adequate water supply during
the work. Assure the equipment used for watering is of the
capacity and design to provide uniform water application.

b. Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain all
embankment and base courses in a damp condition in accordance
with these contract documents.

c. Water required for compacting trench backfill may be obtained
from the municipal system if approved by the Owner, or from
other sources.

5. Remove, replace, and re-compact backfill in trenches where settlement has
occurred as directed by the Engineer at the contractors expense.

6. Trench backfill types are designated as follows:

a. Type A Trench Backfill. Place trench backfill in maximum 8 inch
compacted lifts within 3 percent of optimum moisture content, and
compact to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density determined
by AASHTO T99 or by ASTM D698.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 13 of 17 *

b. Type B Trench Backfill. Place backfill in maximum 8 inch
(205mm) lifts, within 3 percent of optimum moisture content, and
compact to at least 90 percent of maximum dry density, as
determined by AASHTO T99 or by ASTM D698.

c. Type C Trench Backfill. Place and compact Type C Trench
Backfill in maximum 12 inch lifts at densities equal to or greater
than the densities of adjoining undisturbed soil. Mound earth over
the trench top, if so directed by the Engineer.

d. Flowable Fill. Place flowable fill as trench backfill as shown in
the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer. Flowable
fill may also be used as a construction expedient, substituting for
any type of trench backfill, subject to approval by the Engineer and
at the expense of the Contractor.

D. Replacement of Unsuitable Backfill Material

1. Remove and dispose of excavated soils that are saturated, contain
deleterious materials or have characteristics that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, render the soils unsuitable as backfill.

2. Replace unsuitable soils with material obtained from trench excavations
within the project limits at the expense of the Contractor. If suitable
replacement material is not available within project limits, obtain material
from an approved borrow source, to be paid for as Imported Backfill
Material.

3. Place and compact all imported material according to the applicable
backfill specification requirements.

E. Backfill of Appurtances

1. Place and compact backfill for appurtenances to finished grade around
manholes, inlets, valve boxes and other underground items without
disturbing appurtenance alignments.

2. Meet the backfill material, placement, and compaction requirements
specified for the adjoining trench.

F. Detectable Buried Warning Tape

1. The use of warning tape is optional and if used must not be relied on as
the primary locating device. Provide warning tape as described in
PRODUCTS Section 2.3. Bury tape a maximum 18 inches (45cm) below
finish surface grade.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 14 of 17 *

3.7 SURVEY MARKERS AND MONUMENTS

A. Protect all survey markers and monuments. Protection includes marking with
flagged high lath and supervising work near markers and monuments. Do not
disturb monuments without prior approval from the Engineer.

B. Replace all Contractor disturbed or destroyed survey markers or monuments, not
approved during construction, using a licensed land surveyor. See Section 01050
for details on survey marker protection/disturbance.

3.8 CLEANUP

A. As work progresses, remove debris and complete to finish grade each portion of
the work. Once the work is complete, clear debris and finish the entire site to
smooth, uniform slopes presenting a neat and workmanlike appearance. Remove
and dispose of all rocks brought to the surface during excavation or backfilling.

3.9 TIME AND DISTANCE OF OPEN TRENCHES

A. Perform the work so that trenches will remain open the minimum time required to
accomplish the work.

B. Do not begin trench excavating until appropriate compaction equipment is at the
excavation site.

C. The maximum permissible distance between backfilling/ compaction operations
and the end of newly installed pipe is 200 feet (60m) in existing streets (and/or
alleys) and 500 feet (150m) in all other areas.

D. The maximum distance between the newly installed pipe and the excavator is to
be 100 feet (30m) in existing streets (and/or alleys) and 200 feet (60m) in all other
areas.

E. For each work group consisting of a trench excavator, a pipe laying crew, and a
backfilling/compacting crew, the maximum allowable open ditch at any time is
300 feet (90m) in existing streets (and/or alleys) and 700 feet (210m) in all other
areas.

F. The maximum distance behind the end of the new pipe is 1,500 feet (460m) for
gravel surfacing replacement, base placement or pavement replacement.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 15 of 17 *


4. 1 GENERAL

A. The following items constitute pay items for the work covered under this section.
Payment for these items is full compensation for providing all materials, tools,
labor and equipment necessary to complete the item and all incidental work
related thereto, whether specifically mentioned herein or not.

4. 2 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. No separate measurement and payment is made for TRENCH EXCAVATION
AND BACKFILL. Include all costs for this item in the unit price bid for pipe,
complete in-place.

B. The upper limit of the TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL item is
defined as the top of subgrade. Details of the various types of surface restoration
are found in the contract documents.

4. 3 TYPE 1 AND SELECT TYPE 1 PIPE BEDDING

A. Include approved material for Type 1 and Select Type 1 Pipe Bedding in the pipe
installation price. No measurement or additional payment is made for furnishing
or placing Type 1 and Select Type 1 Pipe Bedding materials.

4. 4 TYPE 2 PIPE BEDDING

A. Approved material for Type 2 Pipe Bedding to replace soft or unsuitable material,
is measured in cubic yards (cubic meters) of material furnished, in-place, for the
depth directed.

B. Payment for Type 2 Pipe Bedding is made at the contract unit price bid per cubic
yard (cubic meter), which includes furnishing, placing and compacting the Type 2
Bedding material as specified and all other work necessary or incidental for
completion of the item.

C. Payment quantity is based upon an excavation width of 2.0 feet (0.6m) plus the
outside pipe diameter with a minimum payment width of 3.5 feet (1.1m).

D. If Type 2 Bedding is placed without the engineers authorization, the Type 2
Bedding is a construction expedient solely for the contractors convenience and
no payment for Type 2 Bedding is made.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 16 of 17 *

E. Payment will be made under: Type 2 Pipe Bedding - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic
Meter).

4. 5 IMPORTED BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. When satisfactory backfill material is not available within the project limits,
backfill material imported from borrow sources outside the limits of the project
site are measured in cubic yards of material furnished, in place (compacted), for
the depth directed by the Engineer.

B. The trench width for measurement and payment is 2.0 feet (0.6m) plus the outside
pipe diameter, with a minimum payment width of 3.5 feet (1.1m), measured
between vertical planes for the depth required.

C. Payment for imported backfill material is made at the contract unit price bid per
cubic yard, which includes furnishing, placing, and compacting the backfill
material as specified and all other work necessary or incidental for completion of
the item.

D. No separate measurement and payment is made for this item when, in the
engineers opinion, suitable surplus material is available within the project limits,
in which case all costs for this item are to be included in the unit price bid for
pipe, complete in-place.

E. Payment for Imported Backfill will be made only if the Engineer determines
surplus material is not available within the project limits.

F. Payment is made under: Imported Backfill Material -Per Cubic Yard (Cubic
Meter).

4. 6 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATION

A. Measurement of this item is made for the actual time, to the nearest one-half hour,
for which the equipment and personnel are used and authorized by the Engineer
for actual exploratory excavation and backfilling operations, including standby
time between excavation and backfilling, to allow the Engineer to survey the
underground utility.

B. Payment is made at the contract unit price bid per hour, which includes providing
the equipment on-site, with operator and fuel. Where exploratory excavation is
outside of planned excavation limits, payment also includes any time required for
compaction of the backfill, if necessary.

Section 02221 6
th
Edition
Page 17 of 17 *

C. Surfacing repair will be paid separately, if required.

D. Payment will be made under: Exploratory Excavation - Per Hour.

4. 7 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC

A. Measurement and payment for geotextile fabric shall be by the linear foot of
trench.

B. Payment for this item is full compensation for providing all materials, tools, labor
and equipment necessary to complete the item and all incidental work related thereto,
whether specifically mentioned herein or not.

END OF SECTION

Section 02222 6
th
Edition
LOW PERMEABILITY TRENCH BACKFILL PLUGS
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02222


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. At locations noted on the project drawings, install low permeability soil or
soil/bentonite mixtures in lieu of conventional, granular bedding and backfill to limit
groundwater flow along the trench. Such flows can result in piping of natural
subsoils adjacent to the trench into the granular bedding materials and ground
subsidence. The low permeability trench backfill plugs are primarily recommended
for use in selected sections of trenches with groundwater levels above the trench
bottoms.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 OPTION 1

A. Plugs shall be constructed of soil materials of 1 inch maximum size with more than
50% passing the No. 200 sieve as determined by ASTM D1140; and with liquid limit
and plasticity index values of at least 50% and 25% respectively, as determined by
ASTM D4318. Provide laboratory test results verifying the above gradation and
liquid-plastic limits of the proposed material.

2.2 OPTION 2

A. Plugs shall be constructed of soil and/or bentonite materials with a measured
laboratory permeability of 1 x 10-7 cm/sec or less, as determined by ASTM D5084
remolded at 95% of maximum laboratory density as determined by ASTM D698.
Remolded moisture content shall be within 2% of optimum compaction moisture
content. Provide laboratory test results verifying the above remolded permeability.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Carefully place and compact the low permeability trench backfill plug to a minimum
of 95% of maximum laboratory density as determined by ASTM D698 around the

Section 02222 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 2

pipeline and to the full plug dimensions provided in the drawings. The following
minimum plug dimensions are to be used:

1. Trench plugs shall extend to at least three feet into native subgrade below the
bottom of the trench, at least three feet laterally outside of the adjacent trench
backfill material on each side of the trench to within three feet of the ground
profile, and shall be a minimum of ten feet in length along the pipeline. See
Std. Dwg. No. 2222-1.


4. 1 TRENCH PLUGS

A. Trench plugs shall be paid for at the unit price established in the bid schedule for
each individual plug, with measurements verified in the field. The said unit price
shall include but not be limited to all labor, materials, equipment, watering, mixing,
compaction, dewatering, and testing necessary for the complete installation of the
plugs.

END OF SECTION

Section 02225 6
th
Edition
FLOWABLE FILL
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02225

FLOWABLE FILL

PART I: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work consists of furnishing and placing Flowable Fill to the lines and grades
shown on the plans as backfill in trenches and/or at other locations. Flowable Fill
is a self-compacting cementitious material using mineral aggregates (sand and/or
gravel), native or processed materials, fly ash/cement, water, air entraining
solution and (optionally) other admixtures. Flowable Fill is also known as
Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) and Controlled Density Fill (CDF).
Flowable Fill is only permitted when specifically called out in the contract
documents or approved by Engineer.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The current publications listed below form a part of the specification.

ASTM D4832 Preparation/Testing of Soil-Cement Slurry Test Cylinders
ASTM C39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylinderical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM D6023 Standard Test Method for Unit Weight
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C618 Specification for Fly Ash
ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixture for Concrete
ASTM E329 Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection
Agencies as Used in Construction
ASTM C1064 Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C117 Materials Finer Than 0.075 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine & Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C117 Materials Finer Than No. 200 (0.075 mm)Sieve in Mineral
ASTM D4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM C94 Ready Mix Concrete
ACI 301 Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

Section 02225 6
th
Edition
FLOWABLE FILL
Page 2 of 4

ACI 30 4 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete

1.3 TESTING

A. The Engineer may perform occasional quality assurance tests on the flowable fill
consisting of slump, air content measurements and casting three cylinders for
compressive strength test. The required compressive strength test method and
required range are described in section 2.4, Compressive Strength below.

B. The Contractor is to provide the Engineer with a mix design by either trial batch or
field experience methods to verify the required compressive strength of the flowable
fill at the 28 day age. Mix design requirements are described in Section 2.3,
Proportions; and in Section 2.4, Compressive Strength. Proportions shall be selected
on the basis of unconfined, air cured compressive strength test specimens.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MIXTURE OF MATERIALS

A. Provide a mixture of the materials described below to produce a self-compacting
cementitious material batched on a per cubic yard basis.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C150, Type 11.

B. Fly Ash. Fly Ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Class C or F.

C. Coarse Aggregate, Fine Aggregate and Native Materials. Any aggregate gradation
which produces performance characteristics of the flowable fill specified herein
will be accepted, except as follows: The amount of material passing the #200
sieve shall not exceed 20 percent. Also, liquid limit and plasticity index shall not
exceed 25 and 5, respectively.

D. Water. Water used in mixing shall be free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar,
vegetable matter or other substances injurious to the finished product.

E. Chemical Admixtures. Chemical Admixtures shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C494.

Section 02225 6
th
Edition
FLOWABLE FILL
Page 3 of 4

2.3 PROPORTIONS

A. A variety of sand/gravel aggregates, and/or native (or processed ) materials
meeting the above requirements in conjunction with appropriate amounts of
Portland cement and flyash, air entraining solution, and (optionally) other
admixtures may be used to produce the required mix properties described herein.

B. The contractor shall submit, to the Engineer, a mix design based upon a trial batch
or field experience, including the proportions and sources of all constituent
materials, air entraining and (optionally) other admixtures, expressed as cubic
yard batch weights. The mix shall contain a minimum of 50 pounds (23 kg) of
cement and up to 250 pounds (114 kg) fly ash per cubic yard, with the remainder
of the volumes composed of aggregates, water, and any approved admixtures.
Measured compressive strength, air content and yield for the mix design trial
batch (or for the field experience based mix design) shall be submitted.

2.4 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH

A. Flowable Fill shall be designed to achieve a 28 day compressive strength of 30 to
500 psi (0.2 to 3.4 mPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM C39. Excavatable
mixes shall be designed to attain 28 day strengths in the range of 30 - 150 psi (0.2
to 1.0 mPa). Test specimens shall be made in accordance with ASTM D4832.
Compressive strength tests shall be performed at frequencies of at least one test
set per 150 yd
3
(114m
3
)and at least one test set per day of placement.

2.5 CONSISTENCY

A. Consistency of the fresh mixture shall be such that the mixture may be readily
placed without segregation. High flowability material generally has a slump
greater than 8 inches (20.3 cm). As an alternative to slump testing, desired
consistency may be approximated by filling an open-ended 3 inch (76.2 mm)
diameter cylinder, 6 inches (15.2 cm) high, with the mixture and cylinder
immediately pulled straight up. The correct consistency of the mixture will
produce an approximate 8 inch (20.3 cm) diameter circular type spread without
segregation. Adjustments of the proportions of constituents may be made to
achieve proper solid suspension and optimum flowability. However, strength
requirements and proper yield shall be maintained for the actual batch weights.

Section 02225 6
th
Edition
FLOWABLE FILL
Page 4 of 4

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION

A. Comply with ACI 304 and ASTM C94 for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing the Flowable Fill, and as herein specified.

3.2 LIMITATIONS OF PLACEMENT

A. Do not place CLSM on frozen ground. Mix and place only when the air
temperature is at least 35 degrees F (2C) and rising. At the time of placement,
Flowable Fill shall be at least 40 degrees F (4C). Stop mixing and placement
when the air temperature is 40 degrees F (4C) and falling.

B. Flowable backfill shall be placed by methods that preserve the quality of the
material in terms of compressive strength, flow, homogenity, plasticity and
workability. The material shall be transported, placed, and/or consolidated so that
it flows easily around, adjacent to and under structures. It shall have the flow,
consistency, and workability such that the material is self-compacting.

C. Protect freshly placed Flowable Fill from premature drying, excessive cold, or hot
temperatures. The air in contact with the backfill surface shall be maintained at
temperatures above freezing. Begin curing, immediately following placement
before the backfill has dried. Continue with curing until the backfill has attained
the 28 day strength requirement. This strength is to be determined prior to any
load applications or construction activity, unless otherwise directed by an
Engineer.


4.1 GENERAL

A. Payment is made under: Flowable Fill Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meters).

B. Payment shall include all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to
provide, load, haul, place and consolidate the Flowable Fill.

C. Measurement shall be based upon batch delivery tickets provided to the Engineer at
the time of placement.

END OF SECTION

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
STREET EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION
Page 1 of 9

SECTION 02230


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the clearing and grubbing, excavation, filling or backfilling, and
subgrade preparation to the specified lines, grades and cross sections as preparation
for overlying base course or other courses as shown in the contract documents. Also
included are the removal and disposal of debris and excess soil, the furnishing and
placement of fill materials, and compaction.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The current publications listed below are a part of this specification.

AASHTO T99

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 5-lb (2.5kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305mm)
Drop

ASTM D698

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 5-lb (2.5kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305mm)
Drop

AASHTO T191
(ASTM D1556)

Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method

AASHTO T310
(ASTM D6938)

In-Place density and water content of the soil and soil
aggregate by Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth)

AASHTO T11
(ASTM C117)

Materials Finer Than No. 200 (0.075mm) Sieve in Mineral

AASHTO T27
(ASTM C136)

Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate

AASHTO T89

Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils

AASHTO T90

Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D4318

Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 9

1.3 DENSITY CONTROL TESTING


Section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.

meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556), Sand Cone Method; or
AASHTO T310 (ASTM D6938), Nuclear Densometer Methods. Quality
assurance field density testing frequency is at the discretion of the
Engineer.

3. Retesting of failing areas is at the expense of the Contractor.


1. Quality assurance tests will be made by the Engineer for each on-site
natural soil or each source of off-site material, including borrow material,
to determine the laboratory maximum density values and optimum
compaction moisture content under AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.

C. Material Submittals

1. Submit to the Engineer results of gradation tests for
Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade pitrun gravel/sand.

2. Submit to the Engineer samples of soils and/or aggregates for laboratory
moisture-density relationship testing by the Engineer.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 ON-SITE EMBANKMENT

A. Fill and backfill materials are to consist of natural soils free from organic matter,
frozen material, refuse, construction debris or other man-made items. Obtain
approval of the Engineer for all fill before placing and use only the fill from
designated borrow areas.

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 9

2.2 IMPORTED BORROW MATERIALS (FOR EMBANKMENTS IN-PLACE)

A. If required, obtain borrow soil for embankments from areas off the project site.
Furnish imported borrow at Contractor expense. Obtain Engineer approval of
borrow areas. Imported borrow is to meet the requirements of Section 2.1, On-
Site Embankment.

2.3 SUBEXCAVATION/REPLACEMENT BELOW SUBGRADE

A. Sub-excavation consists of removing and disposing of unstable material from
below planned subgrade elevation in cut sections or from below the natural
ground line in embankment sections.

B. Replacement material for subexcavations consists of either:

1. Suitable materials from within the project limits if suitable material is
present within the project limits, or

2. Imported materials if suitable material is not present within the project
limits. Where imported pitrun gravel is used, furnish replacement material
meeting the following gradation requirement:

Sieve Opening % Passing
3 Inch 100
No. 4 25 - 60
No. 200 12 Max.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Perform clearing and grubbing including the excavation, removal and disposal of
roots, stumps, sod, or any organic material and buried debris from within
construction limits. Remove unsuitable material to at least 12 inches (30cm)
below subgrade elevation.

B. Stockpile for project use any topsoil removed by clearing and grubbing.

C. Dispose of all Clearing and Grubbing material as specified.

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 9

3.2 EXCAVATION STABILITY AND SAFETY

A. Meet OSHA requirements for excavations and excavated material stockpiles.
This may require design of temporary slopes and/or shoring by a licensed
professional engineer.

3.3 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. Take precautions to protect all adjoining private and public property and facilities,
including underground and overhead utilities, curbs, sidewalks, driveways,
structures, fences, and vegetation. Any disturbed or damaged facilities will be
suitably restored or replaced consistent with condition(s) which existed prior to
construction.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate to the specified lines and grades. Excavate without causing rutting,
pumping or other disturbance to underlying materials.

B. Excavation made outside the specified grade limits is not measured for payment in
the Excavation or Embankment In-Place quantities.

1. Restore subexcavated areas as directed by the Engineer. Correct subgrade
disturbance by removing the disturbed soil and replacing and compacting
to reach at least 95% of the maximum laboratory dry density determined
by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.

2. Correct subgrade disturbance before placing overlying fill, backfill, base
course or other courses. Disturbed soils may be replaced with imported
material approved by the Engineer and compacted to 95% of maximum
laboratory dry density determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.

C. Maintain the subgrade to drain at all times. Construct side ditches or gutters from
cuts to embankments to prevent erosion damage to embankments.

D. Construct and maintain temporary drainage where existing surface drainage,
sewers, or under-drainage are disturbed during the work until permanent drainage
facilities are completed. Protect and preserve all existing drains, sewers, sub-
surface drains, conduits, gas lines, and other underground structures which may be
affected by the work. Repair all damage to these facilities or structures resulting
from the work, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 9

E. Excavate to minimize foundation soil and/or subgrade soil exposure to erosion,
drying or infiltrating moisture. Perform excavation to provide drainage away
from foundation/subgrade soils and minimize the potential for surface runoff to
enter the foundation/subgrade soils.

F. Grade all intersecting streets and approaches within the project limits as specified
or as directed using suitable materials on the surfaces to produce smooth riding
and satisfactory approaches to the intersections.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Dispose of debris and unused excavated materials off the project site in
accordance with all applicable state and local regulations. Locate and provide
suitable disposal areas.

3.6 DUST CONTROL

A. Furnish dust control meeting Section 01500, Construction and Temporary
Facilities, requirements.

3.7 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION

A. General

1. Assure the subgrade beneath pavements, curb, or sidewalks is natural soil
free of topsoil, organic material or refuse. Place pavement components,
curb and sidewalk over the prepared subgrade as soon as practical. Do not
place pavement components on frozen subgrade. No separate payment is
made for subgrade preparation, since it is considered incidental to
construction of overlying pavements/structures.

2. If the surface of a previous roadbed or pavement surface matches the
surface of the finished subgrade, scarify the top 6 inches (15cm) of the
previous surface the full width of the subgrade to permit uniform
reshaping and compaction.

B. Fine Grading

1. Assure the finished surface does not deviate not more than 0.1 foot (3cm)
at any point from the staked elevation; and that the sum of the deviations

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 9

from true grade of any two points less than 30 feet (9m) apart does not
exceed 0.1 foot (3cm).

C. Compaction

1. Compact the upper 8-inches (20cm) of the subgrade to at least 95% of the
laboratory maximum, determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.
Proof roll the subgrade surface for observation by the Engineer. Compact
all soft, yielding or otherwise unstable areas to provide adequate support
of construction equipment as determined by the Engineer. Also compact
the subgrade to meet the specified density requirements. Remove and
replace any unstable or otherwise unsuitable subgrade as specified under
Section 3.9, Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade.

3.8 EMBANKMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION

A. General

1. Place fill materials (embankment) to the specified lines and grades. Place
fill in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches (20cm) in loose thickness.
Once placed, moisten or aerate, mix, and compact each layer as specified.
Work clay soils to maximum 2-inch (5cm) nominal size before
compacting. Do not begin fill placement until the subgrade construction
has been approved by the Engineer. Do not place fill on wet or frozen
areas. Do not operate heavy equipment for spreading or compacting fill
within four feet (1.2m) of structures.

2. If grading operations are suspended due to weather, blade the entire area
until it is smooth, free of depressions and ruts, and crowned to drain water.

B. Compaction

1. Control the fill moisture content to assist in obtaining the specified field
density. Maintain the moisture content of fill soils within 3 percent of
optimum moisture. Compact each fill layer and the top 8 inches (20cm) of
subgrade soil to at least 95% of maximum laboratory density as
determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698. Compact areas within four
feet (1.2m) of structures in maximum 8 inch (20cm) loose lifts using
power-driven hand held tampers.

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 9

2. Apply water, when required, at the locations and in the amounts required
to compact the material to the specified requirements, Maintain an
adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used for
watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water
application. Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain
all embankment and base courses in a damp condition in accordance with
Section 1500. Water required for compacting subgrade and/or
embankments may be obtained from the municipal system if approved by
the Owner, or from other sources.

3. Do not place fill or embankment when moisture content prevents effective
compaction or causes rutting. Dry all embankments having excessive
moisture by scarifying and blading the affected areas before compacting or
placing succeeding layers.

3.9 SUBEXCAVATION/REPLACEMENT BELOW SUBGRADE

A. Subexcavation consists of removing and disposing of unsuitable material from
below planned subgrade elevation in cut sections or from below the natural
groundline in embankment sections.

B. Soil is unsuitable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, it contains excessive organics,
refuse, construction debris, or other objectionable material; or if it unstable,
rutting or yielding; or if it contains excessive moisture. Generally, soils will be
sub-excavated and replaced only if they are unable to adequately support
equipment typically used for excavation and soil transport.

C. Assure the Engineer has measured the area where unstable materials have been
removed before backfilling. Do not backfill any area where unstable foundation
soils have been excavated until authorized by the Engineer. Backfill placed
without approval may be ordered removed and replaced at Contractor expense.

D. Backfill with either suitable soils from within the project limits or imported pitrun
gravel complying with the requirements of Section 2.3,
Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade. Different measurement and
payment items are used for the on-site soil and pitrun gravel replacements.

E. Compact the replacement material to 95 percent of the maximum laboratory
density as determined by AASHTO T99 or ASTM D698.

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 9

3.10 PROTECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair damaged embankments to the specified elevations and grades. Maintain
ditches and drains along the subgrade to drain the subgrade. Assure the finished
grade does not deviate more than 0.1 (3cm) foot at any point from the staked
elevation and the sum of the deviations from true grade of any two points not
more than 30 feet (9m) apart does not exceed 0.1 foot (3cm). Do not place any
surface course or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved by
the Engineer.


4. 1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT

A. EXCAVATION ABOVE SUBGRADE - CUBIC YARD BASIS.

1. When specified in the contract as a bid item, this item is paid for at the
number of cubic yards (cubic meters), as specified in the contract
documents and computed using the plan lines and grades.

2. The volume, based upon the plan quantity as specified above, is paid for at
the contract unit price bid for Excavation Above Subgrade, and is full
compensation for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
accomplish all clearing, grubbing, old pavement removals, hauling,
disposal, and excavating to prepare the subgrade shown in the contract.

3. When Excavation Above Subgrade is not specified in the contract as a bid
item, the cost of excavation above subgrade is incidental to and included
in the unit prices bid for the associated bid items for the work.

4. Payment is made under: Excavation - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meters).

B. SUBEXCAVATION/REPLACEMENT BELOW SUBGRADE.

1. This item is field measured using the average end area method and paid for
by the cubic yard (cubic meter) in-place of material removed, measured in
its original position, at the contract unit price bid for
Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade, which price and payment
constitutes full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals to complete the excavation and disposal of unsuitable material

Section 02230 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 9

in the embankment foundation or in the subgrade. The cost of backfilling
and compacting holes created by the removal of unsuitable material with
the specified replacement material is also included in
Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade Item.

2. Payment is made under:

a. Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade (Replacement with
On-site Materials) - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meter).

b. Subexcavation/Replacement Below Subgrade (Replacement with
Imported Materials) - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meter).

C. EMBANKMENT IN PLACE.

1. When specified in the contract as a bid item, Embankment In Place is paid
for at the contract unit price per cubic yard (cubic meter) for the actual
field measured volume of embankment constructed and accepted in place
to the specified lines and grades. Price and payment is full compensation
for all labor, tools, equipment, and other incidentals necessary to secure
borrow material, haul, place, level, manipulate, compact the embankment
material, and perform other work for embankment construction.

2. When Embankment In Place is not specified in the contract, the cost of
constructing embankments is incidental to and included in the unit prices
bid for the associated bid items for the work.

3. Payment is made under: Embankment In Place - Per Cubic Yard (Cubic
Meter).

END OF SECTION

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 1 of 6 *
SECTION 02234

SUB BASE COURSE

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is constructing a sub-base course of either crushed or uncrushed
materials meeting the specified gradations and other quality criteria specified
herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO T11 Amount of Material Finer Than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in
Aggregate
AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
AASHTO T89 Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T176 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T96 Resistance to Degradation By Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine
AASHTO T99
(ASTM D698)
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
Using 5-lb (2.5 kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (305 mm) Drop
ASTM D5821 Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse
Aggregate
AASHTO T191
(ASTM D1556)
Density of Soil in-Place By Sand Cone Method
AASHTO T310
(ASTM D6938)
In-Place density and water content of the soil and soil aggregate by
Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth)



section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.
.
meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556) Sand Cone method or AASHTO

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 2 of 6 *
T310 (ASTM D 6938), Nuclear Densometer method. Quality assurance
field density testing frequency is at the discretion of the Engineer.



1. Moisture density curves will be provided by the Contractor for each base
material supplied. These will be provided at the expense of the Contractor.

C. Materials Submittals

1. Submit to the Engineer gradations, moisture density curves and other
preliminary test results for sources to be used for base materials prior to
delivery to the site for approval by the Engineer. If recycled materials are
proposed, CBR test data must be submitted to the Engineer to assure
consistency with design requirements.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish select sub-base material meeting the applicable aggregate quality.

2.2 UNCRUSHED SUBBASE

A. Furnish material consisting of hard, durable stone, gravel or other similar
materials mixed or blended with sand, stone dust, recycled concrete and/or asphalt
or other binding or filler materials produced from approved sources, providing a
uniform mixture meeting these specifications and compacted into a dense and
well- bonded sub base. Oversize material of acceptable quality may be crushed
and used in the base material, if the blend meets the specified gradations.

B. Assure the material retained on the No.4 sieve has a wear not exceeding 50
percent at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T96.

2.3 CRUSHED SUBBASE

A. Furnish material having both fine and coarse crushed stone or crushed gravel,
and/or natural gravel, and when approved, blended with soil, sand, screenings.
recycled concrete and/or asphalt or other materials.

B. Furnish crushed gravel or stone consisting of hard, durable particles, not
containing excessive flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated rock, dirt, or other

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 3 of 6 *
deleterious matter, and having a wear not exceeding 50 percent at 500 revolutions
as determined by AASHTO T96.

C. Use production methods that produce a percent of fractured rock in the finished
product that is constant and uniform. Crush aggregate so that at least 25% of the
material is retained on the No.4 sieve and has one or more mechanically fractured
faces.

2.4 GRADATION

A. Produce material, including any added binder or filler, meeting the following
Table of Gradations as determined by AASHTO Methods T11 and T27:

TABLE OF GRADATIONS

PERCENTAGES BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVES

Passing 4 Minus 3" Minus 2" Minus 1 1/2" Minus 1" Minus
4 Inch 100
3 Inch --- 100
2Inch --- --- 100
11/2 Inch --- --- --- 100
1 Inch --- --- --- --- 100
No.4 25-60 25-60 25-60 25-60 25-70
No.40 10-30 10-30 10-30 10-30 10-30
No.200 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10

B. Up to 5% "oversized" material is permitted provided that the "oversized" material
passes the screen size immediately larger than the top size specified. The material
between the maximum screen opening and the No.4 sieve shall be reasonably well
graded.

C. Suitability of the aggregate is determined by the gradation testing of material
placed in the project as required in the Contract documents, within the allowable
limits described by the Table of Gradations for the particular grading specified.

D. Assure the liquid limit for the aggregate fraction passing a No.40 sieve does not
exceed 25, nor the plasticity index exceed 6, as determined by AASHTO T89 and
T90.

2.5 WATERING:

A. Use uncontaminated water.

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 4 of 6 *
PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Immediately before placing the base course, blade smooth and shape the
underlying subgrade, sub-base or base course to the plan cross section before the
base course is placed on the street. Do not place sub-base course on wet or muddy
subgrade or sub-base course. Maintain at least one completed area of finished and
accepted subgrade or sub-base course in advance of placing base course.

3.2 PLACEMENT AND SPREADING

A. Mix and place the material in maximum 6-inch (15 cm) horizontal layers loose
thickness. Deposit and spread each load of material on the prepared subgrade, or
on a completed sub-base course layer continuously without breaks. Assure
hauling over the subgrade or over any completed sub base course does not
damage the subgrade, sub-base or base course.

B. Spread using dump boards, spreader boxes, or moving vehicles equipped to
distribute the material in a uniform layer or a windrow. Place and spread the
material in a uniform layer to the specified depth without causing segregation.
Once the base course is spread, blade-mix it the full depth by alternately blading
the entire layer to the centerline and back to the roadway edge.

C. For multiple layers, mix each layer as specified above. Blade smooth and compact
each layer before placing the succeeding layer.

D. Uniformly add water, when required, on site and place in amounts required to
compact the material as necessary to aid in densification and to limit segregation.
Maintain an adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used
for watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water application.

E. Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain the base course in a
damp condition.

F. Where crushed sub-base is specified, produce a product with at least 25% of the
material retained on the No.4 sieve having one or more fractured faces.

G. Water required for compacting base gravel may be obtained from the municipal
system if approved by the Owner, or from other sources.

H. Compact the material using appropriate tamping equipment or power rollers.
Correct all irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling by scarifying
the material and adding or removing material, as required, until the surface meets
specifications.

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 5 of 6 *
I. Blade and compact alternately, as required to produce the specified surface until
final inspection. Tamp the material along curbs, headers, manholes, and similar
structures and all places inaccessible to rollers using approved mechanical
tampers or hand tampers meet field density requirements.

3.3 FIELD DENSITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish watering and rolling to obtain a minimum field density of 95 percent of
the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T99. No separate
compensation is allowed for rolling and watering the sub-base course other than
the sub-base course bid item or items listed on the Contract documents.

3.4 SURFACE TOLERANCES

A. Finish the sub-base course so that when tested using a 10-foot (3 m) straight edge
placed on the surface with its center line parallel to the street center, the
maximum surface deviation from the straight edge does not exceed 1/2-inch (12.7
mm). Additionally, the finished grade cannot deviate more than 0.1 foot (30 mm)
at any point from the staked elevation and the sum of the deviations from two
points not more than 30 feet (9.14 m) apart cannot exceed 0.1 feet (30 mm).

B. Perform all sub base course corrections to meet the above tolerances using
approved methods and materials. Payment for patching aggregate is at the unit
price bid for the sub-base course material.


4. 1 CUBIC YARD BASIS: SUB-BASE COURSE

A. This item is measured and paid for by the cubic yards (cubic meters) of uncrushed
or crushed, sub-base course of the specified gradations, complete in place, at the
contract unit price bid for _____"Minus Crushed or Uncrushed Sub base Course",
which constitutes full compensation for furnishing, loading, hauling, spreading,
blending, shaping, watering, and compacting the sub-base course material, and for
all tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

B. Payment is made under:

1. _____" Minus Uncrushed Sub base Course - per cubic yard.(cubic meter)
2. _____" Minus Crushed Sub Base Course - per cubic yard. (cubic meter)

Section 02234 6
th
Edition
SUB BASE COURSE
Page 6 of 6 *
4. 2 SQUARE YARD BASIS: SUB BASE COURSE

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square yard (square meter) of sub base
surface area for furnishing crushed or uncrushed, sub-base course of the thickness
and gradations specified, complete in place, at the contract unit price bid for
_____" Thickness of____" Minus Crushed or Uncrushed Sub Base Course",
which constitutes full compensation for furnishing, loading, hauling, spreading,
shaping, blending, watering and compacting the sub-base course material, and for
all tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. _____" Thickness of ____" Minus Un-crushed Sub-Base Course-per
square yard (square meter).

2. _____" Thickness of ____" Minus Crushed Sub-Base Course-per square
yard (square meter).

4. 3 LINEAR FOOT BASIS: SUB BASE COURSE

A. This item is measured and paid for by the linear feet of trench restored, measured
along the trench centerline, with crushed or uncrushed, sub-base course of the
gradations specified, complete in place, at the contract unit price bid for _____"
Minus Crushed or Uncrushed Sub-Base Course", which constitutes full
compensation for furnishing, loading, hauling, spreading, blending, shaping,
watering, and compacting the sub-base course material, and for all tools, labor
and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. _____" Minus Uncrushed Sub-Base Course - per linear foot (linear meter).

2. _____" Minus Crushed Sub-Base Course - per linear foot (linear meter).

END OF SECTION

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 1 of 6 *
SECTION 02235

CRUSHED BASE COURSE

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the placing of one or more base courses composed of crushed gravel,
stone or other similar materials meeting the gradation and other quality criteria
specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO T11 Amount Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in Aggregate
AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
AASHTO T89 Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T176 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T96 Resistance to Degradation By Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine
AASHTO T99
(ASTM D698)
Moisture-density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures
Using 5-lb (2.5 kg) Rammer and 12-Inch (305 mm) Drop
Aggregate
AASHTO T191
(ASTM D1556)
Density of Soil In-Place By Sand Cone Method
AASHTO T310
(ASTM D6938)
In-Place density and water content of the soil and soil aggregate by
Nuclear Method (Shallow Depth)



section 01400, Contractor Quality Control and Owner Quality Assurance.

meeting AASHTO T191 (ASTM D1556) Sand Cone method or
AASHTOT310 (ASTM ( D6938) Nuclear Densometer method. Quality

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 2 of 6 *
assurance field density testing frequency is at the discretion of the
Engineer.



1. Moisture density curves will be provided by the Contractor for each base
material provided. These will be provided at the expense of the
Contractor.

1.4 MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

1. Submit to the Engineer gradations, moisture density curves and other test
results for sources to be used for base materials prior to delivery to the site
for approval by the Engineer. . If recycled materials are proposed, CBR
test data must be submitted to the Engineer to assure consistency with
design requirements.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish aggregate base material meeting the applicable aggregate quality
requirements.

2.2 CRUSHED BASE MATERIAL

A. Consists of both fine and coarse fragments of crushed stone or crushed gravel,
and/or natural gravel, and when approved, blended with sand, finely crushed
stone, crusher screenings, recycled concrete and/or asphalt or other similar
materials.

B. Use crushed stone or gravel consisting of hard, durable particles of fragments of
stone, free of excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces, dirt, or other
deleterious matter, and having a percent of wear of not exceeding 50 at 500
revolutions when tested under AASHTO T96.

C. Crush material so that the percentage of fractured particles in the finished product
is as constant and uniform as practical. Crush to produce material where at least
35 percent of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve has at least one fractured
face.

D. Incorporate all material produced in the crushing operation and passing the No. 4
mesh sieve into the base material necessary to meet the gradation requirements.

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 3 of 6 *
2.3 GRADATION

A. As determined by AASHTO Methods T11 and T27, furnish material for the
grading specified in the contract documents including binder or filler, which may
have been added at the plant or at the site, meeting the requirements of that
grading in the Table of Gradations below:

TABLE OF GRADATIONS

PERCENTAGES BY WEIGHT PASSING SQUARE MESH SIEVE

Passing 1 Minus 1" Minus Minus
1 1/2 Inch 100
1 Inch 100
3/4 Inch 100
1/2 Inch
No. 4 Sieve 25 - 60 40 - 70 40 - 70
No. 10 Sieve 25 - 55 25 - 55
No. 200 Sieve 0 - 8 2 - 10 2 - 10

B. Up to 5% "oversized" material is permitted provided that the "oversized" material
passes the screen size immediately larger than the top size specified. The
produced material between the maximum screen opening and the No.4 sieve shall
be reasonably well graded.

C. Suitability of the aggregate is based on samples obtained during placement in the
project within limits allowed in the table for the particular grading specified.

D. That portion of the fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve must be less than 60
percent of that portion passing the No. 40 sieve.

E. The liquid limit for that portion of the fine aggregate passing a No. 40 sieve
cannot exceed 25, nor the plasticity index exceed 6, as determined by AASHTO
T89 and T90.

2.4 WATERING:

A. Use uncontaminated water.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Before placing the base course, smooth and shape the surface of the underlying
subgrade, sub-base or base course to the cross section shown on the plans before
placing the base course.

B. Do not place base course on a wet or muddy subgrade or sub-base course.
Complete at least one area of finished and accepted subgrade, sub-base or
underlying base before the placing of any base course.

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 4 of 6 *
3.2 PLACEMENT AND SPREADING

A. Mix and place the material in maximum 8 inches (20 centimeters) compacted
layers unless otherwise approved. Deposit and spread each load of material on
the prepared subgrade, or on a completed sub-base or base course layer
continuously without interruption. Discontinue operating haul units over
subgrade, or over any sub-base or base course completed if the haul units damage
the subgrade, sub-base or base course.

B. Deposit and spread the material in a uniform layer, without segregation, to a loose
depth so that when compacted, and making allowance for any filler to be blended
on the road, the layer has the specified thickness.

C. Spread material using dump boards, spreader boxes, or vehicles equipped to
distribute the material in a uniform layer. The material may be deposited in
windrows mixed and spread as described below.

D. Construct each layer meeting these requirements. Blade smooth and thoroughly
compact each layer as specified before placing the succeeding layer.

E. If segregation or moisture problems exist, or if the material was placed on the
road in windrows, thoroughly blade-mix the material of the affected layer by
alternately blading to the center and back to the edges of the street.

F. Uniformly add water, when required, on site and place in amounts required to
compact the material as necessary to aid in densification and to limit segregation.
Maintain an adequate water supply during the work. Assure the equipment used
for watering is of the capacity and design to provide uniform water application.

G. Apply water during the work to control dust and to maintain the base course in a
damp condition in accordance with Section 01500 under Dust Control.

H. Water required for compacting base gravel may be obtained from the municipal
system if approved by the owner, or from other sources.

3.3 FIELD DENSITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Compact placed material the full width by rolling with suitable tamping
equipment or power rollers. Correct all irregularities or depressions that develop
during rolling by loosening the material in these places and adding or removing
material, as required.

B. Perform blading and compacting alternately as required or directed, to maintain a
smooth, even, uniformly compacted surface until the final inspection. Along
curbs, headers, manholes, and similar structures, and at all places not accessible to
the roller, compact the base course material with suitable mechanical tampers or
hand tampers to reach the compaction requirements.

C. Provide the watering and rolling required to obtain a minimum field density of 95
percent of maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T99. No separate
compensation is made for rolling and watering the base course other than the base
course bid item or items listed on the contract documents.

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 5 of 6 *
3.4 SURFACE TOLERANCES

A. The base course surface when finished and tested with a 10-foot (3.0 meter)
straight edge placed on the surface with its center line parallel to the center line of
the street, will not have a surface deviation from the straight edge exceeding 3/8-
inch (1.0 centimeter). Additionally, the finished grade cannot deviate more than
0.05 feet (1.5 centimeters) at any point from the staked elevation, and further, the
sum of the deviations from two points not more than 30 feet (9.0 meters) apart
cannot exceed 0.05 feet (1.5 centimeters).

B. For base course receiving asphalt concrete surfacing, the finished grade cannot
deviate more than 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters) at any point from the staked
elevations, and the sum of the deviations from two points not more than 30 feet
(9.0 meters) apart cannot exceed 0.02 feet (0.6 centimeters).

C. If patching of the base course is necessary to meet the tolerances, perform
patching using methods and aggregates approved by the Engineer. Payment for
patching aggregate is at the unit price bid for the base course material.


4. 1 CUBIC YARD BASIS: CRUSHED BASE COURSE.

A. This item is measured and paid for by the cubic yards (cubic meters) of crushed
base course of the gradations specified in the Contract documents, complete in
place, at the contract unit price bid for Minus Crushed Base Course.
Price and payment is full compensation for furnishing, crushing, loading, hauling,
spreading, shaping, watering and compacting the base course material, and for all
tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. Minus Crushed Base Course - per cubic yard (cubic meters).

4. 2 SQUARE YARD BASIS: CRUSHED BASE COURSE.

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square yards (square meters) of crushed
base course surface area for furnishing crushed base course of the thickness and
gradations specified in the Contract documents, complete in place, at the contract
unit price bid for Thickness of Minus Crushed Base Course. Price
and payment is full compensation for furnishing, crushing, loading, hauling,
spreading, shaping, watering and compacting the base course material, and for all
tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. Thickness of Minus Crushed Base Course - per square yard
(square meter).

Section 02235 6
th
Edition
CRUSHED BASE COURSE
Page 6 of 6 *
4. 3 LINEAR FOOT BASIS: CRUSHED BASE COURSE.

A. This item is measured and paid for by the linear feet (linear meters) of trench
restored, measured along the trench centerline, with crushed base course of the
gradations specified in the Contract documents, completed in place, at the
contract unit price bid for _____ Minus Crushed Base Course. Price and
payment is full compensation for furnishing, crushing, loading, hauling,
spreading, shaping, blending, watering and compacting the base course material,
and for all tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. Minus Crushed Base Course - per linear foot (linear meter).

END OF SECTION

Sections - 02500
Paving and Surfacing

PAVING AND SURFACING

SECTION 02502 Asphalt Primer and\or Tack Coat
SECTION 02504 Asphalt Seal Coat
SECTION 02505 Construction Seal
SECTION 02510 Asphalt Concrete Pavement
SECTION 02515 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
SECTION 02528 Concrete Curb and Gutter
SECTION 02529 Concrete Sidewalks, Driveways, Approaches, Curb Return Fillets, Valley Gutters,
and Miscellaneous New Concrete Construction.
SECTION 02581 Pavement Markings and Markers (Pre-Formed Plastic, Paints and Enamels)
SECTION 02582 Reflective Thermoplastic Pavement Markings

Section 02502
ASPHALT PRIME AND/OR TACK COAT
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 02502


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the single application of asphalt material as specified in the Contract
documents on a prepared sub-grade, sub-base, base or asphalt surface meeting the
plans and specifications.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish asphalt material grade and type as specified below meeting the
requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 in this Section.

Type and Grade Use

LIQUID ASPHALT, MC-70 Asphalt Prime Coat
EMULSIFIED ASPHALT, SS-1 or SS-1h Asphalt Tack Coat
EMULSIFIED ASPHALT, CRS-1 OR CRS-2 Asphalt Tack Coat

B. Furnish Blotter Sand as specified below meeting the requirements of MDT
407.02.2.

1. Blotter material shall be 100% passing the -inch (12.5 mm) screen
having a PI of 6 or less.

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

0
2
5
0
2

A
S
P
H
A
L
T

P
R
I
M
E

A
N
D
/
O
R

T
A
C
K

C
O
A
T

P
a
g
e

2

o
f

7

T
A
B
L
E

1

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S

F
O
R

A
N
I
O
N
I
C

E
M
U
L
S
I
F
I
E
D

A
S
P
H
A
L
T
S

T
Y
P
E

R
A
P
I
D

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

M
E
D
I
U
M

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

S
L
O
W

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

G
R
A
D
E

R
S
-
1

R
S
-
2

M
S
-
1

M
S
-
2

M
S
-
2
h

S
S
-
1

S
S
-
1
h

T
e
s
t

o
f

E
m
u
l
s
i
o
n
s
:

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

V
i
s
c
o
s
i
t
y
,

S
a
y
b
o
l
t
-
F
u
r
o
l

a
t

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)

2
0

1
0
0

2
0

1
0
0

1
0
0

1
0
0

2
0

1
0
0

2
0

1
0
0

V
i
s
c
o
s
i
t
y
,

S
a
y
b
o
l
t
-
F
u
r
o
l

a
t

1
2
2
F

(
5
0
C
)

7
5

4
0
0

D
e
m
u
l
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y
*
,

3
5
m
l
,

0
.
0
2
N

C
a
C
l
2
,

p
e
r
c
e
n
t

6
0

6
0

R
e
s
i
d
u
e

b
y

D
i
s
t
i
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
,

p
e
r
c
e
n
t

5
5

6
3

5
5

6
5

6
5

5
7

5
7

T
e
s
t

o
n

R
e
s
i
d
u
e

f
r
o
m

d
i
s
t
i
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
e
s
t
s

P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
,

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)
,

1
0
0
g
,

5
s

1
0
0

2
0
0

1
0
0

2
0
0

1
0
0

2
0
0

1
0
0

2
0

4
0

9
0

1
0
0

2
0
0

4
0

9
0

D
u
c
t
i
l
i
t
y
,

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)
,

5
c
m
/
m
i
n
,

c
m
.

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

S
o
l
u
b
i
l
i
t
y

i
n

T
r
i
c
h
l
o
r
o
e
t
h
y
l
e
n
e

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

S
u
g
g
e
s
t
e
d

U
s
e
s
:

*

T
h
e

d
e
m
u
l
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

t
e
s
t

s
h
a
l
l

b
e

m
a
d
e

w
i
t
h
i
n

3
0

d
a
y
s

f
r
o
m

t
h
e

d
a
t
e

o
f

s
h
i
p
m
e
n
t
.

S
u
r
f
a
c
e

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

p
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
c
a
d
a
m

a
n
d

t
a
c
k

c
o
a
t

S
u
r
f
a
c
e

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

a
n
d

p
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
c
a
d
a
m

P
l
a
n
t

o
r

r
o
a
d

m
i
x
t
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

c
o
u
r
s
e

a
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e
,

s
u
b
s
t
a
n
t
i
a
l
l
y

a
l
l

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

i
s

r
e
t
a
i
n
e
d

o
n

a

N
o
.

8

(
2
.
3
6

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e

a
n
d

p
r
a
c
t
i
c
a
l
l
y

n
o
n
e

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

p
a
s
s
e
s

a

N
o
.

2
0
0

(
0
.
0
7
5

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e
,

t
a
c
k

P
l
a
n
t

o
r

r
o
a
d

m
i
x
t
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

c
o
u
r
s
e

a
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e
,

s
u
b
s
t
a
n
t
i
a
l
l
y

a
l
l

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

i
s

r
e
t
a
i
n
e
d

o
n

a

N
o
.

8

(
2
.
3
6

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e

a
n
d

p
r
a
c
t
i
c
a
l
l
y

n
o
n
e

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

p
a
s
s
e
s

a

N
o
.

2
0
0

(
0
.
0
7
5

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e
.

P
l
a
n
t

o
r

r
o
a
d

m
i
x
t
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

g
r
a
d
e
d

a
n
d

f
i
n
e

a
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e
s
,

s
u
b
s
t
a
n
t
i
a
l
l
y

q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

p
a
s
s
e
s

a

N
o
.

8

(
2
.
3
6

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e

a
n
d

a

p
o
r
t
i
o
n

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

m
a
y

p
a
s
s

a

N
o
.

2
0
0

(
0
.
0
7
5

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e
.

S
l
u
r
r
y

s
e
a
l

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t
.

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

0
2
5
0
2

A
S
P
H
A
L
T

P
R
I
M
E

A
N
D
/
O
R

T
A
C
K

C
O
A
T

P
a
g
e

3

o
f

7

T
A
B
L
E

2

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
S

F
O
R

C
A
T
I
O
N
I
C

E
M
U
L
S
I
F
I
E
D

A
S
P
H
A
L
T
S

A
S
S
H
T
O

M
2
0
8

T
Y
P
E

R
A
P
I
D

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

M
E
D
I
U
M

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

S
L
O
W

S
E
T
T
I
N
G

G
R
A
D
E

C
R
S
-
1

C
R
S
-
2

C
M
S
-
1

C
M
S
-
2
h

C
S
S
-
1

C
S
S
-
1
h

T
e
s
t

o
f

E
m
u
l
s
i
o
n
s
:

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

M
i
n

M
a
x

V
i
s
c
o
s
i
t
y
,

S
a
y
b
o
l
t
-
F
u
r
o
l

a
t

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)

2
0

1
0
0

2
0

1
0
0

V
i
s
c
o
s
i
t
y
,

S
a
y
b
o
l
t
-
F
u
r
o
l

a
t

1
2
2
F

(
5
0
C
)

2
0

1
0
0

1
0
0

4
0
0

5
0

4
5
0

5
0

4
5
0

D
e
m
u
l
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y
A

3
5
m
l
,

0
.
0
8
%

s
o
d
i
u
m

d
i
o
c
t
y
l

s
u
l
t
r
o
s
u
c
c
i
n
a
t
e
,

%

4
0

4
0

P
a
r
t
i
c
l
e

C
h
a
r
g
e

T
e
s
t

P
o
s

P
o
s

P
o
s

P
o
s

P
o
s

B

P
o
s

B

D
i
s
t
i
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
:

O
i
l

d
i
s
t
i
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

b
y

v
o
l
u
m
e

o
f

e
m
u
l
s
i
o
n
,

p
e
r
c
e
n
t

1
2

1
2

R
e
s
i
d
u
e
,

p
e
r
c
e
n
t

6
0

6
5

6
5

6
5

5
7

5
7

T
e
s
t

o
n

R
e
s
i
d
u
e

f
r
o
m

d
i
s
t
i
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

t
e
s
t
s

P
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n
,

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)
,

1
0
0
g
,

5
s

1
0
0

2
5
0

1
0
0

2
5
0

1
0
0

2
5
0

4
0

9
0

1
0
0

2
5
0

4
0

9
0

D
u
c
t
i
l
i
t
y
,

7
7
F

(
2
5
C
)
,

5
c
m
/
m
i
n
,

c
m
.

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

4
0

S
o
l
u
b
i
l
i
t
y

i
n

T
r
i
c
h
l
o
r
o
e
t
h
y
l
e
n
e

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

9
7
.
5

S
u
g
g
e
s
t
e
d

U
s
e
s
:

A

T
h
e

d
e
m
u
l
s
i
b
i
l
i
t
y

t
e
s
t

s
h
a
l
l

b
e

m
a
d
e

w
i
t
h
i
n

3
0

d
a
y
s

f
r
o
m

t
h
e

d
a
t
e

o
f

s
h
i
p
m
e
n
t
.

B

I
f

t
h
e

p
a
r
t
i
c
l
e

c
h
a
r
g
e

t
e
s
t

r
e
s
u
l
t

i
s

i
n
c
o
n
c
l
u
s
i
v
e
,

m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l

h
a
v
i
n
g

a

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

p
H

v
a
l
u
e

o
f

6
.
7

w
i
l
l

b
e

a
c
c
e
p
t
a
b
l
e
.

S
u
r
f
a
c
e

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t
,

p
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
c
a
d
a
m

a
n
d

t
a
c
k

c
o
a
t

S
u
r
f
a
c
e

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t

a
n
d

p
e
n
e
t
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
c
a
d
a
m

P
l
a
n
t

o
r

r
o
a
d

m
i
x
t
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

c
o
u
r
s
e

a
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e
,

s
u
b
s
t
a
n
t
i
a
l
l
y

a
l
l

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

i
s

r
e
t
a
i
n
e
d

o
n

a

N
o
.

8

(
2
.
3
6

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e

a
n
d

p
r
a
c
t
i
c
a
l
l
y

n
o
n
e

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

p
a
s
s
e
s

a

N
o
.

2
0
0

(
0
.
0
7
5

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e
.

P
l
a
n
t

o
r

r
o
a
d

m
i
x
t
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

g
r
a
d
e
d

a
n
d

f
i
n
e

a
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
e
s
,

a

s
u
b
s
t
a
n
t
i
a
l

q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

p
a
s
s
e
s

a

N
o
.

8

(
2
.
3
6

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e

a
n
d

a

p
o
r
t
i
o
n

o
f

w
h
i
c
h

m
a
y

p
a
s
s

a

N
o
.

2
0
0

(
0
.
0
7
5

m
m
)

s
i
e
v
e
.

S
l
u
r
r
y

s
e
a
l

t
r
e
a
t
m
e
n
t
.

Section 02502
Page 4 of 7
PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 DISTRIBUTORS.

A. Use a pressure distributor for prime and tack coats that distributes the required
amount of asphaltic material at the specified temperature in a uniform spray,
without atomization. Assure the distributor is pneumatic tired and does not rut or
otherwise damage the surface being sprayed. Equip it with a bitumeter having a
dial visible to the truck driver for maintaining the constant speed required for
application at the specified rate.

B. Assure the pump is operated by a separate power unit or by the truck power unit.
Equip the pump with a tachometer having a dial readily visible to the operator,
registering gallons per minute passing through the nozzles.

C. The distributor shall be designed so that the normal width of application shall be
not less than 12 feet (3.66 m), with provision for the application of lesser or
greater width when necessary. The distributor shall be designed or equipped so
that the height of the spray bar above the surface to be sprayed, may be set and
maintained within a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) (plus or minus) of the height
required to provide a uniform application.

D. Assure the distributor is equipped and operated so that the asphaltic material is
circulated or agitated throughout the entire heating system. Provide a means for
constant, accurate temperature indication of the asphaltic material is provided.
Assure the thermometer well is placed without contacting the heating tube.

3.2 ASPHALT PRIME COAT.

A. Asphalt prime coat will be applied only if specified in the plans or special
provisions. See section 02502.4.

B. Spray the asphalt prime coat, under average conditions, from 0.20 to 0.50 gallons
per square yard (0.9 to 8.2 liters per square meter) of low viscosity MC-70 asphalt
on the prepared surface of a non-asphaltic base course.

C. Immediately before applying the prime coat, clean the surface to be primed of all
dirt and loose materials using blowers or a power broom, supplemented by hand
brooming if necessary. Finish the surface to receive the asphalt material to the
specified requirements for smoothness, compaction, and grade. Apply prime coat
when the surface is dry or slightly damp and when the air temperature in the
shade is not less than 50 F (10 C).

D. Apply asphalt material using a pressure distributor at the rate or rates directed by
the Engineer.

Section 02502
Page 5 of 7
E. Before spraying, spread building paper over the surface from the joint back, for
the distance required for the spray bar to begin spraying and operating at full force
when the surface to be treated is reached. Once the asphalt is applied, remove and
dispose of the building paper. Assure the spray bar is shut off instantaneously at
each construction joint to assure a straight line and full application of asphalt
prime up to the joint. If required to prevent dripping, insert a drip pan under the
nozzle where the application ends. Use a hand sprayer to apply primer material to
touch up all spots missed by the distributor.

F. Protect the surfaces of structures and trees adjacent to the area being treated from
being spattered or marred. Do not discharge asphalt material into borrow pits or
gutters.

G. After the prime coat has been applied, assure it is left undisturbed for at least 24
hours or until it is cured or blotted. Blot all excess asphalt material remaining on
the surface after 24 hours with sand before opening the surface to traffic. Maintain
the primed or tacked surface until the surfacing has been placed. Maintenance
includes spreading any additional sand required to prevent asphalt material
adhering to the tires of vehicles using the surface and patching all breaks in the
surface with additional bituminous material. Any area of surface disturbed by
traffic or otherwise, is to be cleaned before the next course is placed. Before
placing the surface course, sweep all excess and/or loose sand used for blotter
from the surface.

3.3 ASPHALT TACK COAT.

A. The asphalt tack coat is the application of a diluted, slow-breaking, SS-1 or SS-1h
asphalt emulsion to insure bond between the surface being paved and the
overlying course. Immediately before applying the tack coat, clean the surface to
be tacked of all dirt and loose materials using blowers or power brooms,
supplemented by hand brooming if necessary.

B. Apply tack coat when the surface is dry or slightly damp, and when the air
temperature in the shade is at least 50 F (10 C).

C. Dilute the asphalt emulsion, SS-1 or S-1h, with water at one part emulsion to one
part water. Apply the diluted emulsion using a pressure distributor at the rate of
0.1 gallon per square yard (4.5 liters per square meter).

D. Before application, spread building paper over the surface, from the joint back,
for the required distance for the spray bar to begin spraying and operating at full
force when the surface to be treated is reached. Once the asphalt is applied,
remove and dispose of the building paper. Shut off the spray bar shall
instantaneously at each construction joint to assure a straight line and full
application of asphalt prime up to the joint. If required to prevent dripping, insert

Section 02502
Page 6 of 7
a drip pan under the nozzle where the application is stopped. Use a hand sprayer
to apply primer material for touching up all spots missed by the distributor.

E. After the tack coat has been applied, assure it is undisturbed until the asphalt
emulsion has broken, generally within 30 minutes of application. Place the next
paving course after the emulsion has broken.

F. Schedule operations so that all tack coats are placed with the asphalt-paving
course in the same day.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

4. 1 ASPHALT PRIME COAT

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square yard (meter) or ton (metric ton)
asphalt prime coat material, complete in place, at the contract unit price bid for
MC-70 Asphalt Prime Coat.

B. Price and payment is full compensation for all demurrage, storage, handling, and
other charges; all material (including the asphalt prime coat material), tools,
equipment, labor and performance of all work necessary to the furnishing, testing,
delivery, unloading, heating, hauling and spreading of the asphalt prime coat,
cleaning the surface to be primed, blotting excess prime material, maintaining the
primed surface, and all incidentals necessary to complete the item.

C. Payment is made only for the asphalt prime coat material required and actually
used in the work. The Owner accepts no responsibility for any material shipped
onto the project in excess of requirements because of tank-truck or tank-car
capacities or for other reasons.

D. Payment is made under:

1. MC-70 Asphalt Prime Coat:

a. Per square yard (square meter)
b. Per ton (metric ton)

4. 2 ASPHALT TACK COAT.

A. This is measured and paid for by the gallon (liter) of undiluted, asphalt tack coat
material, complete in-place, at the contract unit price bid for SS-1 or SS-1h
Asphalt Tack Coat.

other charges; all material (including the asphalt tack coat material and water for

Section 02502
Page 7 of 7
diluting), tools, equipment, labor and performance of all work necessary to the
furnishing, testing, delivery, unloading, heating, diluting, hauling and spreading
of the asphalt tack coat, cleaning the surface to be tacked, maintaining the tacked
surface, and all incidentals necessary to complete the item.

C. Payment is made only for the asphalt tack coat material required and actually used
in the work. The Owner accepts no responsibility for any material shipped onto
the project in excess of requirements because of tank-truck or tank-car capacities
or for other reasons.


1. SS-1 or SS-1h Asphalt Tack Coat

a. per gallon (liter)
b. per square yard (square meter)

4. 3 TONNAGE BASIS: BLOTTER SAND.

A. This item is measured and paid for by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) for the
item in the Contract documents at the contract unit price bid for Blotter - sand.

B. Price and payment is full compensation for the furnishing, delivering, and placing
of the material; for brooming, for cleaning the existing surface, for removal of the
excess aggregate and cleaning gutters, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete this item.

C. Payment is made under:

1. Blotter Sand

a. per ton (metric ton)

END OF SECTION

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 02504

ASPHALT SEAL COAT

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is applying a single application of asphalt material on a prepared
asphalt surface, followed by spreading seal coat aggregate meeting these
specifications.

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO T11 Amount of Material Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in
Aggregate

AASHTO T27 Sieve Analysis of Coarse and Fine Aggregates

AASHTO T89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils

AASHTO T96 Resistance to Degradation of Aggregate By Abrasion and Impact
ASTM C131 in the Los Angeles Machine

MT 309 Determining the Percentage of Adhesion of Bituminous Materials
to Aggregate

MT 228 Method of Test for Evaluating Cleanness of Cover Coat Material

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT

A. Furnish asphalt material meeting the specifications in Section 02502; ASPHALT
PRIME AND/OR TACK COAT and the contract requirements.

2.2 AGGREGATE

A. Furnish seal coat aggregate meeting the applicable requirements of Section
02510; ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT and meeting the applicable table in
this section.

B. Furnish material consisting of crushed stone or crushed aggregate that is clean,
durable fragments free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 2 of 8
pieces, clay balls or other deleterious material. Assure the material produced is
free from adherent films of clay or rock dust and is washed thoroughly. No
combination of shale, clay, coal, or soft particles can exceed 1.5%. Assure the
aggregate has a minimum cleanness value of 75 when tested under Montana Test
Method MT228.

C. The material cannot exceed a wear of 40 percent at 500 revolutions when tested
under AASHTO Method T96 Grading C. A minimum of 70% by weight of the
coarse aggregate (retained on No.4 Sieve) must have at least one fractured face.

D. The aggregate, or a composite mixture, must show no detrimental stripping when
tested under Montana Test Methods MT-309. If stripping exceeds 5 percent, the
aggregate will be rejected or an alternate grade of asphalt substituted to reduce
stripping below 5 percent.

E. For all gradings, that portion of the aggregate passing a No. 40 sieve must be non-
plastic as determined by AASHTO T89 and T90.

F. When tested by AASHTO Methods T11 and T27 in conjunction with water wash,
chips must meet the grading requirements of the following tables:

TABLE 1

1/2" SEAL COAT AGGREGATE - TABLE OF GRADATION

Percentage of Weight
Sieve Designation Passing Sieves

5/8-inch Sieve 100
3/8-inch Sieve 35 - 55
No. 4 Sieve 0 - 15
No. 8 Sieve 0 - 5
No.200 Sieve 0 2

TABLE II



1/2-inch Sieve 100
3/8-inch Sieve 85 - 100
No. 4 Sieve 10 - 30
No. 10 Sieve 0 - 10
No. 40 Sieve 0 - 2

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 3 of 8

TABLE III



3/8-inch Sieve 100
1/4-inch Sieve 85 - 100
No. 8 Sieve 0 - 25
No. 16 Sieve 0 - 10
No. 40 Sieve 0 - 2

TABLE IV

SAND SEAL COAT AGGREGATE - TABLE OF GRADATION


1/4-inch Sieve 100
No. 8 Sieve 10 - 40
No. 16 Sieve 0 - 10

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Distributor

1. Furnish distributors meeting the requirements of Section 02502;
ASPHALT PRIME AND/OR TACK COAT.

B. Brooms

1. Provide power brooms, or a power blower or both.

3.2 AGGREGATE SPREADER

A. Furnish an independent, self-propelled aggregate spreading equipment (Flaherty
Spreadmaster or equal) that can be adjusted to spread the specified quantity of
cover aggregate per square yard (square meter).

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 4 of 8
3.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. Seasonal Limitations

1. Seal coating operations cannot be performed after September 1 for areas
higher than 3,500 feet (1,070 meters) above sea level. For areas below
3,500 feet (1,070 meters) above sea level, seal coating operations are not
permitted after September 15.

B. Weather Limitations

1. Do not apply asphalt material when the street face is damp or wet, or when
the atmospheric temperature in the shade is less than 65 F.(18 C). Do not
start work without the Engineers approval and terminate work at once in
event of rain. Terminate seal coating work just before dark, and stop work
during wind that blows sand, dust or other foreign matter into the spread
asphalt material before the aggregate is applied.

C. Preparation of Surfaces

1. General

a. Do not start coat operations until, the Engineer determines the
asphalt surface course to be seal coated is thoroughly compacted
and rolling and all holes and breaks in the surface and edges are
repaired. In no event, unless ordered in writing by the Engineer, is
the seal coat to be placed on newly constructed or reconditioned
surfaces within 7 days of the surface having been placed.

2. Cleaning

a. Immediately before applying the asphalt material, clean the surface
of all dust, dirt, sand or other objectionable material that prevents
complete coverage or bond between the asphalt material and the
street surface, using a rotary power broom or blower, by hand
sweeping, or both, as required. Thoroughly clean the outer edges
adjacent to vertical curbs. Do not mix material removed from the
surface with the cover aggregate.

D. Application of Asphalt Material

1. Application rates will range between 0.20 to 0.35 gallons per square yard
(0.9 liters to 1.59 liters per sq. meter) for 3/8" and 1/4" (9.5 mm and 6.35
mm) seal coat aggregate or 0.15 to 0.25 gallons per square yard (0.68 liters
to 1.13 liters per sq. meter) for sand seal aggregate, depending upon

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 5 of 8
aggregate gradation and asphalt material specified. Apply the asphalt
material uniformly at the rate specified.

2. The Engineer may require adjustments in the application during the work.
When heating is required, take precautions to avoid fire hazard.
Thoroughly clean the distributor before use unless its last use was with the
same type of asphaltic material specified for the work.

3. Before application, spread building paper over the surface, from the joint
back, for the distance required for the spray bar to begin spraying and
operating at full force when it reaches the surface to be treated. After the
asphalt is applied, remove and dispose of the building paper.

4. Shut off the spray bar instantly at each construction joint to assure a
straight line and the full application of asphaltic binder up to the joint. If
required to prevent dripping, insert a drip pan under the nozzles when the
application is stopped.

5. Use a hand sprayer to apply asphaltic binder to touch up all spots missed
by the distributor.

6. Before and during seal coating operations, calibrate or check the
adjustments on the distributor as follows:

a. Tank calibration
b. Nozzle adjustment and pressure
c. Spray bar height
d. Bitumeter calibration
e. Transverse and Longitudinal Spread of Asphalt Material.

1) Transverse spread variation shall not exceed 15 percent
2) longitudinal spread variation shall not exceed 10 percent
plus or minus of the rate specified.)

E. Application of Seal Coat Material

1. This rate will range between 20 to 30 pounds per square yard (10 to 16
kg/sq. meter) for 3/8"(9.5 mm) aggregate, 15 to 25 pounds per square yard
(8 to 13.5 kg per square meter) for 1/4" (0.65mm) aggregate, or 10 to 15
pounds per square yard (5.5 to 8 kg per square meter) for sand seal coat
aggregate, depending on aggregate gradation. During the course of the
work, adjustments will be made in the rate of application when required.

2. Assure the cover coat material is stockpiled enough in advance of the
work so that excess water has drained from the aggregate. Do not spread

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 6 of 8
seal coat aggregate if the moisture content of the aggregate exceeds 2
percent.

3. Uniformly distribute the cover coat at the specified rate using a
mechanical or a self-propelled spreader immediately after the asphaltic
material application. If weather or surface conditions make require, restrict
the application of asphalt material to the area coverable by the cover coat
material available in the trucks. Assure cover aggregate is available at all
times to assure continuous seal coating operations. Do not apply seal coat
aggregate to cold, dried or partially dried asphalt material.

4. Immediately after spreading, roll the aggregate with self-propelled,
pneumatic-tired rollers. Roll in a longitudinal direction, beginning at the
outer edges of the treatment and working toward the center. Overlap the
previous strip by about one-half the roller width. Complete the first rolling
of the aggregate within one-half hour of it being spread. Continue rolling
until a smooth, thoroughly compacted surface is obtained. Roll at least
three complete passes with each roller. If the seal coat is finished in partial
widths at a time, leave 4 to 6 inches (100 mm to 150 mm of the inside
edge uncovered with aggregate to permit overlap of asphaltic material
when the remaining portion of the surface is treated.

5. Remove all loose aggregate from the pavement after the work is
completed, and dispose of at the specified location. If a location is not
designated the chips become the Contractors property.

3.4 PROTECTION OF STREET SIDE STRUCTURES AND TRAFFIC CONTROL:

A. Protect all sign posts, street lamp posts, trees, shrubs and tops of curbs and gutters
from splashing asphaltic material. Compensation for furnishing, erecting and
removing such protection is included in the unit price bid for the application of
asphalt material.

B. Keep traffic off of freshly sprayed asphalt.


4. 1 TONNAGE BASIS - SEAL COAT AGGREGATE

A. This item is measured and paid for by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) for the
gradation(s) in the Contract document at the contract unit price bid for Seal Coat
Aggregate_____ Gradation.

of the material; for brooming, compacting and rolling; for cleaning the existing

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 7 of 8
surface; for covering excess asphaltic material; for removal of the excess
aggregate cleaning gutters, and for all labor, equipment, tools, traffic control and


1. Seal Coat Aggregate - 1/2" Gradation - per ton. (metric ton)
2. Seal Coat Aggregate - 3/8" Gradation - per ton.(metric ton)
3. Seal Coat Aggregate - 1/4" Gradation - per ton.(metric ton)
4. Seal Coat Aggregate - Sand Gradation - per ton.(metric ton)

4. 2 TONNAGE BASIS - EMULSIFIED ASPHALT

A. This item is measured and paid for by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) at the
contract unit price bid for CRS-2 Emulsified Asphalt.

other charges, materials (including the asphalt), tools, equipment, labor and
performance of all work necessary or incidental to the furnishing, delivering,
unloading, heating, hauling and spreading of the asphalt material specified.

C. Payment is made only for the asphalt required and actually used in the work. The
Owner accepts no responsibility for any oil shipped onto the project exceeding
that required due to tank-truck or tank-car capacities or for other reasons.


1. CRS-2 Emulsified Asphalt - per ton.(metric ton)
2. CRS-2lm Emulsified Asphalt - per ton.(metric ton)

4. 3 SQUARE YARD BASIS - ASPHALT SEAL AND CHIP COAT

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square yards (square meters) of asphalt
pavement surface area at the contract unit price bid for CRS-2 Asphalt Seal and
Chip Coat,_____ Gradation.

of the aggregate material; for brooming, compacting and rolling; for cleaning the
existing surface; for covering excess asphaltic material; and for removal of the
excess aggregate and cleaning gutters.

C. The price and payment is full compensation for all demurrage, storage, handling,
and other charges, materials (including the asphalt), tools, equipment, labor and
performance of all work necessary or incidental to the furnishing, delivering,
unloading, heating, hauling and spreading of the asphalt material specified, and

Section 02504 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT SEAL COAT
Page 8 of 8
for all labor, equipment, tools, traffic control and incidentals necessary to
complete this item.

1. CRS-2 Asphalt Seal and Chip coat, 1/2" Gradation - per square
yard.(square meter)
yard.(square meter)
yard.(square meter)
4. CRS-2 Asphalt Seal and Chip coat, Sand Gradation - per square
yard.(square meter)

END OF SECTION

Section 02505 6
th
Edition
CONSTRUCTION SEAL
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 02505

CONSTRUCTION SEAL

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the application of a dilute mixture of an asphalt rejuvenating, agent
and water.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM D244 -Test Methods for Emulsified Asphalts
ASTM D2006 - Maltenes Distribution Ration Test

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT REJUVENATING AGENT

A. Furnish an asphalt rejuvenating, agent composed of a petroleum, resin-oil base
uniformly emulsified with water and meeting, the following, physical and
chemical requirements:

Specification
Designation Test Method Requirements
Viscosity, S.F.,
at 77
0
F, sec. ASTM D244 15 - 40

Residue, % Min. (1) ASTM D244 (Mod) 60 - 65

Miscibility Test (2) ASTM D244 (Mod) No coagulation

Sieve Test, % Max. (3) ASTM D244 (Mod) 0.10

Particle Charge Test ASTM D244 Positive

Tests on Residue from
ASTM D244-60 (Mod):
Viscosity, cs., 140 F ASTM D445 100-200
Asphaltenes, % Max. ASTM D2006 0.75
Maltenes Dist. Ratio ASTM D2006 0.3 - 0.5
PC+ Al (4)
S + A2

Section 02505 6
th
Edition
CONSTRUCTION SEAL
Page 2 of 3
B. ASTM D244 Modified Evaporation Test for percent of residue is made by heating,
50-gram sample to 300
0
F until foaming ceases, then cooling, immediately and
calculating, the results.

C. Test procedure identical with ASTM D244 except that 0.02 normal calcium
chloride solution shall be used in place of distilled water.

D. Test procedure identical with ASTM D244 except that distilled water shall be
used in place of 2% sodium oleate solution.

E. In the Maltenes Distribution Ratio Test by ASTM Method D2006:

1. PC = Polar Compounds A I = First Acidaffins
2. A2 = Second Acidaffins S =Saturates

F. The materials must have a record of satisfactory service as an asphalt rejuvenating,
agent. Satisfactory service is based on the capability of the material to increase
the ductility and penetration of the asphalt binder in the pavement surface.

2.2 WATER

A. Use water in the seal mixture that 'is potable and free from harmful, soluble salts.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Dilute the asphalt rejuvenating agent following, the manufacturers
recommendations, typically at a ratio of 2:1 and apply at a rate of approximately
0.1 gallon per square yard. Follow the manufacturers recommendations in
applying the Construction Seal.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

4. 1 CONSTRUCTION SEAL

A. The unit of measurement is the gallon. The gallonage paid is the number of
gallons of diluted asphalt rejuvenating agent (construction seal) used as ordered
for the accepted work. Gallons used are determined by measuring the material at
60 F.

B. Payment is made at the contract unit price bid for "Construction Seal (Asphalt
Rejuvenating, Agent)". Price and payment is full compensation for all demurrage,
storage, handling, and other charges, materials (including the asphalt rejuvenating,

Section 02505 6
th
Edition
CONSTRUCTION SEAL
Page 3 of 3
agent and water for dilution), tools, equipment, labor, and the performance of all
work necessary or incidental to the furnishing, delivering, unloading, heating,
hauling and spreading of the Construction Seal.


1. Construction Seal (Asphalt Rejuvenating Agent) - per gallon

END OF SECTION

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
1 of 25

SECTION 02510


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. This Work is the production and placement of plant mix asphalt concrete
pavement.

B. Hot plant mix asphalt concrete is a mineral aggregate and asphalt material mixed
at a central hot plant meeting these specifications and placed in one or more
courses on a newly prepared or existing street roadway in accordance with the
contract documents.

1.2 REFERENCES:

AASHTO T11
(ASTM D1140)
Amount of Material Finer than No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve in
Aggregate
ASTM D5361

AASHTO T27
(ASTM C136)
Standard Practice for Sampling Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures for Laboratory Testing
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO T89
(ASTM D4318)
Determining Liquid Limit of Soils
AASHTO T90
(ASTM D4318)
Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils
AASHTO T283
(ASTM D4867)
Resistance of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures to Moisture-Induced
Damage
AASHTO T176
(ASTM D2419)
Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T245
(ASTM D6926, D6927)
Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using
Marshall Apparatus
AASHTO T96
(ASTM C131)
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by
Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM D2041 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of
Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM C1097 Hydrated Lime for Use in Asphaltic Concrete Mixtures
ASTM D3666 Evaluating and Qualifying Agencies Testing and Inspecting
Aggregate
ASTM C123 Lightweight Particles in Aggregate
ASTM D6307 Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method
STM C142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
MS-2 Asphalt Institute Mix Design Methods

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
2 of 25

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. The Asphalt Concrete Surface Course must have at least a 3-bin separation, when
continuous flow mixing types of plants are used. When a drum dryer is used with
a weight batching system from dry bins, separate and stockpile the crushed
aggregate into two sizes.

B. The specific type and grading of aggregate shall be as indicated on the plans or in
the contract documents. The types and grades are described in this specification.

C. The furnishing of asphalt materials for use in asphaltic concrete mixes shall meet
the requirements for the particular grade specified in the contract documents. The
types and grades are described in this specification.

D. Prepare pavement course to conform to the lines, grades, thickness and typical
cross sections shown in project documents and plans, and shall be rolled, finished,
and approved by the Engineer before the placement of the next course.

2.2 PLANT MIX AGGREGATES

A. Furnish aggregates from acceptable sources approved by the Engineer.

B. Furnish test data as outlined in this section on each source to be used for
acceptance by the Engineer.

C. Designation of the source of supply and the acceptability of the material there
from, does not extend to the grading of the material as it may naturally come from
the pit or crusher. Adjust the crusher and screens to remove certain portions of the
material as may be necessary to furnish gravel that will comply with the
specifications in the contract. No additional compensation will be allowed for
such adjustment of the equipment or the rejection of waste. It is understood that
the Engineer may order procurement of material from any portion of any area
designated as a pit site and may reject portions of the deposit as unacceptable.

D. Aggregate materials shall not contain more than 1.5% by weight of clay lumps,
shale, or coal, nor shall light weight particles exceed 3.5% by weight. No
combination of clay, shale, coal, or lightweight particles shall exceed 3.5% by
weight. Do not use Scoria (fired clay). Aggregate materials shall conform to the
grading stipulated in the contract documents. Use reasonable care in the selection
of material in a pit so that uniform product will be produced at all times. No
compensation will be allowed for such stripping of the pit as may be required in
order that satisfactory material may be secured.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
3 of 25

E. Aggregate used shall consist of gravel, crushed to the specified size, crushed
stone, composed of hard durable pebbles or stone fragments, reclaimed asphalt
pavement, and finely crushed stone filler, sand or natural clean material, or other
fine mineral material. The portion of the material retained on the No. 4 sieve (4.74
mm) will be called coarse aggregate and that passing the No. 4 sieve (4.74 mm)
and retained on the #200 sieve (0.075 mm) will be call fine aggregate. The
material Passing the #200 (0.075 mm) will be called mineral filler. The reclaimed
asphalt pavement shall be removed from its original location and reduced by
suitable means to such particle size as may be required for use in hot plant mix
asphalt concrete.

F. For all gradings of fine aggregate, including any blended fine aggregate and
mineral filler, passing a No 40 sieve (0.425 mm), shall have a liquid limit not
exceeding 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6.

G. Produce coarse aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve (4.75 mm) having a
minimum of 50% by weight of particles with at least one mechanically fractured
face. The coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40% wear at 500 revolutions.

H. Preliminary acceptance of aggregates proposed for use may be made at the point
of production. Final acceptance will be made only after tests of the aggregates are
complete and in place.

I. Surface Course Asphalt Plant Mix Aggregate:

TABLE 1

REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADING OF SURFACE COURSE AGGREGATE

Percentage by Weight Passing
Job Mix Target Bands

Sieve Size

Type A

Type B

Type C
Job Mix
Tolerances
1 (25.0 mm) 100 --- --- ---
(19.0 mm) 91-93 100 --- +/- 7
(12.5 mm) 76-89 83-93 100 +/- 7
3/8 (9.5 mm) 61-79 73-87 91-93 +/- 7
No 4 (4.75 mm) 41-54 47-63 51-71 +/- 6
No 10 (2.00 mm) 31-39 32-43 34-46 +/- 6
No 40 (0.425 mm) 16-27 15-25 16-26 +/- 5
No 200 (0.075 mm) 4-7 5-7 5-9 +/- 2

1. The above gradation bands represent the job mix target limits, which
determine the suitability of aggregate for use. The final job mix target

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
4 of 25

gradation must be within the specified bands and uniformly graded from
coarse to fine and not vary from the low limits on one screen tot the high
limits on the adjacent screen, or vice versa. The final job mix gradation
limits are established by applying the job mix tolerances to the job mix
targets.

2. The job mix formula establishes target values. During production of the
mix, the gradations shall lie within the job mix gradation limits specified
in Table 1. For example, Type A, No. 200 band is 4-7. QA job mix
target of 5 has been selected for the final mix. The job mix gradation
limits is 5, plus and minus 2. Therefore, the job mix gradation limits for
production is 3-7.

2.3 ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL

A. Furnish Asphalt binder material to be used as specified in the contract documents
that meet the type and grade specified requirements in this section in Table 3.

1. Grades:

a. (PGAB) PG 58-22
b. (PGAB) PG 58-28
c. (PGAB) PG 64-22
d. (PGAB) PG 64-28 (Polymer Modified)

B. The percentage of asphalt by weight, to be added to the aggregate will be,
generally, between 4 and 8 percent of the weight of the total mix. The mix design
will establish the exact percentage of asphalt in the mix, based upon preliminary
laboratory tests, sieve analysis and grading and character of the aggregate
furnished within the specification limits. No claim is allowed for the payment for
rejecting any batch or load of mixture containing an excess or deficient amount of
asphalt binder varying more than 0.4 of a percent from the fixed mix design
percentage.

C. Obtain Engineer approval of the asphalt material source before shipments are
made to any project. The source of supply cannot change after work is started
unless approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer is not liable for the
quantity shipped.

D. Samples of asphalt binder material may be taken, as directed by the Engineer, and
placed in uncontaminated one-quart containers. When sampled, these shall be
taken from the tanker car or truck at the point of delivery on the project and
submitted to the Engineer.

E. All transport vehicles must be equipped with a spigot or gate valve installed in
either: (1) the unloading line, (2) in the tanker at the centerline on the tank, (3) in

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
5 of 25

the pressure line from the unloading pump, or other locations approved by the
Engineer. Assure the spigot or gate valve has a diameter of between 3/8 inch (1
cm) and 3/4 inch (2.5 cm). The spigot valve must be located to prevent
contamination from plant dust or other contaminants.

F. The supplier furnishing the asphalt binder material shall inspect each tanker car or
truck before it is loaded and ship only in clean, uncontaminated, fully insulated
cars or trucks, sealed after loading by the supplier.

G. The material supplier shall issue, in duplicate, a certificate showing full
compliance with the specifications for the designated grade of material, together
with the following information. Project number, date of shipment, source of the
material, car or truck initial and number, destination, gross quantity loaded,
loading temperature, and net quantity in gallons at 60 F (15.5 C) or tons,
whichever unit of measurement is stipulated. Assure the certificate of compliance
accompanies the shipment and is furnished to the Engineer. The certificate, signed
by the supplier representative, must also certify that the conveyance vessel was
inspected and found to be free of contaminating material.

H. The certificate of compliance is the basis for tentative acceptance and use of the
material. Samples taken according to applicable sampling methods and retained
by the Engineer may be tested at the Engineers discretion. Failure of the asphalt
material to meet these specifications may result in rejection of the entire,
associated work. If rejected, removed and replace rejected work.

I. Apply asphalt material at temperatures that assure uniform mixing or spreading.
Application temperature ranges for each grade of material should be accompanied
with the mix design. Application temperature for mixing applications will be in
accordance with the mix design.

J. Upon request by the Engineer, furnish the Engineer and/or laboratory (responsible
for completing the mix design) with data or a report showing the temperature-
viscosity relationship of each asphalt binder used on the project. Assure this data
covers the range of temperatures used for mixing and compaction. In addition, the
Engineer may request a complete set of test results from Table 3 for each grade
used on the project.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
6 of 25

TABLE 3

PERFORMANCE GRADED ASPHALT BINDER (PGAB)

PG 58 PG 64 Performance Grade
-22 -28 -22 -28
Test
Methods
Average 7-day Maximum Pavement
Design Temperature, C

<58

<64

Minimum Pavement Design
Temperature, C
>-22 >-28 >-22 >-28
Original Binder
Flash Point Temp.: Minimum C 230 AASHTO
T48
Viscosity: Maximum, 3 Pa s (3000
CP), Test Temp, C
135 ASTM
D4402
Dynamic Shear: G* / sin delta,
Minimum, 1.00 kPa Test Temp @ 10
rad / s, C
58 64 AASHTO
TP5
Rolling Thin Film Oven (AASHTO T240) or Thin Film Oven (T179) Residue
Mass Loss, Maximum, % 1.0 AASHTO
T240
Minimum, 2.20 kPa Test Temp @ 10
rad / s, C
58 64 AASHTO
TP5
Pressure Aging Vessel Residue (AASHTO PP1)
PAV Aging Temp, C 100 100 AASHTO
PP1
Maximum, 5000 kPa Test Temp @ 10
rad / s, C
22 19 25 22 AASHTO
TP5
Creep Stiffness : S, Minimum, 300
MPa m-value, Minimum, 0.300 Test
Temp, @ 60 sec, C
-12 -18 -12 -18 AASHTO
TP1
Direct Tension : Failure Strain,
Minimum, 1.0%, Test Temp @ 1.0
mm/min. C
-12 -18 -12 -18 AASHTO
TP3

a. If creep stiffness is below 300 MPa, the direct tension test is not required. If the creep
stiffness is between 300 and 600 MPa the direct tension failure strain requirement can be
used in lieu of the creep stiffness requirement. The m-value requirement must be satisfied
in both cases.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
7 of 25

2.4 HYDRATED LIME FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE.

A. Mineral filler may be incorporated in the asphalt concrete mixture. Furnish
hydrated lime as filler when specified. Assure it is free of lumps and extraneous
material and meets the following gradation requirements as per ASTM D242:

Sieve Percent Passing
No. 30 (0.60 mm) Sieve 100
No. 80 (0.180 mm) Sieve 95-100
No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve 70-100

B. Assure the hydrated lime meets paragraph 2 (chemical composition) and
paragraph 7 (a) requirements (chemical analysis) of ASTM C1097.

C. Where required, the mineral filler will be effectively mixed with the hot plant mix
asphaltic concrete.

2.5 COMPOSITION OF MIXES:

A. General

1. Submit to the Engineer for approval a mix design for each mix required on
the project. Assure the job-mix formula is within the gradation limits in
Part 2 Products in this Section.

2. Have the job-mix formula prepared by an independent testing laboratory
approved by the Engineer. The requirements of ASTM D-3666 are the
guidelines for testing laboratory approval. The cost of the job-mix
formula(s) is at Contractor expense.

3. Keep the job mix formula current and contain the following minimum
information:

a. Gradation of all constituent aggregates.
b. Specific gravity of constituent aggregates and asphalt cement.
c. Source of supply of all materials and grade of Asphalt Cement.
d. Marshall design curves for stability, unit weight, flow and
volumetric requirements (VMA and total voids) at asphalt contents
below and above optimum (four points minimum).
e. Measured voidless (Rices) specific gravity used in voids
computations.
f. Composite aggregate grading.
g. Recommended asphalt cement content.
h. Marshall compactive effort (50 blows).
i. Date of mix design (job mix formula).
j. Index of retained strength.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
8 of 25

4. In addition to the job mix formula, all asphalt concrete surfacing mix
submittals will have laboratory tests indicating that the Tensile Strength
Ratio (TSR) as determined by AASHTO T-283,, is at least 70%. Test shall
be performed at 7.0 +/- 1% air voids and shall include the freeze cycle.

B. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course

1. The maximum permissible variation from the job-mix formula within the
specification limits is as follows:

a. Aggregate Gradation . . . . . Within Job Mix Tolerances
b. Asphalt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 percent*
c. Temperature of Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 F.

* This tolerance will be permitted only if the job mix parameter
curves indicate that the corresponding Marshall design limits are
not exceeded.

2. Produce Hot Plant Mix Asphalt Concrete Surface courses having the
following characteristics as measured by AASHTO T245, ASTM D6726
& D6927 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures by Means
of the Marshall Apparatus:

a. Number of compaction blows, each end of specimen . . . . . . 50.
b. Stability, minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200.
c. Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 18.
d. Air voids, percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5.
e. Percent voids in mineral aggregate (minimum). . . . See Table 4.

TABLE 4

REQUIRED VOIDS IN MINERAL AGGREGATE (VMA)
Nominal particle size (table 2) Voids in Mineral Aggregate, Min.
3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
- inch (12.5 mm)
- inch (19.0 mm)
1 inch (25.0 mm)
1 - inch (37.5 mm)
14
13
12
11
10
Nominal maximum particle size is one size larger than the first sieve to retain more
than 10 percent.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
9 of 25

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 CRUSHING:

A. Crushing Equipment

1. Fit crushing plant-screening equipment, when required, with blowers or
other devices capable of removing excess and undesirable fines.

B. Screening Plants

1. Screening plants consist of a revolving trommel screen, shaker screen,
vibrating screen, or other devices capable of removing oversize material,
excess and undesirable fines.

C. Scales

1. Furnish scales, when required, satisfactory to the Engineer. Test and
certify scales prior to their use on the project and as often thereafter as the
Engineer may consider necessary to insure their accuracy. Have on hand
not less than ten, 50-pound weights for testing scales.

2. House the recording devices of the scales in a suitable manner. Place the
scales in a location suitable to facilitate accurate weighing of loads. The
scales shall be accurate to one-half of one percent at any weight. Alternate
methods or devices for weighing may be acceptable, provided that these
methods or devices produce the same degree of accuracy as required of
platform scales.

3.2 MATERIAL HANDLING:

A. All work involved in clearing and stripping pits and quarries, including handling
unsuitable material encountered, are performed with no additional compensation
being allowed for this work. The pits as utilized shall immediately be opened so
as to expose the vertical faces of the various strata of acceptable material and,
unless otherwise directed, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts
extending through all the exposed strata.

B. Provide, unless otherwise specified, material containing as large a proportion as
possible of crushed aggregate. Combine the crushed material with the screened
material to obtain a uniform product.

C. No material will be accepted which is loaded into hauling units in a segregated
condition or which does not meet the required grading. In case the material
deposit contains sand or other material in excess of the specification gradation
requirements, or of an unacceptable quality, such excess or undesirable material

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
10 of 25

shall be removed and disposed of prior to crushing, or during screening
operations, if crushing is not required.

D. Provide a storage bin of ample capacity to insure uniform quality and delivery of
material. Loading of trucks directly from the conveyor belt, from the crusher or
screening plant will not be permitted.

3.3 STOCKPILES:

A. Grub and clean sites for aggregate stockpiles prior to storing aggregates. Assure
the site is firm, smooth and well drained. Maintain a bed of aggregate suitable to
avoid the inclusion of soil or foreign material.

B. Build up coarse aggregate stockpiles in tiers of not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) in
thickness. Assure each tier is completely in place before the next tier is placed. Do
not allow material to cone down over the next lower tier.

C. Dumping, casting or pushing over the sides of stockpiles will be prohibited,
except in the case of fine aggregate stockpiles.

D. Space stockpiles of different gradations of aggregate far enough apart, or
separated by suitable walls or partitions, to prevent the mixing of the aggregates.

E. Any method of stockpiling aggregate, which allows the stockpile to become
contaminated with foreign matter or causes excessive degradation of the
aggregate, will not be permitted. Excessive degradation will be determined by
sieve tests of samples taken from any portion of the stockpile over which
equipment has operated and failure of such samples to meet all grading
requirements for the aggregate discontinuance of such stockpiling procedures.

F. Transfer the aggregate from the stockpiles in such a manner that uniform grading
of the material is preserved.

3.4 CONVEYOR STOCKPILING:

A. Materials stockpiled by conveyors shall be deposited in a succession of merging-
cone piles. Do not drop material over 12 feet (3.66 m) nor allow cones to exceed
12 feet (3.66 m) in height. Cones should be leveled to a thickness of
approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) prior to starting another tier.

3.5 TRUCK STOCKPILING:

A. Materials stockpiled by trucks shall construct the stockpile in tiers approximately
4 feet (1.2 m) in thickness. Complete each tier before the next tier is started.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
11 of 25

3.6 ASPHALT MIXING PLANTS:

A. Use mixing plants of either the weight batching type, the continuous flow mixing
type, or drum dryer type. Use drum dryer mixers specifically designed and
constructed for producing hot mix.

B. Equip all plants with approved conveyors, power units, aggregate handling
equipment, aggregate screens and bins that are coordinated and operated to
produce a uniform mixture within the specified job mix tolerances.

C. Use batch-type plants having a minimum batch production capacity of 2,000
pounds (900 kg). Use continuous flow or drum dryer plants having a minimum
production capacity of 60 tons per hour (27 kg per hour). These capacity
requirements may be modified if specified in the Contract Documents.

D. Stop production and remove from the project mixing plants that fail to
continuously produce a mixture meeting requirements as specified.

3.7 INSPECTION AND CONTROL OF ASPHALT MIXING PLANT:

A. For verification of weights and measures, character of materials and
determination of temperatures used in the preparation of the paving mixes, the
Engineer or his authorized representative will, at all times, have access to all
portions of the mixing plant, aggregate plant, storage yards and other facilities for
producing and processing the materials for the work. All sampling and testing of
processed and unprocessed material is performed in accordance with the
provisions of the Contract Documents.

3.8 MIX DESIGN:

A. The Owners acceptance testing agency will make gradation analyses of the
completed mix to assure that the materials being produced and used are within the
tolerances of the mix design and the specifications of the mix being used.

3.9 SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR ACCEPTANCE:

A. Sampling and testing of aggregates or other constituent materials will be
performed by the Owners testing agency at a frequency determined by the owner
or the owners representative. Marshall field control is performed under
AASHTO T245, ASTM D6926 & D6927. Field density testing is by core testing
for acceptance purposes. Densities to conform to Section 2510,3.28. Gradations to
be within the job mix gradation limits. Oil content to be within 0.4 percent of the
Marshall Mix Design.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
12 of 25

B. Samples will be used to verify compliance with the requirements set forth in this
Section. If there is a dispute, a third party testing firm may be retained by the
contractor for additional retesting.

3.10 WEATHER LIMITATIONS:

A. When the moisture in the stockpiled aggregate or the dryer adversely effects the
quality of mix production, normal plant operations, or when pools of water are
observed on the base, mixing and placing of hot-mix asphalt is prohibited.

B. Do not place asphalt hot-mix surface course mixture when the air temperature is
less than 40 F (4 C) and rising. Do not place asphalt hot-mix base course
mixtures of compacted lifts 4 inches (10 cm) or more when the air temperature is
less than 30 F (-1 C) and rising. Do not place asphalt upon a surface which is
frozen or that has a temperature of less than 32 F (0 C). Do not place paving
during rainfall or in standing water.

3.11 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. Assure the area to be paved is true to line and grade and has a dry and properly
prepared surface before starting paving operations. Assure the surface is free from
all loose screenings and other loose or foreign material.

3.12 NEW WORK:

A. For new work, meet the surface preparation requirements in Sections 02230,
02234 or 02235 of these specifications. Prime prepared soil or aggregate bases if
indicated as a bid item in the Contract Documents.

B. Before paving, proof-roll the base with equipment having at least one 18 kip
single axle load or equivalent. Excavate and replace areas that yield or crack
under these wheel loads as directed. This does not replace or relax the base or
subgrade compaction requirements.

C. Paint the surfaces of curbs and gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all
structures in contact with asphalt mixes with a thin coating of asphaltic material to
provide a water-tight joint.

3.13 OVERLAYS OVER EXISTING PAVEMENTS AND OLD BASE:

A. Where a base is rough or uneven, place a leveling course using a paver or motor
grader and compact before the placing of subsequent courses.

B. When specified, place construction fabric to control reflective cracking, as
detailed, meeting Section 02110.3.4 Pavement Overlay Applications.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
13 of 25

C. When a leveling course is not specified, patch or correct all depressions and other
irregularities, subject to the Engineers approval, before starting other paving
operations. Remove all rich and unsuitable patches, excess crack or joint filler,
and all surplus bitumen from the area to be paved. Do not blot excessive deposits
of asphalt with sand or stone.

D. Apply a tack coat when the surface to be paved is an existing portland cement
concrete, brick or asphalt pavement. When a tack coat is required, use the asphalt
material indicated, at the rate specified in Section 02502.

E. Coat the surfaces of curbs and gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements and all
structures in actual contact with asphalt mixes with a thin, complete coating of
asphalt material to provide a water-tight joint.

3.14 PATCHING:

A. Weather Limitations

1. Follow procedures set out in section 3.10.

B. Surface Preparations

1. Assure the area to be paved is true to line and grade, is dry and properly
prepared surface before starting paving operations. Clean the surface of all
loose screenings and other loose or foreign material.
2. Before paving, proof roll the base. Areas that yield excessively or crack
under such wheel loads will be excavated and replaced, to correct yielding
and cracking problems. This does not replace the base or subgrade
compaction requirements. Cut the edge of existing pavements against
which additional pavement is to be placed straight and vertical.

3. Minimum standards for patching new or existing pavement include the
following:

a. Neatly cut all asphalt edges using a asphalt saw.

b. Cut asphalt edges to form as regular a patch shape as practical and
should, in general, approximate a rectangle.

c. Cut asphalt edges at least 30 cm (12 inches) wider than the trench
width on each side of trench excavations; and, in general, be cut
parallel to the street centerline for mainline construction and
perpendicular to the street centerline for service lateral
construction.

4. Remove and replace asphalt surface widths of less than 3 feet (90 cm).

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
14 of 25

C. Compaction

1. Compact to a density equal to or greater than 92 percent of Maximum
Theoretical Density (RICE) as determined by ASTM D2041.

3.15 TRANSPORTATION OF MIX:

A. Transport the mix in vehicles cleaned of all foreign material which may affect the
mix. The truck beds must be painted, or sprayed with a lime-water, soap or
detergent solution at least once a day or as often as required. After this operation
elevate the truck bed and thoroughly drain it, with no excess solution being
permitted. Dispatch the vehicles so that all material delivered is placed in
daylight, unless the Engineer approves artificial light. Deliver material to the
paver at a uniform rate and in an amount well within the capacity of the paving
and compacting equipment.

3.16 SPREADING AND FINISHING:

A. Spread and finish meeting the following requirements

1. The maximum lift thickness is 2 1/2 inches (6.5 cm) for surface courses
and 5 inches (13 cm) for base courses.

3.17 MECHANICAL PAVERS:

A. Spread and strike off the base and surface courses with a mechanical paving
machine. Operate the paving machine so that material does not accumulate and
remain along the sides of the receiving hopper.

B. Do not use equipment, which leaves tracks or indented areas, which cannot be
corrected in normal operation, produces flushing or other permanent blemishes, or
fails to produce a satisfactory surface.

C. Construct longitudinal joints and edges to true line markings. Establish lines for
the paver to follow in placing individual lanes parallel to the centerline of the
proposed roadway. Position and operate the paver to follow closely the
established lines.

D. When using pavers in echelon, assure the first paver follows the marks or lines
with the second paver following the edge of the material placed by the first paver.
To assure a hot joint and obtain proper compaction, assure the pavers work as
close together as possible not exceeding 100 feet (30 m) apart. In backing trucks
against the paver, take care not to jar the paver out of its proper alignment.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
15 of 25

E. As soon as the first load of material has been spread, check the texture of the
unrolled surface to determine its uniformity. Segregation of materials is not
permitted. If segregation occurs, suspend spreading operation until the cause is
determined and corrected.

F. Offset transverse joints in succeeding courses at least 2 feet (0.6 m). Offset
longitudinal joints at least 6 inches (15 cm).

G. Correct all irregularities in alignment left by the paver by trimming directly
behind the machine. Immediately after trimming, thoroughly compact the edges
of the course by tamping. Avoid distorting the pavement during this operation.

H. Assure edges against which additional pavement is to be placed is straight and
approximately vertical. Use a lute or covered rake immediately behind the paver,
when required, to obtain a true line and vertical edge. Correct all irregularities in
the surface of the pavement course directly behind the paver. Remove excess
material forming high spots by a shovel or lute. Fill low areas with hot mix and
smooth it with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface. Fanning of
material over such areas is not permitted.

3.18 MOTOR GRADER:

A. When motor graders are used for the spreading of leveling courses, place the
material on the roadbed so that the proper amount of material is available. Spread
the mix to the required thickness, line and grade, with a uniform surface texture,
while at a workable temperature.

3.19 HAND SPREADING:

A. In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is not practical,
the mix may be spread and finished by hand, if so directed by the Engineer. Wood
or steel forms, approved by the Engineer, rigidly supported to assure correct grade
and cross section, may be used. In such instances, measuring blocks and
intermediate strips must be used to obtain the required cross-section. Perform
hand placing carefully. Uniformly distribute the material to avoid segregation of
the coarse and fine aggregate. Broadcasting of material is not permitted. During
the spreading operation, loosen and uniformly distribute all material using lutes or
covered rakes. Reject material that has formed into lumps and does not break
down readily. Following placing and before rolling, check the surface with
templates and straightedges and correct all irregularities.

B. Maintain on the project heating equipment for keeping hand tools free from
asphalt. Exercise caution to prevent heating that may burn the material. Assure the
temperature of the tools when used is not greater than the temperature of the mix
being placed. Use heat only to clean hand tools; petroleum oils or solvents are not
permitted.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
16 of 25

3.20 COMPACTION:

A. Furnish the number of rollers necessary to provide the specified pavement
density. During rolling, keep the roller wheels moist to avoid picking up the
material.

B. After the longitudinal joints and edges have been compacted, start rolling
longitudinally at the sides and progress toward the center of the pavement. For
transverse graded streets, begin rolling on the low side and progress to the high
side, overlapping passes by at least one-half the width of rollers and uniformly
lapping each preceding pass. Operate the rollers at a slow, uniform speed with the
drive roll or wheel nearest the paver. Do not exceed 3 miles per hours (4.8 km per
hour).

C. Do not quickly change the line of rolling reversing direction suddenly. If rolling
displaces the material, re-work the area using lutes or shovels and restore it the
original grade of the loose material before re-rolling. Do not permit heavy
equipment or rollers to stand on the finished surface before it has been compacted
and has thoroughly cooled.

D. When paving in single width, roll the first lane placed as follows:

1. Transverse joints
2. Outside edge
3. Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on the low side and progressing
toward the high side
4. Second rolling, same procedure as 3
5. Finish rolling

E. When paving in echelon, or abutting a previously placed lane, perform the
longitudinal joint rolling the same as transverse joint rolling.

F. When paving in echelon, leave 2 or 3 inches (5 to 7.5 cm) of the edge unrolled,
which the second paver can match unrolled. Then the joint between the lanes can
be rolled together. Do not leave edges exposed more than 15 minutes without
being rolled.

G. In laying a surface mix adjacent to any finished area, place it high enough so that,
when compacted, the finished surface is true and uniform.

H. On slight grades, check gutters with a straightedge and test with running water to
assure drainage to the planned outlet.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
17 of 25

I. The average density shall be equal to or greater than 93 percent of the maximum
density as determined by ASTM D2041 and no individual sample shall be less
than 92 percent of maximum density.

3.21 TRANSVERSE JOINTS:

A. Construct and compact transverse joints to provide a smooth riding surface. Joints
will be straight edged and string lined to assure smoothness and true alignment.

B. Joint formed with bulkheads to provide a straight line and vertical face will be
checked with a straightedge before fresh material is placed against it to complete
the joint. If bulkheads are not used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to
roll over the edge of the new material, locate the joint line in back of the rounded
edge the distance required to provide a true surface and cross-section. If a joint
has been distorted by traffic or by other causes, trim it to line. Paint the joint face
with a thin coating of asphalt before the fresh material is placed against it.

C. Place the material against the joints vertical face with the paving machine
positioned so that the material overlaps the edge of the joint 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5
cm). Maintain a uniform depth of the overlapped material . Remove and dispose
of the coarse aggregate in the overlapped material that dislodged during raking.

D. Position rollers on the previously compacted material transversely so that no more
than 6 inches (15 cm) of the rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint. Operate
the roller to pinch and press the mix into place at the transverse joint. Continue
rolling along this line, shifting position gradually across the joint, in 6-to 8-inch
(15 to 20 cm) increments, until the joint has been rolled by entire width of the
roller wheel.

E. Keep the number of transverse joints to a minimum. When paving single width
and maintaining traffic, pave one lane no farther than one block. Complete all
lanes to the same station at the end of each paving day. When paving in echelon,
bring the lanes up even as is practical.

3.22 LONGITUDINAL JOINTS:

A. Roll longitudinal joints directly behind the paving operation. Assure the first lane
placed is true to line and grade and has a vertical face. Place the material in the
lane being paved up firmly against the face of the previously placed lane. Position
the paver during spreading to assure the material overlaps the edge of the lane
previously placed by 1 inch to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm). Uniformly maintain the
width and depth of the overlapped material at all times. Keep the paver aligned
with the line or markings placed along the joint for alignment purposes. Before
rolling, remove and dispose of the coarse aggregate in the material overlapping
the joint.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
18 of 25

B. Shift rollers onto the previously placed lane so that not more than 6 inches (15
cm) of the roller wheel rides on the edge of the fine material left by brooming.
Operate the rollers to compact the fines gradually across the joint. Continue
rolling until a compacted, neat joint is obtained. When the abutting lane is not
placed in the same day, paint the joint with a very thin coating of asphalt before
placing the abutting lane. If the joint is distorted during the days work by traffic
or by other causes, carefully trim the edge of the lane to a neat line.

3.23 EDGES:

A. Roll the pavement edges concurrently with or immediately after rolling the
longitudinal joint.

B. Exercise care in consolidating the course along the entire length of the edges. In
rolling pavement edges, extend the roller wheels 2 to 4 inches (5 to 10 cm)
beyond the pavement edge.

3.24 BREAKDOWN ROLLING:

A. Immediately begin breakdown rolling following the rolling of the longitudinal
joint and edges. Operate rollers as close to the paver as required to obtain density
without causing undue displacement. Operate the breakdown roller with the drive
roll or wheel nearest the finishing machine. The Engineer may make exceptions
when working on steep slopes or super-elevated curves.

3.25 SECOND ROLLING:

A. Assure the second rolling follows the breakdown rolling as close as possible while
the paving mix is still at a temperature that will provide the specified density.

3.26 FINISH ROLLING:

A. Perform the finish rolling while the material is still warm enough to remove roller
marks. If necessary, the Engineer may require using pneumatic-tired rollers.
Complete finish rolling the same day the mixture is placed.

B. In places inaccessible to standard rollers, perform compaction using trench rollers
or others to meet the specified compaction requirements. Operate the trench roller
as directed until the course is compacted. Hand, manual or mechanical tamping,
may be used in such areas if it is proved to the Engineer that the operation will
provide the specified density.

3.27 SHOULDERS:

A. Where paved shoulders or curbs are not specified, do not place the shoulder
material against the pavement edges until the surface course rolling is completed.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
19 of 25

Take care to prevent distortion of the pavement edge from specified line and
grade. When shoulders are paved (except in conjunction with the traveled way
paving), cold joint construction procedure is required to assure a tight bond at the
joint.

B. When the rolling of the surface course has been completed and the edges have
been thoroughly compacted, immediately place shoulder material against the
edges and roll it.

3.28 DENSITY AND SURFACE REQUIREMENTS:

A. The average mat density shall be equal to or greater than 93 percent of the
maximum density as determined by ASTM D2041 and no individual sample shall
be less than 92 percent of maximum (Rices) density, prepared as specified in Part
2-Products in this section and made from plant mix meeting the job-mix formula.
Verification of maximum density as determined by ASTM D2041 from plant
produced material during production is recommended.

B. Produce a final surface that is uniform in texture and meets the line and grade
specified. Before final acceptance of the Project or during the progress of the
work, the Engineer will determine the thickness of all courses. Repair or replace
all unsatisfactory work.

C. Assure density and thickness meets the plans and specifications. During
compaction, preliminary tests to aid in controlling the thickness, may be
performed by inserting a flat blade, correctly graduated, through the material to
the top of the previously placed base, or by other approved methods.

D. In checking compacted depth, the cutting of the test holes, refilling with
acceptable materials and proper compaction may be performed by the Owners
testing agency.

E. For testing the surface on all courses, a 10-foot (3 m) straightedge will be used
with the centerline of the straightedge placed parallel to the roadway centerline.

F. Any variations that exceed 5/16-inch (0.8 cm) in 10 feet (3 m) for base course and
1/4-inch (0.64 cm) in 10 feet (3 m) for surface course must be corrected. Correct
irregularities that may develop before the completion of rolling by loosening the
surface mix and removing or adding materials as is required. If any irregularities
or defects remain after the final compaction, remove the surface course and place
and compact new material to a true and even surface. All minor surface
projections, joints and minor honeycombed surfaces must be rolled smooth to
grade, as directed.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
20 of 25

G. Remove and replace areas of new pavement requiring patching as directed.
Patching material will be tested for meeting specifications. The cost of testing is
at Contractor expense.

3.29 PAVEMENT AND MATERIAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Owners testing agency will provide core samples of asphalt surface courses to
check in place density and compacted depth. The cores are 4-inch (10 cm)
diameter. Materials and acceptance tests will be made by the Owners testing
agency to determine the Contractors compliance with the specifications.

B. Materials failing to meet the tests specified may be retested if approved and as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay the costs of any required re-
testing for acceptance purposes. Re-testing will be performed by the Owners
testing agency unless otherwise approved by the owner. . If there is a dispute, a
third party testing firm may be retained by the contractor for additional retesting
for the Engineers review and consideration.

C. The costs of the following tests are at Contractor expense:

1. Initial aggregate quality tests
2. Job-Mix Formula
3. Any tests the Contractor requires to control his crushing, screening or
other construction operations
4. Retesting of failing tests as provided above

D. Correct all pavement composition, field density, or thickness, deficiencies at
Contractor expense.

E. The field density and thickness of the pavement is determined by measuring the
cores tested. The actual thickness must be no less than 1/4-inch (6.5 mm) from the
specified thickness.

F. When the measurement of any core is less than the plan thickness by more than
the allowable deviation, the actual thickness of the pavement in this area may be
determined by taking additional cores at intervals parallel to the centerline in each
direction from the affected location. Continue in each direction until a core is
found which is not deficient by more than the allowable deviation. The Engineer
will evaluate areas found deficient in thickness and determine which areas
warrant removal. Remove and replace the areas with asphaltic concrete of the
thickness shown on the plans. Additional coring is considered as re-testing of
failing areas.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
21 of 25


4. 1 TONNAGE BASIS:

A. Asphalt Concrete Pavement

1. These items are measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) of asphalt
paving mixture, including the weight of the asphalt. The quantities
measured for payment are the amount of asphalt paving materials actually
used in the completed and accepted work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.

2. Asphalt Concrete Pavement is paid for at the unit price bid per ton of
2,000 pounds (900 kg).

3. Price and payment is full compensation for cleaning base or underlying
course; for producing, furnishing, transporting, stockpiling, heating,
drying and screening of aggregate materials; for furnishing, handling,
measuring, mixing, manipulating and placing of materials; for hauling,
placing, shaping, compacting and finishing of the paving mix; for
improving unsatisfactory areas; for furnishing samples; for furnishing,
testing and certifying of scales; for furnishing the weigh house; for all
materials (exclusive of asphalt), manipulation, labor, tools, equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete the work in full compliance with the
plans and specifications.


a. Asphalt Concrete Pavement Base Course - per ton (metric ton)
b. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course Grade _____ - per ton (metric
ton).

B. Asphalt Cement

1. This item is measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg). The tonnage to
be paid for is the number of tons of the asphalt cement materials used as
ordered in the accepted work. Tonnage used in the paving mixture is
computed from the truck weigh tickets by using the percentage of asphalt
in the approved mix (and verified by extracted asphalt cement content by
ASTM D6307). Performance Graded Asphalt Cement, measured as
provided above, will be paid for at the unit prices bid per ton.
2. Price and payment is full compensation for furnishing, handling, storing,
heating, transporting and placing in the mixture; for all samples and for all
labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in
full compliance with the plans and specifications.

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
22 of 25


a. PG 58-22 ASPHALT CEMENT per ton (metric ton).
b. PG 58-28 ASPHALT CEMENT per ton (metric ton).
c. PG 64-22 ASPHALT CEMENT per ton (metric ton).
d. PG 64-28 ASPHALT CEMENT per ton (metric ton).

C. Hydrated Lime

1. This item is measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) for the amount
of hydrated lime actually used in the completed and accepted work.

2. The quantities of Mineral Filler, measured as provided above, are paid
for at the unit price bid per ton. Price and payment is full compensation for
furnishing, storing, handling, and other charges, all tools, equipment, labor
and performance of all work necessary to mix the material with the
Asphalt Concrete and all other incidentals necessary to complete this item.


a. Mineral Filler - per ton (metric ton).

4. 2 SQUARE YARD BASIS:

A. Asphalt Concrete Pavement

1. These items are measured by the square yard of asphalt pavement surface
area. The quantities measured for payment are the square yards (square
meters) of specified thickness of asphalt paving in the completed and
accepted work as measured in the field. _____Thickness of Asphalt
Concrete Pavement Base or Surface Course. Grade _____ is paid for at
the unit price bid per square yard (square meter).

improving unsatisfactory areas; for furnishing samples; for all materials
(exclusive of asphalt and mineral filler), manipulation, labor, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in full
compliance with the plans and specifications.


Section 02510 6
th
Edition
23 of 25

a. _____Thickness of Asphalt Concrete Pavement - Base Course -
per square yard (square meter).

b. _____Thickness of Asphalt Concrete Pavement - Surface Course
Grade_____ - per square yard (square meter).

4. Asphalt Cement

a. No separate measurement and payment is made for this item. The
cost for this item is to be included in the cost for Asphalt Concrete
Pavement Base and/or Surface Course.

5. Hydrated Lime

a. This item is measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) for the
amount of hydrated lime actually used in the completed and
accepted work. The quantity of Hydrated Lime, measured as
provided above, is paid for at the unit price bid per ton.

b. Price and payment is full compensation for furnishing, storing,
handling and other charges, all tools, equipment, labor and
performance of all work necessary to mix the material with the
Asphalt Concrete and all other incidentals necessary to complete
this item.

c. Payment is made under:

1) Hydrated Lime - per ton (metric ton).

4. 3 LINEAR FOOT BASIS:

A. Asphalt Concrete Pavement Base and Surface Courses

1. These items are measured by the linear foot of asphalt pavement trench
restoration. The quantities measured for payment are the linear feet of
specified thickness of asphalt paving in the completed and accepted work
as measured in the field along the trench centerline.


Section 02510 6
th
Edition
24 of 25


per lineal foot (lineal meter).

Grade_____ - per lineal foot (lineal meter).


a. Asphalt Concrete Pavement Base Course - per linear foot (linear
meter).

b. Asphalt Concrete Pavement Surface Course Grade_____ - per
linear foot (linear meter).

B. Asphalt Cement

1. No separate measurement and payment is made for this item. The cost for
this item is to be included in the cost for Asphalt Concrete Pavement Base
and/or Surface Courses.

C. Hydrated Lime

1. This item is measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) for the amount
of hydrated lime actually used in the completed and accepted work.

2. The quantity of Mineral Filler, measured as provided above, is paid for
at the unit price bid per ton. Price and payment is full compensation for
furnishing, storing, handling and other charges, all tools, equipment, labor
and performance of all work necessary to mix the material with the
Asphalt Concrete and all other incidentals necessary to complete this item.


a. Mineral Filler - per ton (metric ton).

4. 4 PATCHING:

A. Patching is paid for at the contract unit price bid. Price and payment is full
compensation for work and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

1. Payment is made by either of the following as identified under in the
Contract documents:

2. Square Foot Basis

a. These items are measured by the square foot of asphalt pavement.
The quantities measured for payment are the square feet of

Section 02510 6
th
Edition
25 of 25

specified thickness of asphalt paving in the completed and
accepted work as measured in the field.

3. Tonnage Basis

a. These items are measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds (900 kg) of
asphalt paving mixture, including the weight of the asphalt cement.
The quantities measured for payment are the amount of asphalt
paving materials actually used in the completed and accepted work
in accordance with the plans and specifications.

b. Payment will not be made for correction of defective work as
described in Section 3.29.



per ton (900 kg) or square foot (square meter).

Grade_____ - per ton (900 kg) or square foot (square meter).

END OF SECTION

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Page 1 of 26
SECTION 02515


PART 1: General

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is constructing Portland cement concrete pavement to the lines, grades,
thicknesses, and cross sections on the plans on a prepared subgrade or base course.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM C-143 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C-231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C-138 Density(Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric) of
Concrete
ASTM C-39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C-78 Flexural Strength of Concrete
ASTM C-150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C-595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C-157 Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C-94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
AASHTO M 85 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
AASHTO M 183 Standard Specification for Structural Steel
AASHTO M 157 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
AASHTO M 213 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
AASHTO M 182 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
AASHTO M 148 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Furnish materials meeting the following, section requirements:

1. Portland Cement Section 3310

a. Use Portland Cement for paving meeting AASHTO M 85, ASTM
C150 Types I, II, III and V or ASTM C-595 Type IP or ASTM C-

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 26
1157 Types GU, MS, HE, and HS. The Engineer will specify the
type of cement to be used.

2. Air Entraining Agents Section 3310

3. Admixtures Section 3310

4. Water Section 3310

5. Fine Aggregate for Concrete

a. Use fine aggregate for concrete meeting ASTM C33.

6. Coarse Aggregate for Concrete

a. Use coarse aggregate for concrete meeting ASTM C33.

7. Reinforcing Steel

a. Use reinforcing steel meeting, Section 03210 and the following.

b. Dowels

1) Use dowel bars for Rigid Pavement Expansion Joints or
Devices meeting AASHTO M1 83 (ASTM A36). Assure
dowel bars are plain and free from burring or other
deformations that prevent slippage in the concrete. Paint
one-half the bar length with one coat of zinc or tar paint.

c. Sleeves

1) Use metal sleeves for dowel bars of standard manufacture
that cover 2-in mm), plus or minus 1/4-inch (6-5 mm), of
the dowel, having one closed end and internal stop that
holds the dowel bar at least 1-inch (25 mm) from the end.
Avoid collapsing the sleeve during construction.

B. Joint Fillers and Sealers

1. Furnish a one piece joint filler sized the full depth and width of the joint. If
a multiple pieced joint filler is approved, fasten the abutting ends
following the filler manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Use pourable Joint sealer meeting ASTM D3406.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 26
3. Use two-component polyurethane or polysulfide-base sealant meeting,
A.N.S.I A 116.1-1960 flow and strength requirements where specified.

4. Use either Class A (self-leveling) or Class B (non-sag) sealant for
horizontal joints. Use Class B sealant for sloped or vertical joints.

5. Use preformed joint filler meeting, AASHTO M213 requirements,
punched to receive the dowels shown on the plans.

6. Use preformed compression joints manufactured to the dimensions
specified on the plans, from materials meeting ASTM D 2628.

7. Furnish a certification for each shipment of joints indicating that the
material has been sampled, tested, and inspected under ASTM D 2628.
Assure each certification furnished is signed by a manufacturer's
authorized agent or independent testing agency.

8. If recommended by the manufacturer, use a manufacturer approved
lubricant-adhesive to provide lubrication and bond for the joint.

C. Curing and Protective Coating Materials

1. Furnish materials meeting, the following requirements:

AASHTO M182 (Class 3) Burlap Cloth made from Jute or
Kenaf:

AASHTO M 171 (ASTM C 171)

Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete:

AASHTO M 148 Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete

D. Proportioning

1. Have a qualified independent testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer,
determine the mix design to meet flexural or compressive strength of the
pavement as specified in the Contract documents. Proportion the
concrete mix under Section 03310.2.3 and have a maximum 4" (102 mm)
slump (2" (51mm) slip form method).

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 26
PART3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Obtain the Engineer's approval of equipment and tools used for handling,
materials and performing all parts of the work. Approval applies to design,
capacity, and mechanical conditions. Assure the equipment is on site ahead of the
start of construction operations for the Engineer's examination.

3.2 BATCHING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. The batching, plant includes bins, weighing hoppers and scales for the fine
aggregate and each coarse aggregate size. Furnish a separate scale, bin,
and hopper for cement if cement is used in bulk. Assure the weighing
hopper is properly sealed and vented to prevent dust during operation.

B. Bins And Hoppers

1. Provide bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and
for each size of coarse aggregate in the batching plant.

C. Scales

1. Use either beam type or springless-dial type scales for weighing,
aggregates and cement. Assure the scale is accurate to within 0.5 percent
throughout the range of use. When beam-type scales are used, equip the
scale with a "tell-tale" dial or other device for indicating, that the required
load in the weighing hopper is being approached. The device on weighing
beams must clearly indicate critical position . Assure Poises are designed
to be secured in any position and to prevent inadvertent change. Assure
the weigh beam and "tell-tale" device are in full view of the operator as
the hopper is charged and operator has convenient access to all controls.

2. Have certified scales. Have on hand not less than ten, 50-pound (22.7 kg)
weights for frequent testing of all scales.

3. Batching plants may be equipped to proportion aggregates and bulk
cement using, automatic weighing devices of an approved type.

4. Obtain the Engineer's approval for any deviations from the above stated
batch plant and equipment requirements before concrete manufacture.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 26
3.3 STOCKPILED AGGREGATE

A. This work is storing aggregate material for use on the project at the specified
locations.

B. Materials

1. Assure the aggregates meet the applicable requirements of ASTM C-33;
AGGREGATES, for the type of material required.

C. Construction

1. Clear and grub the stockpile site. Assure the site is firm, smooth and well
drained. Place an aggregate bed to prevent contamination of the stockpiles.

2. Build the stockpiles in maximum 4 feet (1.22 m) layers, with the
preceding layer completely in place before starting, the next layer. Deposit
the material to prevent coning, excluding fine aggregate approximately 90
percent finer than a No.4 sieve.

3. Do not dump, cast, or push material over stockpile sides excluding fine
aggregate specified above.

4. Space or separate using walls, stockpiles of different aggregate types or
sizes to prevent intermingling of the aggregates.

5. Submit and obtain Engineer's approval of operational plan for stockpiling
any material obtained by wet pit or dredging operations.

6. The Engineer may take random samples from stockpile areas where
equipment has been operated. Stop operating equipment over stockpiles if
tests show degradation is occurring

7. Remove and transport stockpiled material to prevent segregation.

3.4 MIXING

A. General

1. Mix concrete on site, at a central plant, or wholly or partially in truck
mixers. Assure each mixer has a manufacturer's plate showing the drum
capacity of mixed concrete and rotation speed of the mixing drum or
blades attached in a prominent place.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 26
B. On Site Mixers

1. Mix concrete in an approved mixer able to combine the aggregates,
cement, and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the
specified mixing period, and of discharging and distributing the mixture
without segregation on the prepared grade. Assure the mixer is equipped
with an approved timing device that automatically locks the discharge
lever when the drum has been charged and releases at the end of the
mixing period.

2. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning the mixer.
Repair or replace the pickup and throw-over blades in the drum or drums
when they are worn down 1 inch (25.4 mm) or more.

3. Have available at the job site a copy of the manufacturer's design, showing
blade dimensions and arrangement, and original blade height and depth; or
place permanent marks on blades 1 inch (25.4 mm) from the new blade
end. Drilled holes of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) diameter near each end and at the
mid- point of each blade are acceptable markings.

C. Truck Mixers And Truck Agitators

1. Assure truck mixers for mixing and hauling concrete, and truck agitators
used for hauling central-mixed concrete meet Section 03310.3.3 MIXING
requirements.

D. Non-Agitator Trucks

1. Assure bodies of non-agitating, hauling equipment for concrete are smooth,
mortar tight metal containers, capable of discharging the concrete at a
controlled rate without segregation. Discharge of concrete to be from the
bottom of the container. If the equipment body is tilted to discharge
concrete, assure baffles retard the load.

3.5 FINISHING EQUIPMENT.

A. Finishing Machine

1. Use a suitable finishing machine.

B. Vibrators

1. Vibrators may be either the surface pan type or the internal type with
immersed tube or multiple spuds. Vibrators may be attached to the
spreader, the finishing machine, or mounted on a separate carriage. Do not
permit vibrators to come in contact with joints, load transfer devices,

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 26
subgrade, or side forms. Maintain the surface vibrator frequency at 3,500
or more impulses per minute. Maintain frequency of internal types at
5,000 impulses per minute or more for tube vibrators. Maintain 7,000
impulses per minute or more for spud vibrators.

2. Maintain a minimum frequency of 3,500 impulses per minute when spud-
type internal vibrators, either hand-operated or attached to spreaders or
finishing, machines, are used adjacent to forms.

C. Concrete Saw

1. When sawing concrete joints, use sawing equipment capable of producing
the specified cut producing a straight line. Provide artificial lighting for
night work to produce work of daytime quality. Assure this equipment is
on the job both before and during concrete placement.

D. Forms

1. Use straight side metal forms having:

a. a minimum 7/32-inch (5.6 mm) thickness
b. a minimum 10 feet (3.05 m) length.
c. a depth at least equal to the prescribed edge thickness of the
concrete
d. no horizontal joints
e. a base width equal to at least the depth of the forms.

2. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of 100-foot ( 30.5 m) radius or
less. Obtain Engineer approval before using flexible or curved forms.
Provide form anchors capable of withstanding, without visible spring or
settlement, the impact and vibration of the consolidating and finishing
equipment. Assure flange braces extend outward on the base at least two-
thirds the height of the form.

3. Do not use forms with battered top surfaces, bent, twisted, or broken
forms in the work.

4. Do not use repaired forms until inspected and approved. Use built-up
forms only where the total pavement area of any specified thickness on the
project is less than 2,000 square yards (1672 m
2
). Assure the top form face
does not vary from a true plane more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in
3.05 m), and the upstanding leg does not vary more than 1/4-inch (6.35
mm). Assure the forms are capable of locking the ends of abutting form
sections together tightly providing a secure setting.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 26
3.6 GRADE PREPARATION

A. Once the base and or subgrade is graded and compacted to the specified
requirements, trim the grade to specified elevation.

B. Bring the subgrade or base course to the specified cross section when side forms
are set to grade.

C. Fill and compact low areas with approved material, or fill with concrete integral
with the pavement.

D. Maintain the finished grade until the pavement is placed.

E. Keep the subgrade or base course uniformly moist until the concrete is placed. Do
not over wet creating mud or water to pond.

3.7 SETTING FORMS

A. Base Support

1. Prepare the foundation under the forms so that when the form is set, it is in
contact for its whole length at the specified grade. Fill and compact to
grade with granular material, any grade at the form line found to be below
established grade. Correct out of specification grade lines by tamping, or
by cutting, as required.

B. Form Setting

1. Set forms in advance of concrete placing to prevent placing delays. Once
forms are set to correct grade, compact the grade on the inside and outside
edges of the form base. Stake forms with at least three pins for each 10-
foot (3.05 m) section. Pin each side of every joint. Assure form sections
are tightly locked, free from play or movement in any direction. Assure
the forms do not deviate from true line in excess of 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) at
any point. Correct all form settlement or springing, under the finishing,
machine. Clean and oil forms before placing concrete.

C. Grade and Alignment

1. Check and correct all form alignment and grade elevation immediately
before placing, concrete.

D. Curbs and Gutters as Forms

1. Edges of previously placed concrete gutter section may be used as a form.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 26
3.8 HANDLING, MEASURING, AND BATCHING MATERIALS

A. Set up the batch plant site, layout, equipment, and transporting material to assure
an uninterrupted supply of material to the work. Stockpile aggregates from
different sources and of different gradations to prevent co-mingling.

B. Handle aggregates from stockpiles or other sources to the batching plant to
prevent segregation. Aggregates that are segregated or mixed with earth or foreign
material cannot be used in the work. Stockpile or bin all aggregates produced or
handled by hydraulic methods, and washed aggregates for at least 12 hours before
batching. Rail shipment exceeding 12 hours will be accepted as adequate binning
only if the car bodies permit free drainage.

C. Separately weigh the fine and coarse aggregate into hoppers in the amounts
specified in the mix. Measure cement by the sack or by weight. Use separate
scales and hoppers for weighing the cement, with a device that indicates the
complete cement batch discharge into the batch box or container. One sack of
bulk cement is 94 pounds (42.64 kg).

D. Measure all admixtures into the mixer within 3% accuracy.

3.9 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Mix the concrete at the work site using a central-mix plant or truck mixers.
Mixing time is measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum.
Meet AASHTO M 157 and or ASTM C-94 requirements for ready-mix concrete
mixing and delivery.

B. Operate the mixer at the manufacturer's recommended drum speed on the name
plate. Remove and dispose of outside the work at Contractor expense, any
concrete mixed less than the specified time. Do not exceed the mixers nominal
capacity, in cubic feet, as shown on the manufacturer's standard rating plate on the
mixer. An overload up to 10 percent above the mixer's nominal capacity may be
permitted if concrete tests for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are
satisfactory, and if no concrete spill occurs.

C. Re-tempering, concrete by adding water or by other means is not permitted. When
concrete is delivered in transit mixers or agitators, additional water may be added
to the batch materials and additional mixing, time to increase the slump to meet
the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, providing the following,
conditions are met:

1. maximum allowable water-cement ratio is not exceeded;

2. maximum allowable slump is not exceeded;

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 10 of 26
3. maximum allowable mixing and agitating, time (or drum revolutions) is
not exceeded;

4. concrete is remixed for at least one-half the minimum required mixing,
time or number of revolutions.

D. Concrete not meeting these requirements will be rejected. Obtain the Engineer's
approval for admixtures that increase the workability or accelerate the set.

3.10 LIMITATIONS OF MIXING

A. Do not mix, place, or finish concrete when light conditions prevent meeting, the
contract requirements. Obtain the Engineer's approval of artificial lighting

B. Discontinue concrete mix operations when the ambient temperature is 40 F (4C)
and falling. Do not resumed concrete work until the ambient temperature is 35F
(2C) and rising.

C. When concreting work is approved during cold weather, the aggregates may be
heated by either steam or dry heat before being placed in the mixer. Assure the
material is uniformly heated without injuring it.

D. Maintain the mixed concrete temperature between 50F (10C) and 90F (32C)
during placement in the forms

E. The Engineer may direct heating the water and aggregates if the air temperature is
35F (2C) or less at the time of placing, concrete. Heat water and aggregate to
between 70F (21C) and 150F (66C). Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade, or use frozen aggregates in the concrete.

3.11 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Each placing/finishing crew must have at least one ACI Flatwork Finisher
Technician level or above, on site at all times.

B. Place the concrete on the grade, handling, it as little as possible. Assure truck
mixers, truck agitators, or non-agitating hauling equipment are capable of
concrete discharge without segregating, the materials. Unload the concrete into an
approved spreader and spread on the grade to prevent segregation. Continuously
place concrete between transverse joints without the use of intermediate
bulkheads. Perform necessary hand spreading, using only shovels. Do not permit
workmen to walk in freshly-mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth
or foreign substances.

C. Where concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane of
pavement and mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane of

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 11 of 26
pavement, assure that lane has attained 80 percent of design strength. If only
finishing equipment is carried on the existing lane, paving in the adjoining lanes
may be permitted.

D. Thoroughly consolidate concrete against and along the faces of all forms and
along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies using vibrators. Do
not permit vibrators to contact joint assemblies, the grade, or a side form. Do not
operate vibrators more than 15 seconds in any one location.

E. Deposit concrete as close to expansion and contraction joints as possible without
disturbing them. Do not dump from the discharge bucket or hopper onto a joint
assembly unless the hopper is centered on the joint assembly.

F. Immediately remove any concrete spills from completed slab surfaces, using
methods approved by the Engineer.

3.12 TESTING

A. Use ACI Grade I or equivalent certified field testing technicians for all concrete
tests.

1. Furnish the concrete required for testing as per section 01400.

2. Sample, make specimens, and test concrete under the following:

Slump AASHTO T1 19(ASTM C-143)
Air Content (Gravel or Stone) AASHTO T1 52 (ASTM C-23 1)
(slag or highly porous Aggr.) ASTM C-173
Cement Content & Unit Weight AASHTO T121 (ASTM C-138)
Strength (Compressive) AASHTO T22 (ASTM C-39)
(flexural, third point method) AASITFO T97 (ASTM C-78)
Making and Curing Test
Specimens in the Field
AASHTO T97 (ASTM C-78)

3. Cure beams in the field by the method specified for the pavement.

3.13 STRIKE-OFF OF CONCRETE AND PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT

A. Place the concrete, strike it off, consolidate, and finish it to the planned cross
section and elevation.

B. When placing reinforced concrete pavement in two layers, strike-off the first layer
to plan depth and place the reinforcing full length its final position without further
manipulation. Place the second concrete layer, strike it off, and screed. Remove
and replace any bottom layer concrete that has been in place more than 30
minutes without being covered with the top layer at Contractor expense. When

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 12 of 26
reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be positioned in
advance of concrete placement or it may be placed by mechanical or vibratory
means in plastic concrete, after the concrete is spread.

C. Assure reinforcing steel is free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale, and loose or
thick rust.

3.14 JOINTS

A. Construct joints as specified in the contract documents.

B. Longitudinal Joint

1. Place deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing, and
material as shown on the plans. Place reinforcing using approved
mechanical equipment or rigidly secured by chairs or other approved
supports. Assure tie bars are not painted, coated with asphalt or other
material, or enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When adjacent lanes of pavement
are constructed separately, use steel side forms that will form a keyway
along the construction joint. Tie bars may be bent at right angles against
the form of the first lane constructed and straightened into final position
before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or instead of bent tie
bars, approved two-piece connectors may be used.

2. Longitudinal formed joints are a groove, or cleft, extending downward
from, and normal to, the pavement surface. Make these joints using an
approved mechanically or manually operated device to the plan
dimensions and line while the concrete is in a plastic state. Seal the groove,
or cleft, with either a pre-molded strip or poured material as required.

3. Place the longitudinal sawed joints so that their ends contact with any
transverse joints.

4. Cut longitudinal sawed joints using approved concrete saws to the plan
depth, width, and line. Use guide lines or devices to assure cutting the
longitudinal joint as shown on the plans. Saw the longitudinal joint before
the cure period ends or shortly thereafter and before any equipment or
vehicles are permitted on the pavement. Thoroughly clean the sawed area
using both water and compressed air. Immediately remove from the joint
all concrete pieces, aggregate and residue left from the sawing. Assure that
the cut depth is uniform. Start sealing as soon as the joint is dry. Form
longitudinal joints by placing a continuous strip of plastic or other inert
material . Assure the joint insert material is strong, non-stretchable, 3 mil
thick, 2-inch ( 50.8 mm) wide, incapable of bonding with the concrete and
will form a weakened plane 2-inch (50.8 mm) minimum depth.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 13 of 26
5. Insert the joint material using a mechanical device that places the material
in a continuous strip, except where intervening structures break the
continuity of paving. Splices in the joint material are permitted if they can
maintain the continuity of the joint material as placed. Place the joint
material so that the top of the strip is not above, nor more than 1/4-inch
(6.35 mm) below, the finished concrete surface. Once placed, assure the
vertical axis of the joint material is within 10 degrees of a plane normal to
the pavement surface. Assure final strip alignment is parallel with the
pavement center line and does not vary more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) from
the edge of a 12-foot (3.7 m) straightedge. The installation device must
consolidate the concrete about the joint material. Once the joint material is
installed, assure the concrete is free of segregation, rock pockets or voids
and the finished concrete surface on each side of the joint is in the same
plane.

C. Transverse Expansion Joints

1. Place the expansion joint filler continuously from form to form, shaped to
the subgrade and the keyway along the form. Furnish preformed joint filler
in lengths equal to the pavement width or equal to one lane width. Use
damaged or repaired joint filler only with the Engineer's approval.

2. Ensure the expansion joint filler is held vertically. Use an approved
installing bar, or other device if required to secure preformed expansion
joint filler at the proper grade and alignment during concrete placing and
finishing - Assure finished joints do not deviate more than 1/4-inch (6.35
mm) horizontally from a straight line. If joint fillers are assembled in
section, no offsets are permitted between adjacent units. No concrete plugs
are permitted anywhere within the expansion space.

D. Transverse Contraction Joints

1. Transverse contraction joints are weakened planes created by forming or
cutting grooves in the pavement surface and, when shown on the plans, are
to include load transfer assemblies.

2. Form transverse strip contraction by installing a parting strip to be left in
place.

3. Make formed grooves by depressing an approved tool or device into the
plastic concrete. Leave the tool or device in place until the concrete has
attained its initial set and then remove it without disturbing the adjacent
concrete, unless it is designed to remain in place.

4. Make sawed construction joints by sawing grooves in the pavement
surface of the dimensions and spacing and lines on the plans, using an

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 14 of 26
approved concrete saw. Start sawing joints as soon as the concrete has
hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive raveling. Saw all
joints before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking occurs. When required,
continue saw operations both during the day and night, regardless of
weather conditions. Do not saw a planned joint when a volunteer crack
develops at or near the planned joint location. Discontinue sawing when a
crack develops ahead of the saw. Typically, saw all joints in sequence.
Saw all contraction joints in lanes and adjacent to previously constructed
lanes before uncontrolled cracking occurs. If conditions exist that make it
impractical to prevent erratic cracking by early sawing, form the
contraction joint groove before initial set of concrete as provided above.

5. When directed, rout or saw random cracks and fill with joint sealer.
Thoroughly clean the sawed area using water and compressed air.
Immediately remove all pieces of concrete, aggregate and residue from the
joint caused by sawing. Take care to maintain uniform cut depth. Seal the
joint as soon as it is dry.

6. Make sure transverse formed contraction joints comply with Section
02515 3.14 requirements for the longitudinal formed joint.

7. Construct transverse construction joints if there is an interruption
exceeding 30 minutes in the concreting work. Do not construct a
transverse joint within 5 feet (1.5 m) of an expansion joint, contraction
joint, or weakened plane. If sufficient concrete has not been mixed at the
time of interruption to form a slab at least 5 feet (1.5 m.) long, remove and
dispose of excess concrete back to the last preceding joint as directed.

3.15 LOAD TRANSFER DEVICES

A. When used, hold dowels in position parallel to the surface and centerline of the
slab by a metal device that is left in the pavement.

B. Thoroughly coat with an approved lubricant, the portion of each dowel painted
with one coat of lead or tar paint, as required under Section 02515.2.1;
MATERIALS. Furnish an approved metal dowel cap or sleeve meeting Section
02515.2.1; MATERIALS requirements, for each dowel bar used with the
expansion joints. Assure the caps or sleeves fit the dowel bar tightly.

C. Instead of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel bars may be placed
in the full pavement thickness using an approved mechanical device.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 15 of 26
3.16 FINAL STRIKE-OFF, CONSOLIDATION, AND FINISHING

A. Sequence

1. Sequence the work as follows: strike-off, consolidate, float and remove
latency, straight-edge, and final surface finish.

2. If applying water to the surface is permitted, apply it as a fog spray using
an approved spray equipment.

B. Finishing at Joints

1. Place the concrete adjacent to joints, under and around all load transfer
devices, joint assembly units, and other features designed to extend into
the pavement, free of voids or segregation. Mechanically vibrate concrete
adjacent to joints meeting Section 02515.3.11; PLACING CONCRETE
requirements.

2. Once the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints as
required in Section 02515.3.11; PLACING CONCRETE, bring the
finishing machine forward, operating it to avoid damage to or
misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted operation of the finishing machine,
to, over, and beyond the joints, causes segregation of concrete, damage to,
or misalignment of the joints, lift the finishing machine and set it directly
on top of the joint and resume the finishing. When the second screed is
close enough to permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the
joint, lift the screed and carry it over the joint. Thereafter, the finishing
machine may be run over the joint without the screeds being lifted,
provided there is no segregated concrete immediately between the joint
and the screed or on top of the joint.

C. Machine Finishing

1. Vibrate all concrete pavement unless otherwise approved for small areas
or for short periods of time due to equipment failure. Assure vibrators for
full width vibration of concrete paving slabs meet Section 02515.3.5.B;
Vibrators requirements. If concrete uniformity and density is not obtained
using the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures, and
throughout the pavement, furnish equipment and methods which will
produce pavement meeting specifications.

D. Hand Finishing

1. Hand finishing is permitted under the following conditions:

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 16 of 26
a. If mechanical equipment breaks down, hand finishing concrete.
already deposited on the grade when the breakdown occurs is
permitted.

b. Widths or areas of irregular dimensions, where mechanical
finishing equipment is impractical.

c. As soon as concrete is placed, strike it off and screed it. Use an
approved portable screed. Provide a second screed for striking off
the bottom layer of concrete if reinforcement is used.

d. Assure the screed for the surface is an approved design,
sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and constructed of metal, and
at least 2 feet ( .6 m) longer than the maximum width of the slab to
be struck off.

e. Obtain consolidation using a vibrator or other approved equipment.

f. Move the screed forward on the forms with a combined
longitudinal and transverse motion, always moving in the direction
the work is progressing and operated to ensure that neither end is
raised from the side forms during the strike off process. If
necessary, repeat this until the surface is uniform in texture, true to
grade and cross section, and free from porous areas.

2. Floating

a. Once the concrete is struck off and consolidated, use of one of the
following methods as specified or approved.
b. Hand Method

1) Use a hand-operated, longitudinal float at least 12 feet (3.7
m) long and 6 inches (152.4 mm) wide, stiffened to prevent
flexing and warping. Work the float in a sawing motion,
operating from foot bridges resting on the side forms and
spanning and not touching the concrete. Move ahead along
the pavement centerline in successive sections not
exceeding one-half the length of the float. Waste all excess
water or soupy material over the side forms on each pass.

c. Mechanical Method

1) Obtain the Engineers approval of the mechanical float
before use. Adjust the float tracks to the required crown.
Assure the float is adjusted to the transverse finishing
machine to maintain a mortar wave ahead of the float at all

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 17 of 26
times. Ensure the float passes over each pavement area at
least twice. Waste all excess water or soupy material over
the side forms on each pass.

d. Alternate Mechanical Method

1) As an alternate to item (2) above, the Contractor may use a
machine having a cutting and smoothing float, or floats,
suspended from and guided by a rigid frame. This frame
must be carried by 4 or more visible wheels riding on, and
in constant contact with, the side forms.

2) If necessary, following one of the preceding float methods,
long-handled floats having blades a minimum 5 feet (1.52
m) long and 6 inches (152.4 mm ) wide may be used to
smooth and fill in open-textured areas in the pavement. Do
not use long-handled floats to float the entire pavement
surface in place of, or supplementing, one of the preceding
floating methods. When strike-off and consolidation are
performed by hand and the pavement crown will not permit
using a longitudinal float, float the surface transversely
using the long-handled float. Take care to not work the
pavement crown during the work.

E. Straight edge Testing and Surface Correction

1. Once floating is completed , excess water removed, and the concrete is
still plastic, test the concrete surface for trueness with a 10-foot (3.05 m)
straightedge. Furnish and use an 10-foot (3.05 m) straightedge swung from
handles 3 feet (.91 m) longer than one-half the slab width . Hold the
straightedge in contact with the surface in successive positions parallel to
the road centerline and the go over the whole slab area , as required.
Advance along the road in not to exceed one-half the straightedge length.
Immediately fill an depressions with fresh mixed concrete, strike off,
consolidate, and refinish. Trim high areas and refinish. Give special
attention to assure that surfaces across joints meet the smoothness
requirements. Continue straightedge testing and surface corrections until
the entire surface meets the required grade and cross section.

F. Final Finish

1. The final finish as specified in the Contract documents as to the type of
surface texture. The following types of surface textures may be specified:
Type I - Transverse Tining, Type II - Longitudinal Tining, Type III -
Nylon or Artificial Grass Drag, Type IV.- Nylon or Bristle Broom, Type
V - Belt Finish, and Type VI - Burlap Drag. When final, longitudinal

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 18 of 26
texturing has been completed by the burlap drag, texture the plastic
pavement surface to the designated texture as approved by the Engineer. A
belt finish does not need to be preceded by a burlap drag.

a. Type I - Transverse Tining

1) Produce the mainline finish using mechanical equipment
described as follows: The transverse grooving machine
must be either a vibrating roller or a comb equipped with
steel tines. The machine must be self-propelled and
automatically lift the roller or tine comb at the pavement
end. Obtain the Engineer's approval of hand grooving
methods in those areas where the mechanical equipment are
not practical.

2) Assure the equipment has rectangular or circular shaped
spring steel tines that are spaced 1/2- to 1-inch (12.7 - 25.4
mm) center to center. Make the grooves perpendicular to
the pavement center line and the transverse grooves being
0.090 to 0. 125 inches ( 2.3 - 3.2 nun) wide and 1/8- to
3/16-inch (3.2 - 4.8 mm) deep. Acceleration lanes,
deceleration lanes, and irregular sections may be finished
by methods other than mechanical, if they produce a similar
transverse groove.

b. Type II - Longitudinal Tining

1) Produce the mainline finish using mechanical equipment
meeting the following: The longitudinal grooving machine
must be either a vibrating roller or a comb equipped with
steel tines, be self-propelled and automatically lift the roller
or tine comb at the pavement end. Obtain the Engineer's
approval of hand grooving methods in areas where
mechanical equipment cannot be used.

2) Assure the equipment has rectangular or circular shaped
spring steel tines that are spaced 1/2- to 1-inch (12.7 - 25.4
mm) center to center. Make the grooves parallel to the
pavement center line and the longitudinal grooves 0.090 to
0. 125 inches (2.3 - 3.2 mm) wide and 1/8- to 3/16-inch
(3.2 - 4.8 mm) deep. Operate the mechanical equipment
from a bridge when the pavement is 4.9 m (16 feet) or more
in width.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 19 of 26
3) Acceleration lanes, deceleration lanes, and irregular
sections may be finished by methods other than mechanical,
if they produce a similar type of longitudinal groove.

c. Type III - Nylon or Artificial Grass Drag

1) Produce the pavement finish using a nylon or artificial
grass drag, approved by the Engineer. Produce a surface by
pulling the drag longitudinally. For a pavement width of 16
feet (4.9 m) or more, mount the drag on a bridge that
travels on the forms. Use a drag of at least 3 feet (.91 m)
wide and maintain full contact the pavements full width.
Maintain drags clean and free from encrusted mortar.
Replace drags that cannot be cleaned with new ones.

d. Type IV - Nylon or Bristle Broom

1) Apply broom texturing when the water sheen has
disappeared. Draw the broom from the center to the edge of
the pavement with adjacent strokes overlapping. Perform
the brooming so that the surface corrugations are uniform
in appearance and have a minimum depth of 1/16-4nch (1.6
mm) and a maximum depth of 1/8-inch (3.2 mm).
Complete brooming before the concrete surface will be tom
or roughened by the work. Produce a finished surface free
from rough and porous areas, irregularities and depressions
resulting from poor workmanship. Mechanical brooming,
in lieu of the manual brooming, is permitted if the specified
results can be obtained.

e. Type V - Belt Finish (Paving with Rigid Forms)

1) When straight edging is complete and the water sheen has
disappeared, and just before the concrete becomes non-
plastic, belt the surface with a two-ply, canvas belt a
minimum 8 inches (203.2 mm) wide and a minimum 3 feet
(.9 m) longer than the pavement width. Equip hand belts
with handles to permit controlled, uniform manipulation.
Work the belt with short strokes transverse to the road
centerline advancing parallel to the centerline.

f. Type VI - Burlap Drag

1) Use a drag of seamless strip damp burlap or cotton fabric to
produce a roughened surface, dragging it longitudinally
along the pavements full width. For pavement 16 feet (4.9

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 20 of 26
m) or more in width, mount the drag on a bridge that
travels on the rails. Use a drag at least 3 feet (.91 m) wide,
maintaining contact with the full pavement width. Maintain
drags clean and free from encrusted mortar. Replace drags
that cannot be cleaned with new drags.

3.17 EDGING AT FORMS AND JOINTS

A. After the final finish and before the concrete has taken its initial set, round the
edges of the pavement along each side of each slab, and on each side of transverse
expansion joints, formed joints, transverse construction joints, and emergency
construction joints with an approved tool to the specified radius. Produce a radius
having a smooth, dense mortar finish. Do not disturb the slab surface with the tool
during the work.

B. At all joints, remove all tool marks on the slab adjacent to the joints by brooming
the surface. Do not disturb the rounding of the slab comer when brooming the
surface. Completely remove all concrete on top of the joint filler.

C. Test all joints with a straightedge before the concrete has set and correct if one
side of the joint is higher than the other or if an edge is higher or lower than the
adjacent slabs.

3.18 SURFACE TEST

A. As soon as the concrete has hardened to permit testing, test the pavement surface
with a 10-foot (3.05 m) straightedge or other approved device. Mark and. grind
high spots exceeding 1/4-inch (6.35 mm.), but under 1/2-inch in 10 feet (12.7 mm
in 3.05 m), using an approved grinding tool to an elevation where the area or spot
will not show surface deviations exceeding 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) when tested with
a 10- foot (3.05 m) straightedge. Use stacked head, vertical blade grinders that
will provide a coefficient of friction approximately equal to that of the un-ground
pavement. Keep grinding grooves parallel to the direction of travel. Where the
departure from correct cross section exceeds 1/2-inch (12.7 mm)), remove and
replace the pavement by hand at Contractor expense.

B. Any area or section so removed cannot be less than 5 feet (1.52m) long the full
lane width. When required to remove and replace a section of pavement remove
and replace any remaining portion of the slab adjacent to the joints that is less
than 5 feet (1 .52 m) long.

3.19 CURING

A. Immediately after the finishing operations are complete and the surface cannot be
marred, cover and cure the entire surface of the newly placed concrete meeting
one of the following methods. Immediately stop concrete work when insufficient

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 21 of 26
cover material or lack of water would prevent obtaining the specified cure results.
Do not leave the concrete exposed for more than 1/2-hour between stages of
curing or during the curing period.

1. Cotton or Burlap Mats

a. Cover the entire pavement surface with mats, extending least twice
the pavement thickness beyond the slab edges. Assure that the
entire surface and both edges of the slab are completely covered.
Before placing mats, saturate the mats thoroughly with water.
Place and weight the mats to remain in contact with the covered
surface. Keep the mats wetted and in place for 72 hours after the
concrete has been placed.

2. Waterproofed Paper

a. Cover the pavement top and sides entirely with waterproofed paper.
Lap the units at least 18 inches (.46 m). Place and weight the paper
to maintain contact with the surface. Assure the paper extends
beyond the slab edges at twice the pavement thickness. If laid
longitudinally, paper, not manufactured in sizes that will provide
this width, must be securely sewed or cemented together with
joints being sealed so that they do not open up or separate during
the cure period. Maintain the covering in place for 72 hours after
the concrete has been placed. Thoroughly wet the pavement
surface before placing the paper.

3. Straw Curing

a. When using this type of curing, initially cure the pavement using
burlap or cotton mats, meeting Section 02515.3.19.A.a above, until
after final set of the concrete or, in any case, for 12 hours after the
concrete is placed. Once the mats are removed, thoroughly wet and
cover the surface and sides of the pavement with at least 8 inches
(203.2 mm) (wetted thickness) of straw or hay. Repair or replace
straw or hay covering displaced during the curing period and
saturate with water for 3 days. Thoroughly wet the covering down
the morning of the fourth day. Keep this cover in place until the
concrete has attained the required strength. When permission is
given to open the pavement to traffic, remove and dispose of the
covering leaving the right-of-way in a neat and presentable
condition. Do not dispose of the covering by burning on, or
adjacent to, the pavement.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 22 of 26
4. White Pigmented Impervious Membrane

a. Uniformly spray the entire pavement surface with white pigmented
curing compound immediately after the finishing of the surface
and before the set of the concrete has taken place, or if the
pavement is cured initially with burlap or cotton mats, the curing
compound may be applied upon removal of the mats.

b. Do not apply the curing compound during rainfall.

c. Apply curing compound under pressure at 1 gallon per 150 square
feet (3.79 L per 13.95 square meters ) using mechanical sprayers.
Use spraying equipment of the fully atomizing type equipped with
a tank agitator. At the time of use, assure the compound is
thoroughly mixed with the pigment uniformly dispersed
throughout the vehicle. During application, continuously stir the
compound using mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths
or shapes and on concrete surfaces exposed by the removal of
forms is permitted. Do not apply curing compound to the inside
faces of joints to be sealed.

d. Use curing compound producing a film that will harden within 30
minutes after application Immediately re-apply curing compound
damaged from any cause within the required curing period.

e. Upon removal of side forms, apply curing compound to the
exposed slab sides.

5. White Polyethylene Sheeting

a. Cover entirely the top surface and sides of the pavement with
polyethylene sheeting. Lap the pieces at least 18 inches (35 cm).
Place and weight the sheeting so it remains in contact with the
surface. Lay sheeting so it extends beyond the edges of the slab at
least twice the thickness of the pavement. Maintain the covering in
place for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed.

B. Curing in Cold Weather

1. When the average daily temperature is below 4OF (4C), cure by
covering the pavement with at least 12 inches ( 304.8 mm) of loose, dry
hay or straw, or equivalent protective covering authorized by the Engineer.
Leave covering in place for 10 days.

2. When concrete is placed and the air temperature could drop below 35 F ,
provide the volume of straw, hay, grass, or other blanketing material at the

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 23 of 26
work site. Anytime the temperature may be expected to reach the freezing
point during the day or night, spread the material over the pavement to the
required depth to prevent freezing of the concrete. Maintain the covering
for a minimum 10 days. Be responsible for the quality and strength of the
concrete placed during cold weather, and remove and replace at
Contractor expense any concrete injured by freezing.

3.20 REMOVING FORMS

A. Remove forms only after the freshly place concrete has set for 12 hours,
excluding auxiliary forms used temporarily in widened areas. Carefully remove
forms to prevent damage to the pavement. Once the forms are removed, cure the
slab sides as specified herein. Remove and replace major honeycombed areas .
The minimum area to be removed is 10 feet in length (3.05 m), the full width of
the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a pavement section,
any remaining portion of the slab, adjacent to the joints, less than 5 feet (1.52 m)
in length is to be removed and replaced.

3.21 SEALING JOINTS

A. If the joints are to be sealed, fill them with joint sealing material before the
pavement is opened to traffic and as soon as practical after completion of the
curing period. Just before sealing, thoroughly clean each joint of all foreign
material, including membrane curing compound, assuring the joint faces are clean
and surface dry when the seal is applied. Stir material for hot applied seal during
heating

B. Apply the sealing material to each joint opening meeting the plan details or as
directed by the Engineer. Pour so that the material does not spill on the exposed
concrete surfaces . Remove and clean from concrete surfaces all excess sealing
material. The use of sand or similar material as a cover for the seal is not
permitted. Do not place poured joint sealing material when the ambient
temperature is less than 50F (10C), unless approved by the Engineer.

3.22 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT

A. Protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public and Contractor
traffic. This includes supplying watchmen to direct traffic and the erection and
maintenance of warning signs and lights.

B. To protect the concrete against rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened,
have available at all times materials for the protection of the edges and surface of
the unhardened concrete. Protective materials consist of standard metal forms or
wood plank having a minimum nominal thickness of 2 inches (50.8 mm) and a
minimum nominal width of the pavement thickness at its edge for the protection
of the pavement edges, and covering material such as burlap or cotton mats,

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 24 of 26
curing paper, or plastic sheeting material for the protection of the surface of the
pavement. Stop paving when rain appears imminent and have all available
personnel begin placing forms against the side of the pavement and cover the
surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering.

C. Repair or replace all damage to the pavement occurring before final acceptance at
Contractor expense.

3.23 OPENING TO TRAFFIC

A. Obtain the Engineer's approval to open the pavement to traffic. Pavement cannot
be opened to traffic until specimen beams, meeting 3.12; TESTING, have reached
the design flexural strength, tested under the third-point method according to
Section 3.12; TESTING. If the tests are not performed, the pavement may be
opened at the discretion of the engineer. Clean the pavement before opening to
traffic.

3.24 CONCRETE PAVEMENT - SLIPFORM METHOD

A. Pavement may be constructed without using fixed forms. When the slipform
method is used, meet the following provisions:

1. Grade

a. Once the grade or base is placed and compacted to the specified
density , cut the grade and areas that will support the paving
machine to the required elevation using an approved fine-grading
machine. Use a self-propelled or towed fine-grading machine
having the weight and power to trim the compacted material
without gouging or tearing the surface. Assure the machine is
equipped with cutting edges or surface shavers controlled from an
independent control reference wire having an automatic control
device. To avoid excessive depths of cut, the machine is to fine
grade making successive passes, with each pass controlled from
the independent reference line through the automatic control. Re-
compact to the specified density, all base disturbed by the grading
operation, before placing concrete. Maintain the grading operations
in advance of concrete placement. Repair damage to the grade
caused by traffic before placing the concrete.

2. Placing Concrete

a. Place concrete using an approved, slipform paver able to spread,
consolidate, screed, and float-finish the freshly placed concrete in
one complete pass to the specified line, grade, and cross section
with a minimum of hand finishing. Assure the machine is equipped

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 25 of 26
with vibrators , vibrating the concrete the pavements full width and
depth. Vibrators must be vibrating tubes or arms working in the
concrete, or a vibrating screed or pan operating on the concrete
surface. Assure the sliding forms are capable of resisting
displacement by the wet concrete. Use forms that trail behind the
paver and prevent slumping of the concrete during the work.

b. Assure the concrete does not exceed a slump of 2 inches (50.8
mm). Operate the slipform paver at a uniform speed. Coordinate all
concrete mixing, delivering, and spreading to maintain uniform
progress with minimum stopping and starting of the paving work.
Immediately stop vibratory and tamping when it is necessary to
stop the paver. Do not apply any outside tractive force to the paver
not controlled by it.

3. Finishing

a. Meet the surface smoothness and texture requirements of Section
02515.3.16.F; FINAL FINISH, and Section 02515.3.18;
SURFACE TEST.

4. Curing

a. Perform curing using one of the methods in Section 02515.3.19;
CURING.

5. Joints

a. Construct all joints under Section 02515.3.14; JOINTS.

3.25 TOLERANCE IN PAVEMENT THICKNESS

A. The pavement thickness will be determined by measuring cores. The actual
pavement thickness must be within 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) of the specified thickness.

B. When any core is less than the plan thickness by more than the allowable
deviation, additional cores will be taken from the area at minimum 10-foot (3-05
m ) intervals parallel to the centerline in each direction from the affected location
until, in each direction, a core is found which is not deficient by more than the
allowable deviation. The Engineer will evaluate areas found deficient in thickness
by more than the allowable deviation . Remove and replace deficient areas to the
specified thickness at Contractor expense.

Section 02515 6
th
Edition
Page 26 of 26
PART 4: MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. The pavement is measured by the square yard (Sq meter) or linear foot ( linear
meter) of full-depth pavement. The Engineer will measure the number of square
yards (sq meters) or linear feet (linear meter) after construction of the pavement
has been completed.

B. Accepted pavement is paid for at the contract unit price per square yard (sq meter)
or linear foot (linear meter) as called for in the Contract documents. This price
constitutes full compensation for furnishing and preparing all materials, including
all joints, joint filler, dowels, and reinforcing if required in the construction
drawings or special provisions; placing, finishing, curing; and all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this item.


1. Concrete Pavement - Sq. Yd. or Linear Foot (Sq. meter. or Linear meter)

END OF SECTION

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 02528


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is constructing combined curb and gutter using structural concrete and
meeting the lines, dimensions, and grades shown on the plans and these
specifications.

B. Standard drawings in Appendix A that are applicable to this section are:

1. Standard Drawing 02528-1, Standard Curb and Gutter

2. Standard Drawing 02528-2, Drive-over Curb and Gutter

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO M 213 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
AASHTO M 148 Standard Specification for Liquid-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

A. Furnish structural concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310,
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

2.2 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Furnish reinforcing steel meeting the requirements of Section 03210,
REINFORCING STEEL.

2.3 PRE-FORMED EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A. Furnish joint material meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213.

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 6
2.4 GRAVEL BASE MATERIAL

A. Furnish gravel base meeting all applicable portions of Section 02235, CRUSHED
BASE COURSE, and meeting gradation requirements for 1 minus material.

2.5 CURING AND PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIALS

A. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

1. Furnish liquid membrane-forming compound meeting the requirements of
AASHTO M148, Type 1, clear or translucent.

B. Emulsified Linseed Oil Compound

1. Assure it meets all requirements of AASHTO M148 and contains at least
2.7 pounds (0.32 kg) of linseed oil per gallon (liter). Furnish a
manufacturers certification showing that the formulated weight of linseed
oil per gallon equals or exceeds this limit.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Concrete curb and gutter may be machine-laid or hand-formed. Perform work
meeting these requirements and the applicable requirements of Section 03310,

3.2 FOUNDATION PREPARATION

A. Excavate the foundation to the specified depth. Assure the subgrade or base
course for the concrete has a firm and even surface and is compacted meeting
Section 02230, STREET EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION.

B. Complete excavation to the lines shown in the contract documents.

C. Place at least 3 inches (7.5 cm) of gravel base material and compact it to a firm,
even surface under all curb and gutter. This requirement is waived if curb and
gutter is installed on a portion of street base course material of 3 inches (7-5 cm)
or more in thickness.

D. For new street construction or street reconstructing, place gravel base course for
the street to the back of the curb.

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 6
3.3 FORMS

A. Use metal forms unless otherwise approved of the depth equal to the face of the
item being constructed. Obtain Engineer approval of in-place forms before
placing concrete.

B. Assure forms produce the shape, lines, and dimensions shown on the plans and/or
drawings. Assure forms prevent leakage of mortar and maintain position and
alignment. Thoroughly clean and oil before placing and do not remove forms until
the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage.

C. Where the curb and gutter is to abut an existing sidewalk, use an approved face-
of-gutter form secured to maintain an established gutter grade. Vary the curb
height to assure the top of curb matches as nearly as possible the standard curb
and gutter cross section. Obtain Engineer approval to hand form lengths not
exceeding 10 feet (3m).

D. Form radii using flexible or curved metal forms set to fit the specified curvature.
Obtain Engineer approval before using wood forms. Radii may be formed by
using segments of straight forms if the length of the straight segment does not
exceed one-tenth of the length of the radius.

3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place reinforcement as required. Place and hold in position before placing
concrete.


A. Place and compact the subgrade to the specified grade before placing concrete.
Dampen the subgrade just before placing the concrete. Spade and tamp the
concrete thoroughly into the forms to provide a dense, compacted concrete free of
rock pockets. Float, finish, and broom the exposed surfaces. Each
placing/finishing crew shall have at least one ACI Flatwork Finishing Technician
level or above, on site at all times.

B. Do not place concrete at a rate that exceeds the finishing operations ability to
meet these specifications.

C. Machines or equipment that extrude curb and gutter may be used when approved,
provided they produce a finished product matching that obtained by the set-form
method. Use slip-form machines that are automatically controlled for longitudinal
grade, alignment, and transverse slope by sensing devices operating from string
lines set from construction stakes placed by the Engineer.

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 6
3.6 STRIPPING FORMS AND FINISHING

A. Forms

1. Remove forms when the concrete is sufficiently set to prevent chipping or
spalling. When forms are removed before the curing period has expired,
protect the concrete edges with moist earth or spray edges with curing
compound. Clean, oil, and examine all forms for defects before they are
used again.

B. Finishing

1. Finish the surface of concrete curbs and gutters true to the lines and grades
shown on the plans.

2. Fill honeycomb or other blemishes in formed surfaces with grout to the
specified finish. Tool all edges to a -inch (6.4 mm) radius. Float the
surface using a magnesium float to a smooth and uniform surface. When
the concrete in the curb and gutter has hardened sufficiently, give the
surface a broom finish. Obtain Engineer approval of the broom before use.
Broom the surface without tearing the concrete. Broom to produce regular
corrugations not exceeding 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) deep.

C. Crew

1. Do not apply additional surface water. The Engineer may permit adding
water, but it must be applied by fog spray only. Use of an evaporation
retardant, Confilm, or equal, following the manufacturers directions is
permitted.

3.7 CURING

A. Curing meeting Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, requirements.

3.8 JOINTS

A. Place curb and gutter monolithically with no construction joints permitted, except
at planned expansion joints.

B. Construct expansion joints at radius points, construction joints, junctions with
existing concrete, opposite to or at expansion joints in adjacent concrete, and at
maximum 300-foot (92 m) intervals, in a continuous run of concrete being placed.
Form expansion joints using -inch (12.7 mm) thick, pre-formed expansion joint
filler, as specified in Section 02528.2.3.

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 6
C. Form or cut contraction joints 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) wide to one-fourth the depth of
the concrete being placed. Construct the joints to coincide with the joints in
adjacent concrete or in uniform sections 10 feet (3 m) in length. Where required
to make a closure, sections less than 10 feet (3 m) in length will be permitted with
the minimum length being 4 feet (1.2 m). When contraction joints are made by
approved forming or grooving before the concrete has set, tool the edges to the
approved radius.

3.9 CURB BACKFILL

A. Complete the curb backfill to 4 inches (10 cm) below the top of curb before final
grading of the subgrade and placing the base course.

B. Backfill using impervious dirt up to 4 inches (10 cm) below top of curb. Do not
use sand or gravel backfill in this area.

C. In areas of existing lawns, use black loam or approved topsoil for the top 4 inches
(10 cm) of backfill. Place it out from the curb and in the amount required to
replace the turf or lawn removed during installation. Place the backfill to a point
level with the top of the curb, immediately adjacent to the curb, and grade and
blend to match the existing undisturbed lawn area.

D. Where lawns do not exist, place the top 4 inches (10 cm) of backfill using
impervious dirt and conforming to the typical sections shown on the plans.

E. Compact backfill to prevent settlement and level the surface to be free draining.

3.10 PRIME AND SEAL COAT PREPARATION

A. Paint the edge of the gutter adjacent to the asphalt surfacing with an asphalt prime
coat before placing the pavement surface course. When an asphalt seal coat is
specified, apply the oil and cover aggregate 3 inches (7.6 cm) on to the gutter to
provide a good seal on the joint between the concrete and pavement.

3.11 TOLERANCES

A. Perform the work to produce a curb and gutter meeting the specified line and
grade uniform in appearance and structurally sound. Remove and replace at
contractor expense curb and gutter having unsightly bulges, ridges, and/or low
spots in the gutter, or other defects as directed. Grade cannot deviate more than
1/8-inch (3.2 mm), and alignment not vary more than -inch (6.4 cm) from plan
elevation, grade or alignment. Tolerances may be checked using survey
instruments, straight edges, or water puddling. Puddled water cannot exceed -
inch (6.4 mm) in depth.

Section 02528 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 6

4.1 COMBINED CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER

A. This item is measured and paid for by the lineal feet (meter) of combined curb
and gutter in place at the contract unit price bid for Combined Concrete Curb and
Gutter. Price and payment is full compensation for all materials, curing of
concrete, painting face gutter with primer, all pre-molded mastic material for
expansion joints, contraction joints, steel dowels and sleeves, all equipment, tools,
labor, and for the performance of all work and incidentals necessary to complete
the item. The lineal feet (meter) measurement is the horizontal distance measured
along the face of the curb.

B. Curb excavation and backfill is paid for separately, as specified in Section 02230,
STREET EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION. Payment is made
under Combined Concrete Curb and Gutter per lineal foot (meter).

END OF SECTION

Section 02529 - 6
th
Edition
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, APPROACHES, CURB TURN FILLETS, VALLEY GUTTERS
AND MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
Page 1 of 7

SECTION 02529

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, DRIVEWAYS, APPROACHES, CURB TURN FILLETS,
VALLEY GUTTERS AND MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is the construction of concrete sidewalk and driveway approaches, curb
turn fillets, valley gutters, new street monuments, and all other miscellaneous new
concrete construction complete in place.

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO M 213 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
AASHTO M 148 Standard Specification for Liquid-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete

A. Standard drawings in Appendix A applicable to this section are as follows.

1. Standard Drawing No. 02529-1 -Double Gutter Detail For
Street Intersection

2. Standard Drawing No. 02529-2 -Standard Fillet

3. Standard Drawing No. 02529-3 -Type I Street Monument

4. Standard Drawing No. 02529-4 -Type II Street Monument

5. Standard Drawing No. 02529-5A -Boulevard Driveway Approach

6. Standard Drawing No. 02529-5B -Curb Walk Driveway Approach

7. Standard Drawing No. 02529-6 -Retrofit Drive Approach

8. Standard Drawing No. 02529-7A -Boulevard Alley Approach

9. Standard Drawing No. 02529-7B -Curb Walk Alley Approach

10. Standard Drawing No. 02529-8 -Accessibility Ramp

11. Standard Drawing No. 02529-9 -Swale Crossing
Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 7

12. Standard Drawing No. 02529-10 -Mailbox Mounting For Curbline
Delivery

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

A. Furnish structural concrete meeting the requirements of Section 03310,

2.2 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Furnish reinforcing steel meeting the requirements of Section 03210,
REINFORCING STEEL. Use 6 x 6 x 10 gauge wire mesh unless otherwise
specified.

2.3 PRE-FORMED EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A. Furnish joint material meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213.

2.4 GRAVEL BASE MATERIAL

A. Furnish crushed base material meeting applicable requirements of Section 02235,
CRUSHED BASE COURSE, and meeting the gradation requirements for 1
minus material.

2.5 CURING AND PROTECTIVE COATING MATERIALS

A. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

1. Use liquid membrane-forming compounds meeting the requirements of
AASHTO M148, Type 1, clear or translucent. Apply the compound
between April 15 and August 14.

B. Emulsified Linseed Oil Compound

1. Apply water-soluble or emulsified linseed oil compound between August
15 and April 14 as a protective coat. Assure it meets all requirements of
AASHTO M148 and contains at least 2.7 pounds of linseed oil per gallon.
Furnish a manufacturers certification showing that the formulated weight
of linseed oil per gallon equals or exceeds this limit.

Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 7
PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Construct sidewalks and driveway approaches, either new or replacement, valley
gutter and curb turn fillets at the locations shown on the plans and where directed
by the Engineer meeting these specifications and the applicable portions of
Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

B. The use of slip form machines is prohibited for items in this section unless
otherwise specified or permitted by the Engineer.

3.2 FOUNDATION PREPARATION

A. Excavate to the specified depth. Assure the subgrade where the concrete to be
placed has a firm and even surface and is compacted as specified in Section
02230, STREET EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION.

B. Place and compact at least 3 inches (76 mm) of gravel base material to a firm,
even surface. This requirement is waived for concrete if it is to be installed on
street base course material exceeding 3 inches (76 mm) or more in thickness.

3.3 FORMS

A. Furnish forms to produce the shape, lines, and dimensions shown on the plans
and/or drawings. Assure forms prevent leakage of mortar and are maintained in
proper position and accurate alignment. Thoroughly clean and oil forms with an
approved form oil before placing concrete and remove forms only after the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to support all loads without damage.

B. Form radii using flexible or curved metal forms set to the required curvature. Use
wood forms only with the Engineers approval. Radii may be formed by using
segments of straight forms if the length of the straight segment does not exceed
one-tenth of the length of the radius.

C. Use 6-inch (15 cm) forms and 6-inch (15 cm) pre-formed expansion joint material
for concrete 6 inches (15 cm) in depth.

3.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place and hold in position reinforcement meeting the contract requirements before
placing the concrete.

Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 7

A. Assure the subgrade is compacted and brought to specified grade before placing
concrete. Dampen the subgrade immediately before placing the concrete. Spade
and tamp the concrete into the forms providing a dense, compacted concrete free
of rock pockets. Float, finish and broom the exposed surfaces. Each
placing/finishing crew shall have at least one ACI Flatwork Finisher Technician
level or above, on site at all times.

B. Assure the rate of concrete placement does not exceed the rate at which the
various placing and finishing operations can be performed in accordance with
these specifications.

3.6 STRIPPING FORMS AND FINISHING

A. Forms

1. Remove forms when the concrete is sufficiently set to prevent chipping or
spalling. When forms are removed before the curing period has expired,
protect the concrete edges with moist earth or spray edges with curing
compound. Clean, oil, and examine all forms for defects before they are
used again.

B. Finishing

1. Finish the concrete surface true to the lines and grades shown on the plans.
Float the concrete surface using a magnesium float to a smooth and
uniform surface. Plastering of the surface is prohibited. Edge all outside
edges of the slab and all joints using a -inch (6.5 mm) radius-edging
tool. After concrete has hardened sufficiently, give the surface a broom
finish. Assure the broom strokes are square across the concrete from edge
to edge, overlapping adjacent strokes. Broom without tearing the concrete.
Assure the broomed finish produces regular corrugations not exceeding
1/8-inch (3 mm) in depth.

3.7 CURING

A. Cure meeting Section 03310, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE requirements.

3.8 JOINTS

A. Extend isolation joints the full depth of the concrete and fill using -inch (12
mm) thick, pre-formed joint filler as specified in Section 02529.3.3. Place
isolation joints meeting this requirement where new concrete abuts existing
concrete. Form isolation joints around all appurtenances, such as manholes, utility
poles, etc. extending into and through the concrete.
Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 7

B. Install pre-formed joint filler between concrete and any fixed structure, such as a
building or bridge. Assure all expansion joint materials extend the full depth of
the concrete. Place isolation joints at radius points, junctions with existing
concrete, and opposite to or at expansion joints in adjacent concrete. Form cold
joints at unions of consecutive pours as shown on the plans or directed by the
Engineer. Assure the cold joint is vertical, the full depth of the concrete, and
tooled to a -inch (6.5 mm) radius.

C. Divide sidewalk into sections using contraction joints formed by a jointing tool or
other approved methods. Extend the contraction joints into the concrete for at
least one-fourth of its depth and be approximately 1/8-inch (3 mm) wide. Unless
otherwise directed, space contraction joints at maximum 10-foot (3 m) intervals or
at a distance equal to the sidewalk width, whichever is less. In continuous
sidewalk runs, install isolation joints at the location of a regular contraction joint
if the distance between isolation joints does not exceed 300 feet (91 m).

3.9 BACKFILL

A. In areas adjacent to existing lawns, backfill the top 4 inches (100 mm) using black
loam or good topsoil suitable for lawn growth. Place it out from the sidewalk or
driveway to replace turf or lawn removed during installation. Place the backfill
level with the top of the curb, immediately adjacent to the curb, graded and
blended to match the existing undisturbed lawn area.

B. Where lawns do not exist, backfill the top 4 inches (100 mm) with impervious dirt
and place to meet the typical sections shown on the plans.

C. Compact backfill to prevent settlement and level the surface to a neat appearing
and free draining surface.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Assure all items of construction covered by this section present clean, uniform
surfaces and lines free of irregularities and distortions. Plane surfaces and vertical
tangent lines are tested with a 10-foot straightedge and cannot deviate more than
-inch (6.5 mm) from the straightedge.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS NEW CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct new street monuments, new street light bases, and other miscellaneous
concrete construction in accordance with detail drawings.

Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 7

4.1 CURB TURN FILLETS

A. This item is measured and paid for by the number of curb turn fillets constructed,
complete in place, including curb, at the contract unit price bid for Curb Turn
Fillets. Price and payment is full compensation for all material, excavation,
backfill, curing of concrete, pre-molded mastic material, equipment, tools and
this item.

1. Payment is made under Curb Turn Fillets Per each.

4.2 CONCRETE VALLEY GUTTERS

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square foot at the contract unit price bid
for Concrete Valley Gutters. Price and payment is full compensation for all
material, excavation, backfill, curing of concrete, pre-molded mastic material,
reinforcing steel, equipment, tools and labor, and for the performance of all work
and incidentals necessary to complete this item.

1. Payment is made under Concrete Valley Gutters per square foot.

4.3 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY APRONS

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square foot (as defined on the plan
detail and excluding curb) at the contract unit price bid for Concrete Driveway
Aprons. Price and payment is full compensation for all material, excavation,
backfill, curing of concrete, pre-molded mastic material, equipment, tools and
this form.

1. Payment is made under Concrete Driveway Aprons per square foot
(square meter).

4.4 CONCRETE SIDEWALK

A. This item is measured and paid for by the square foot (square meter) at the unit
price bid for New Concrete Sidewalk. Price and payment is full compensation
for all material, excavation, backfill, curing of concrete, pre-molded mastic
material, equipment, tools and labor, and for the performance of all work and

1. Payment is made under Concrete Sidewalk per square foot (square
meter).

Section 02529 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 7
4.5 STREET MONUMENTS

A. This item is measured and paid for by the number of monuments constructed as
shown on the plans at the contract unit price bid for Install Monuments, Type I
or II. Price and payment is full compensation for all materials, excavation,
backfill, forming and curing of concrete, equipment, tools and labor, and for the
performance of all work and incidentals necessary to complete this form.

1. Payment is made under Install Monuments, Type I per each.
Type II per each.

END OF SECTION

Section 02581 6
th
Edition
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS
(PRE-FORMED PLASTIC, PAINTS AND ENAMELS)
Page 1 of 13
SECTION 02581

(PRE-FORMED PLASTIC, PAINTS AND ENAMELS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is painting pavement lines, words and symbols, or applying plastic
lines, words, symbols, channelization buttons, and other reflective markers
meeting these specifications, the standard drawings, and in reasonably close
conformity with the lines and dimensions shown in the contract documents or
established by the Engineer.

PART 2: PRODUCT

2.1 PRE-FORMED PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL

A. Furnish plastic pavement markings and legends consisting of reflectorized, pre-
fabricated, homogeneous, thermoplastic ribbon of the specified thickness. Assure
the plastic contains reflective glass spheres uniformly distributed throughout its
cross section and is capable of being affixed to bituminous or Portland cement
concrete pavements using a liquid contact cement or pre-coated, pressure-
sensitive adhesive. Furnish white and yellow meeting standard highway colors.
Assure the white plastic material is non-yellowing, and the yellow plastic material
is non-fading for their expected useful life.

B. For strip line widths of 6 inches (150 mm) or less, furnish plastic pavement
striping material in a single manufactured width equal to the specified width. For
specified stripe line widths exceeding 6 inches (150 mm), furnish plastic
pavement striping material in a single manufactured width equal to the specified
width or in two or more widths totaling the specified width.

C. Cut the plastic marking material edges clean and true. Use at least 0.09-inch (2.25
mm) thick plastic material for inlaying into new asphaltic surfaces. Use at least
0.06-inch (1.50 mm) thick plastic material for application to existing surfaces or
to hardened new surfaces.

D. Assure plastic pavement markings for inlay into new asphaltic surfaces are
capable of being applied just before the final rolling of the new surface and can be
rolled into place with conventional pavement rollers. For inlay applications,
assure the plastic and adhesive are not damaged by pavement temperatures
exceeding 175 F (79 C) or by water on roller drums.

Section 02581
Page 2 of 13
E. Assure the plastic pavement marking material and its adhesive are tack free to
provide easy handling without using a protective backing and can be repositioned
on the surface before being permanently fixed in position. Pre-coated adhesive
must be uniformly distributed over the entire contact surface of the plastic
material.

F. Furnish plastic pavement marking material capable of molding itself to pavement
contours, breaks, and other surface irregularities under traffic at normal pavement
temperatures. Assure the plastic material will fuse with itself and with previously
applied markings of the same composition under normal use conditions.

G. Assure pavement legends and symbols meet the applicable shapes and sizes
specified by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices as adopted by the
FHWA.

H. Assure product agents or distributors furnish the manufacturers specifications
showing that the material furnished meets or exceeds these requirements and
submit evidence of successful product use over a one-year period under similar
climatic conditions. Plastic pavement marking material not meeting this use
requirement will be rejected.

I. Submit a 4-inch (100 mm) by 1-foot (300 mm) sample from each lot of plastic
material proposed for use on the project to the Engineer for approval. Use only
approved plastic pavement marking material on the project.

1. Composition Requirements

a. Furnish pre-formed plastic pavement marking material consisting
of plasticizers, pigments, and graded glass spheres combined and
proportioned to meet the following requirements.

1) Pigments: Minimum 20% titanium dioxide of total
pigment for white marking material; Minimum 18%
medium chrome yellow of total pigment for yellow
marking material. Use graded glass spheres that are clean,
transparent, and meet the requirements of Section
02581.2.02.A.1. Assure the glass spheres are uniformly
distributed throughout the entire material.

2. Physical Requirements

a. Tensile Strength

1) Assure the plastic material has a minimum tensile strength
of 40 psi (270 kPa) of cross section when tested under
ASTM D638. The break resistance is based on an average

Section 02581
Page 3 of 13
of at least three (3) samples tested at a temperature of 70
80 F (22 27 C) using a jaw speed of 0.25 inches (6.25
mm) per minute.

b. Plastic Pull Test

1) A 1-6 (25 mm 150 mm) sample of the plastic material
must support a dead weight of 0.66 lb per 0.01 inch (.28 kg
per 2.5 0 mm) of material thickness for at least 5 minutes at
70 80 F (22-27 C).

c. Bend Test

1) The plastic material must be flexible so that at 80 F (27
C), a 3 by 6 (75 mm by 150 mm) sample of the material
can be bent over a 1 (25 mm) diameter mandrel until the
end faces are parallel and 1 (25 mm) apart without
showing any fracture lines in the uppermost surface under
unassisted visual inspection.

d. Skid Resistance

1) The surface friction of the plastic cannot be less than 35
BPN when tested under ASTM E303.

e. Reseal Test

1) The plastic must re-seal to itself without adhesives when
tested as follows: Overlap two 1 by 3 (25 mm by 75
mm) piece face-to-face so that they form a single 1 (25
mm) by 5 (125 mm) with a 1 square inch (25 square mm)
overlap in the center.

2) Place the piece on a hard surface with a 1000 gram weight
resting uniformly on the entire overlap area and maintain at
140 to 190 F (60-88 C) for 2 hours. The actual
temperature to be maintained depends on the material being
tested but must be within the specified range. After cooling
to room temperature, the pieces must not separate without
tearing.

f. Reflectivity

1) Furnish reflective pavement marking material having
reflective values not less than those listed in the table
below. Reflective values are measured under Federal

Section 02581
Page 4 of 13
Specifications L-S-300C. The reflective values must be
measured on a 2 by 2-1/2 foot (.6 m by .75 m) panel at 85
incidence and be expressed as average candlepower per
foot (meter)-candle per 5 square feet (1.5 m 2) of material.

Divergence Angle White Yellow

0.2 Degrees 0.20 0.15
0.5 Degrees 0.15 0.10

2.2 WATERBORNE PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT

A. Waterborne Pavement Marking Paint

1. Furnish acrylic latex white and lead-free yellow waterborne pavement
marking paint meeting the following requirements.

a. Composition The exact composition is at the manufacturers
discretion except that the vehicle is to be 100% acrylic polymer
and the paint is not to contain any ingredient listed below.

1) Lead or chromate compounds; Mercury; Lead; Chromate
compounds; Chlorinated Solvents; Hydrolysable chlorine
derivatives; Ethylene based glycol ethers and their acetates.

2) Meet the following requirements:

White Yellow

Pigment, % solids 68 max 68 max
ASTM D-3723

Total Solids, % by weight 75 min 75 min
ASTM D-2369

Titanium Dioxide, lbs./gal. 1 lb. min. 0.15 lb. min
ASTM D-4563 & D-1394

% Non-volatile vehicle of 41 min. 41 min.
total vehicle weight
ASTM D-2697

VOC content, maximum 150 g/L 150 g/L
EPA Method 24

pH, min. 9.6 9.6

Section 02581
Page 5 of 13
ASTM E-70
White Yellow

Viscosity (Krebs Stormer), 80-95 80-95
K.U., ASTM D-562 @
77F, (25 C)

Grind, Hegman, min. 2 2
ASTM D-1210

Deviation in percent .30 .30
weight per gallon, max.
(from manufacturer
specified weight)

Daylight
1
85 59.1
2

Reflectance, min.
ASTM D-2805

Contrast Ratio, 15 mils 0.92 0.88
wet min., ASTM D-2805

1
The Y-Tristimulus value (luminance) is obtained using a
standardized Tristimulus colorimeter using a C illuminant at a two-
degree observation angle. The paint sample is drawn to a 15 mil
wet film thickness over a white substrate. The department uses a
Hunter Lab Miniscan XE Colorimeter and Leneta Corporation
Form 5C opacity charts to determine this value.

2
Color to match the V+ color on the Hale color chart 6%.

ASTM TEST WHITE AND YELLOW

D 711 mod.
1
Dry Time, 15 mil wet film, 65% RH, minutes, max. 10

D1640 mod.
2
Dry Through @ 90% RH, 15 mil wet film, minutes, max.
130

ASTM TEST WHITE AND YELLOW

D 2243
3
Freeze-Thaw, White and YellowPass

D 2486 Scrub Resistance, cycles min. 600

D-969 Bleeding Ratio, min0.95

Section 02581
Page 6 of 13

1
Use a wet film thickness of 15 plus or minus 1 mil.
Immediately place in a humidity chamber controlled at 65
3% relative humidity and 72.5 F 2.5 F (22.5C 1.4
C) with minimal airflow.

2
Apply a 15 1 mil thick film to a non-absorbent substrate
and place in a humidity chamber controlled at 855% R.H.
and 72.5F 2.5F (22.5C 1.4C). Determine dry
through time under ASTM D 1640 exerting the minimum
pressure needed to maintain contact with the thumb and
film.

3
See B(7), Freeze-Thaw Stability.

3) Titanium. Use Titanium Dioxide meeting ASTM D-476,
Type I or II.

b. Characteristics

1) Flexibility and Adhesion. Apply 15 mil wet film thickness
to a 3 by 5 (75 mm by 130 mm) tin panel. Dry at 77F
(25C) for 24 hours followed by two hours at 122F
(50C). Bend sample over a -inch (13 mm) mandrel.
Paint to adhere firmly without showing cracking or flaking.

2) Water Resistance. Apply 15 mil wet film thickness to a 4
by 8 (102 mm by 203 mm) glass plate. Dry at 77F (25C)
for 72 hours. Immerse in distilled water at 77F (25C) for
24 hours. Air dry for two hours on a flat surface. Paint to
not show blistering or adhesion loss.

3) Skinning and Lumps. Fill a pint (0.473 L) container full
of paint and seal tightly. After 72 hours, strain paint
through a 100 mesh screen. No lumps or skin retained on
the screen is permissible.

4) Settling. Fill a centrifuge tube with paint and revolve for
two hours at 1112 Newtons (250 ft/lbs). Separation from
top of vehicle to top of pigment not to exceed 13 mm (1/2-
inch).

5) Skinning. Fill pint (0.236 L) container half full of paint
and seal. Let stand for 24 hours. No skinning to be visible.

Section 02581
Page 7 of 13
6) Bleeding. When tested under ASTM D-969, paint to not
show perceptible bleeding when painted on a bituminous
surface.

7) Freeze-Thaw Stability. When tested under ASTM D-2243,
paint to not show coagulation or viscosity change
exceeding 10 Krebs units.

8) Static Heat Stability. Pour paint into a pint (473 mL) within
0.25 inches (6.4 mm) of the top, put the lid on and seal with
tape, and place the container in an oven heated to 60C
1C (140F 2F) for seven days. Equilibrate the paint at
standard conditions and thoroughly mix by stirring for at
least five minutes. Ensure the paint does not show signs of
livering, hard settling, coagulation, lumps or course
particles. Perform a consistency test meeting ASTM D-562
at 25C (77F). Paint viscosity to not vary 10 K.U. from the
original viscosity measured at 25C (77F).

c. Packaging and Marking. Meet subsection 714.04.9 requirements.

d. Sampling and Acceptance. Draw three samples meeting subsection
714.04.8 requirements.

e. Retro-reflective Glass Beads. Use silene-coated moisture resistant
glass beads meeting subsection 714.05 requirements.

f. Application. Follow the manufacturers requirements for pavement
cleaning and traffic paint application or as follows, whichever is
more restrictive.

1) Apply to a dry surface.

2) Clean the pavement of all loose rock, dirt, and debris
immediately before applying the traffic paint.

3) Do not heat the traffic paint to exceed 110F (43.3C)
before and during application.

4) Apply the traffic paint when the ambient temperature is
50F (10C) and rising. Stop application when the
temperature is 50F (10C) and dropping and when rain or
other weather adverse to the traffic paint during its drying
time is imminent.

Section 02581
Page 8 of 13
5) Apply traffic paint at 15 mils (0.38 mm) wet thickness in a
single application meeting subsection 620.03.3(A).

6) Remove and replace all defective pavement marking
damaged by weather at contractor expense.

7) Re-paint, at contractor expense, all striping represented by
paint samples where any specified property is outside 20%
of the specified value.

g. Reflective Glass Beads

1) Glass beads for use in reflectorizing traffic paint markings
on pavement by the drop-on method must be spherical and
transparent with smooth, lustrous surfaces. The beads, as
delivered, must be spherical and transparent with smooth,
lustrous surfaces. The beads, as delivered, must be free
from extraneous material and clumps of beads that cannot
be broken up easily when applying to the stripe.

2) Imperfections The glass beads cannot include more than
25% irregularly shaped particles when tested under ASTM
D1155. Assure the beads are free of scratches, pits,
milkiness, dark particles, and excessive air bubbles.

3) Color The glass beads must be colorless to the extent that
they do not impart a noticeable daytime hue to white
pavement markings.

4) Chemical Stability The beads must withstand refluxing in
distilled water in a Soxhlet extractor for 90 hours without
noticeable dulling of surface luster and not more than 2.5%
loss in weight.

5) Index of Refraction The glass from which the beads are
made must have an index of refraction of at least 1.50 by
the immersion method using tungsten light.

6) Gradation Assure the glass beads meet the following
gradation requirements when tested under the Standard
Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Glass Spheres,
ASTM D1214.

Section 02581
Page 9 of 13
Sieve No. Total Percent Passing
20 100%
30 75-95%
50 15-35%
100 0-5%

7) Packaging and Marking Furnish glass beads in bags
containing 50 lb. (26 kg) net. Assure the shipping bags are
moisture proof, paper-lined burlap bags meeting
specification ICC-36-C under Interstate Commerce
Commission Regulation Section 78-234. Mark each bag
with the name of contents, manufacturer of beads, and net
weight.

8) Certification Submit certification from a testing
laboratory approved by the Engineer certifying the beads
meet these expectations.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION OF PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIAL.

A. Apply plastic pavement marking materials only to clean, dry surfaces free of
paint, dirt, and foreign matter. On newly constructed surfaces to which a sealer
has been applied, clean the surface receiving the plastic pavement marking to
neutralize any acid and remove the sealer.

B. Apply following the manufacturers recommended procedures. Apply plastic
pavement marking materials only to surfaces at temperatures within the range
specified by the manufacturer for optimum adhesion.

C. When activators are required for the adhesive or when various special coatings are
required for different pavement surfaces, supply such information to the Engineer,
indicating special application procedures.

D. Assure the width and layout of stripes or the area of application of plastic
pavement markings and legends meet the dimensions shown in the contract
documents or standard drawings.

E. Before applying the plastic striping material, the Engineer will establish control
points on the roadway for striping alignment. The Engineer will establish control
points every 100 feet (30 meters) on tangent, at least every 100 feet (30 meters)
on curves of 2 degrees or less, and at 50-foot (15 meters) intervals for curves over
2 degrees. The Engineer will also designate other pavement striping locations

Section 02581
Page 10 of 13
such as stop bars, crosswalks, and the like. Maintain all lines within 2 (50 mm)
of established lines.

F. Place asphaltic surfacing on the roadway just before final compaction and roll into
the new surface during final completion. Assure pavement markings or legends
are flush with the finished surface.

3.2 PAINTING TRAFFIC LINES

A. Clean the surface to be painted for dirt, rocks, gravel and any other foreign matter.
Apply the paint by hand or mechanical means consistent with the scope of the job.
Assure the width and layout of stripes or the area to be painted meets the plans or
standard drawings.

B. Paint the top and traffic side of curbs at those locations where parking is to be
restricted, as shown in the contract documents or in the pavement marking
manual. Paint the top and traffic sides of all island curbs, median curb, and other
specified curb. Paint by uniformly applying one (1) coat of yellow traffic line
paint meeting the requirements of Section 02581.2.2.A.1 as applicable. Paint the
curb after it has cured at least 30 days after being cast. Apply the paint at a rate
that the curb surface is completely covered and hidden. Assure surfaces to be
painted are clean and free of all foreign matter before painting.

C. Before applying paint, mark the roadway between control points established by
the Engineer. The Engineer will establish such control points on tangent every
100 feet (30 meters) and on curves at least every 100 feet (30 meters) for under 2-
degree curves and at 50 foot (15 meters) intervals on curves over 2-degree
curvature. Maintain the line within 2 (50 mm) of the established lines. The
Engineer will also designate other pavement striping locations such as stop bars,
crosswalks, and the like.

D. Apply highway traffic striping during daylight hours when the air and pavement
temperatures are 40 F (4 C) or higher, the pavement surface is dry and the
weather is not foggy, rainy, or stormy.

E. Apply paint and glass beads with equipment manufactured specifically for that
purpose and using workmen experienced in operating such equipment. Locate the
bead applicator directly behind and synchronized with the paint applicator. Assure
both devices are shielded to avoid spraying of paint or loss of beads outside of the
designated width of line. Assure the equipment is also capable of painting a stripe
or stripes of the specified width with a tolerance of plus or minus inch (6.25
mm). In no passing zones, the machine must be able to paint three (3) stripes
simultaneously. For centerline painting, assure the machine is equipped with an
automatic skip control giving the specified broken-line pattern within a tolerance
of 6 (150 mm) over each cycle.

Section 02581
Page 11 of 13
F. Use hand-operated equipment to stripe stop bars, crosswalks, and other areas not
readily accessible to the pavement striping machine.

G. Apply the pavement striping paint at the following rates per gallon (liter):

1. Four-inch stripe (100 mm) at least 250 but not more than 275 linear feet
(meters) per gallon (liter).

2. Four-inch (100 mm) dashed stripe (9 foot [2.8 meter] stripe-15 foot [4.6
meter] gap) at least 665 but not more than 735 linear feet (meters) per
gallon (liter).

3. Four-inch (100 mm) dashed stripe (10 foot [3 meter] 30 foot [9 meter]
gap) at least 1000 but not more than 1100 linear feet (meters) per gallon
(liter).

H. Apply beads at the rate of 6 pounds (kg) per gallon (liter) of paint, plus or minus
0.1 pound.

I. For quality control, the Engineer will check the application at the beginning of
each days paint striping and as often as considered necessary. If equipment
settings fail to produce quality striping within the limits specified, stop striping
work until corrected.

J. Protect all markings until dry by placing approved guarding or warning devices as
necessary. Correct all markings smeared or otherwise damaged at no expense to
the owner.

K. Sufficient quantities of paint have been included in the contract to provide for an
interim application and a final application of traffic line paint. The need for
applying an interim application will be determined by the Engineer.

L. When plastic pavement markings are specified, use paint for the interim markings
of the specified color and apply as specified in the contract documents. The final
application must be plastic.

M. Apply two (2) full applications of the specified centerline and shoulder line
striping on open graded friction course and seal coat pavement surfaces meeting
the following table. Apply the second application a minimum of 30 days after the
first application.

Section 02581
Page 12 of 13
PAVEMENT STRIPING OGFC AND SEAL COATED SURFACES

Pavement Surface Type Number of
Applications*
Striping Application Direction of Travel
First Application Second Application

2 lane

2

Not specified

Apply in opposite
direction of first
application
2-way OGFC and
Seal Coated
Surfaces
4-way 2 Apply in same
direction as traffic
flow.
Apply in same
direction as traffic
flow.
*All transverse lines must receive two (2) applications applied in opposite directions.

3.3 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. As shown in the contract documents or directed by the Engineer, remove
temporary pavement markings or markings that are no longer appropriate to the
roadway.

B. Approved methods of removing markings include sand blasting with air or water;
high pressure water; steam or superheated water; mechanical grinders, sanders,
scrapers, brushes, burning, and the like.

C. Choose, subject to Engineer approval, the removal method best suited to the
existing condition of the paint and pavement surface.

D. No other methods of removal other than those specified here will be allowed. The
contractor may make written request to the Engineer for approval to use other
methods, materials, or equipment. The Engineer may subsequently disapprove
any prior approved method should it prove detrimental to the pavement surface or
inadequate in removing the markings.

E. Remove sand or other material deposited on the pavement resulting from
removing traffic markings as the work progresses. If the striping removal results
in light or discolored lines on the roadway, cover the areas with a thin asphalt fog
coat. Repair all damage to the pavement or surfacing caused by pavement
marking removal at no cost to the owner.

Section 02581
Page 13 of 13

4.1 GENERAL

A. Plastic pavement striping is measured for payment by the number of linear feet
(meters) of line of the specified width and thickness in place and accepted. Length
of dashed, longitudinal pavement line is the actual length placed, e.g. 25% of the
total roadway length where 10-30 lines gap ratio is used.

B. Plastic pavement marking words and symbols are measured for payment by the
number of square feet of words and symbols in place and accepted.

C. Painted traffic lines, words, and symbols are measured for payment by the number
of gallons (liters) of paint used and accepted.

D. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, removal of pavement markings is
measured for payment by the linear foot (meter). Words and symbols are
measured by the square foot (square meter) and converted to the equivalent linear
foot (meter) of 4 (100 mm) wide line.

E. Paint and painting of curbs, island curbs, and median curbs in accordance with
Section 02581.3.2 are measured by the actual gallons (liters) of paint used and
accepted.

F. Plastic pavement striping is paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot
(meter) of striping of the specified width and thickness.

G. Plastic pavement marking words and symbols are paid for at the contract unit
price per square foot (square meter) of plastic words and at the contract unit price
per square foot (square meter) of plastic words and symbols. Payment for plastic
lines, words, and symbols is full compensation for furnishing all necessary
materials and equipment and doing all required work.

H. Painting of traffic lines and words and symbols is paid for at the contract unit
price per gallon (liter) for Highway Traffic Striping complete in place,
including the furnishing and application of beads. Payment is full compensation
for all work necessary to complete the item.

I. Removal of pavement markings is paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot
(meter).

J. The cost of paint and the painting of curbs, island curbs, and median curbs in
accordance with Section 02581.3.2 are paid for at the contract unit price per
gallon (liter) for curb marking.

END OF SECTION

Section 02582 6
th
Edition
REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Page 1 of 9
SECTION 02582


PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is furnishing and applying hot thermoplastic pavement lines, words and
symbols in accordance with these specifications, the standard drawings, and
meeting the lines and dimensions shown in the Project Plans.

B. Hot thermoplastic is typically applied by three (3) different methods.

1. Spraying the material onto the pavement surface.

2. Extruding the material onto the pavement surface.

3. Extruding the material into a groove either cut or ground into the
pavement surface.

C. Method or methods of application required on the project will be specified in the
contract documents.

D. Furnish thermoplastic material that is either hydrocarbon or alkyd based as
specified in the contract documents. The Contractor may furnish one or the other
at his option if the type is not specified. However, only one type may be used on a
particular project.

1.2 REFERENCES

AASHTO M 249 Standard Specification for White and Yellow Reflective
Thermoplastic Striping Material

1.3 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Before delivering thermoplastic material to the project, furnish the Engineer
copies of the manufacturers product specification data. Material for which the
manufacturers product specification data does not meet all specified
requirements will not be approved for use.

B. The Engineer may at any time request a manufacturers sample or may take field
samples at the point of application for testing purposes. The Engineer will test
samples for one or any combination of specified requirements. Remove and

Section 02582
Page 2 of 9
replace material represented by a sample for which one or more test results fail to
meet specified requirements.

C. Furnish the Engineer all instructions from the thermoplastic manufacturer for
preparation of the surface and application of material proposed for use before
application. Instructions must include, as a minimum, types of equipment,
approved work methods and procedures, material application temperatures,
ambient temperature and weather limitations, precautions, and all other
requirements necessary for successful installation and satisfactory performance.
Do not place material for which manufacturers installation instructions are not
complete or are not available.

PART 2: PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish white and yellow thermoplastic striping material meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M249 except as modified and supplemented herein.

B. Color

1. Assure the color yellow marking is reasonably close to color chip 33538
of Federal Standard No. 595A, Table 5. Quantity and type of yellow
pigment is at the option of the manufacturer, providing all other
requirements of this specification and AASHTO M249 are met.

2. Use yellow pigment that is heat-resistant and capable of maintaining the
specified color characteristics after being heated to manufacturers
recommended application temperature.

3. Assure the color of white marking material is reasonably close to color
chip 37875 of Federal Standard No. 595A, Table 9. White material cannot
have any tint or coloration after weathering.

C. Glass Beads

1. Use striping material containing at least 24% by weight glass beads
meeting requirements of Section 02582.2.2.A. Submit certification from
the manufacturer stating this requirement is met for each batch of material
used on the project.

D. Spraying Consistency

1. If the material specified on the plans is to be hot applied by spraying
methods, assure the consistency of the thermoplastic material allows for
excellent spraying characteristics while meeting the specified reflectivity,

Section 02582
Page 3 of 9
durability, color, chemical composition and properties, line and edge
quality, tolerance, thickness, and bonding requirements as specified by the
manufacturer.

2.2 HYDROCARBON BASED

A. Furnish hydrocarbon based thermoplastic striping material meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M249 except as modified and supplemented herein.

B. Specific Gravity

1. Specific gravity cannot exceed 2.15. Actual specific gravity of material, as
determined by test on samples, cannot vary from manufacturers product
specification by more than 0.5.

C. Composition

1. AASHTMO M249, Table 1, composition is replaced with the following:

Component White Yellow

Binder, Hydrocarbon Base

16.0% min.

16.0% min.
Glass Beads 24% min. 24% min.
Titanium Dioxide a) Anatase 5.0% min. b) Rutile 5.0% min.
Calcium Carbonate &
Inert Fillers

42% max.

See note.
Yellow Pigments See note.

a. Note: Quantity of yellow pigments and calcium carbonate and
inert fillers is at the option of the manufacturer, providing all other
requirements of this specification are met. Yellow pigment must be
heat resistant and color stable at recommended application
temperature.

b. Have the manufacturer furnish certification to the Owner that the
titanium dioxide contains a minimum of 5.0% each of anatase and
rutile for all batches of material used on the project.

D. Physical Characteristics

1. The following modifications are made to Section 4.3 of AASHTO M249:

a. 4.3.1 Change 2180+2C (4250+3F) to manufacturers

Section 02582
Page 4 of 9
b. 4.3.2 Change 2110+7C(412.50+12.5F) to manufacturers

c. 4.3.3 Change 218C (425F) to manufacturers recommended
application temperature.

d. 4.3.4 Change 2180+2C(4250+3F) to manufacturers
recommended application temperature. Change -
9.40+13C(1543F) to 20C(-40F). Add to last sentence: after
being exposed to ambient room temperature of 20-23C (690-740F)
after cooling.

e. 4.3.5. Change 2180+2C(4250+3F) to manufacturers

f. 4.3.6 Softening point After heating the thermoplastic material for
four hours 0+5 min. at 2180+2C(4250+3F) and testing in
accordance with ASTM D36, the materials shall have a softening
point of 102.50+9.5C(2150+15F).

g. 4.3.7 Change 2180+2C(4250+3F) to manufacturers

h. 4.3-9 Rescind this article.

i. Change 21147C(412-5412.5F) to manufacturers recommended
application temperature.

j. Change 21147C(412.50+12.5F) to manufacturers
recommended application temperature in subsection 6.1.

2.3 ALKYD BASED

A. Furnish Alkyd based thermoplastic striping material meeting the requirements of
AASHTO M249.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Applicable requirements of Section 02581.3.2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND
MARKERS apply to installation of thermoplastic striping material.

Section 02582
Page 5 of 9
B. Perform surface preparation and material application following the
manufacturers detailed instructions. Furnish the Engineer a copy of the
manufacturers detailed instructions before starting work.

C. When thermoplastic markings are to be applied to existing asphalt pavement,
which is open to use by traffic, place a primer or tack coat before applying
thermoplastic material. Use a thin asphaltic tack completely over the surfaces of
depressions or finished pavement surfaces the thermoplastic pavement markings
are to be applied.

3.2 SURFACE AND TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply thermoplastic material only during optimal weather conditions, as
recommended by the manufacturer.

B. The following requirements for air temperature and surface conditions apply
unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Minimum allowable ambient air temperature required for application is
60F(15C). Assure the pavement surface is dry (exhibiting absolutely no
dampness by the inspectors sight/touch inspection) during application.

3.3 TEMPERATURE MONITORING

A. Assure all equipment used to melt or apply thermoplastic material has
permanently attached thermometers providing a true temperature of thermoplastic
contained therein. Assure monitoring devices are easily accessible and readable
using a dial or other indication of the material temperature on a continuous basis.

B. When using heating equipment to pre-melt or apply thermoplastic of the oil bath
heating type, provide indirect heat application to thermoplastic material that
reduces risk of overheating and provides a more consistent application
temperature. Assure a rotating agitator is an integral feature of pre-melt kettles to
provide stirring of thermoplastic material.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Use the method of application for thermoplastic striping material whether
sprayed, top applied extruded, or inlaid extruded as recommended by the
manufacturer. Finish lines, words, and symbols to meet the requirements specified
herein for width, length, thickness, and edge quality.

1. Extruded (Top Applied)

Section 02582
Page 6 of 9
a. Apply thermoplastic striping material specified to be extruded onto
the pavement surface following the manufacturers detailed
instructions.

2. Extruded (Inlaid)

a. Install thermoplastic striping material specified to be extruded and
inlaid into pavement surface by sawing or grinding grooves into
the finished pavement surface to dimensions and shapes specified.
Assure the edges of thermoplastic markings are straight, uniform,
and free of gaps between asphalt and thermoplastic that could
allow water to enter beneath markings. To facilitate edge sealing,
depressions for lines may be of a slightly reduced width. Assure
finished extruded lines are wider than grooved widths by a inch
(6.25 mm) minimum at each edge within ranges shown by the
following table.

ALLOWABLE MARKING/GROOVE
TOLERANCE RANGE
Specified Width Groove Width Line Width
4 (100 mm) 3-3/4 4 (93.75mm-100mm) 4 4-1/2(100mm-112.5mm)
8 (200 mm) 7-1/2 4 (190mm-200mm) 8 8-1/2 (200mm-212.5mm)
24 (600mm) 23-1/2 24 (590mm-600mm) 24 25-1/2 (600mm-638mm)

b. Groove widths as close to the plan specified widths as extrusion
shoes or other devices used will produce within ranges indicated.
Groove line lengths as specified in the plans and standards. Assure
grooved configurations for words and symbols match those shown
in FHWAs Standard Alphabets manual within a tolerance of
(6.25 mm) per 4 (100 mm) of width required at any point of the
configuration but larger than depressions (using this same
tolerance range for application of thermoplastic) to obtain the
required edge sealing. Cover and seal all grooved edges with the
thermoplastic. Sweep and blow out with compressed air all
depressions or wash them clean and free of dirt, rocks, gravel, and
all other foreign matter before placing the thermoplastic material.
Fill grooves with thermoplastic within 24 hours after being cut into
the pavement. Keep traffic off the grooves and re-clean grooves
before applying the thermoplastic.

c. Groove the pavement surface and apply the thermoplastic in
accordance with the manufacturers detailed instructions.

B. Spraying

1. Spray the thermoplastic material specified in accordance with the
manufacturers detailed instructions.

Section 02582
Page 7 of 9

C. Glass Bead Application

1. Immediately after application of thermoplastic material, apply an
additional quantity of glass beads by drop-on methods at 6 lbs. (2.7ko)
minimum per 100 sq. ft. (30 sq. mtrs.) of thermoplastic material applied.

2. Increase the bead application rate as directed by the Engineer.

D. Protection of Markings

1. Protect newly applied pavement markings from tracking during the setting
period specified in Article 4.3.2 of AASHTO M249 using traffic control
devices.

3.5 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

A. Finish the markings to have a uniform cross section of the thickness specified.
Thickness specified in the contract documents is minimum hardened thickness.
Assure lines have a sharp cutoff on both sides at each end and at all edges for
words and symbols. Assure lateral widths to be used for lines are within the
ranges shown by the Allowable Marking/Groove Tolerance Range table in
Section 02582 of these specifications. Once actual widths to be used are selected,
assure they are consistent and uniform throughout the project for each width used.
Lateral tolerance cannot be greater than inch (6.25 mm) of actual widths
selected for use by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Assure specified
broken line patterns have a linear tolerance of 6 inches (150 mm) over each cycle.

3.6 PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING JOINTS

A. Apply hot extruded thermoplastic to provide the minimum number of joints
possible.

B. Transverse markings can have a minimum of one joint per line.

C. Apply words and symbols without joints within each symbol or letter of the word
except those letters made with one or more straight lines (A,L,N,T etc.) and
combination arrows (through and right or through and left, etc.). Those letters
may be applied with one pass per leg. Combination arrows may be applied with
one pass for each arrowhead of the marking.

D. Place longitudinal lines of 4-inch (100 mm) and 8-inch (200 mm) width
(generally those approximately parallel to the road centerline) in one pass without
longitudinal or cross-joints. Cross joints are acceptable only if lines exceed 100
feet (30 meters) in length, or for shorter lines which require a change of direction
necessitating an adjustment for the path of application equipment.

Section 02582
Page 8 of 9

E. Extrude all lines of 24-inch (600 mm) width with one pass of application
equipment, without longitudinal joints, and with a maximum of one transverse
joint unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

F. If joints are necessary, make them have a neat professional appearance without
gaps or unevenness and completely seal the joints from moisture penetration.

3.7 PATCHING

A. Areas of markings requiring repair or patching may have thermoplastic from that
same batch used for original application applied either mechanically or by hand
and beads reapplied. Assure the finished appearance matches the original
extrusions and is within the shape of markings specified.

3.8 CLEANING AND TRIMMING OF MARKINGS

A. Irregularities of markings may be removed by methods that do not chip, crack, or
otherwise damage the marking itself or cause de-lamination of the thermoplastic.
Use the methods recommended by the manufacturer without damaging the asphalt
or thermoplastic.


4.1 GENERAL

A. Thermoplastic striping material is measured for payment by the number of linear
feet of line of the specified color and width in place and accepted.

B. Words and symbols are measured for payment by the number of square feet
(square meters) of words and symbols in place and accepted.

C. Thermoplastic striping material is paid for at contract unit price per linear foot of
striping of specified color and width.

D. Words and symbols are paid for at the contract unit price per square foot (square
meter) for the configuration and size shown in the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices and Supplemental Manual, Standard Alphabets for Highway
Signs and Pavement Markings.

E. Consideration of payment will not be given for the tolerances allowed by Section
02581 of these specifications.

F. Consideration of payment will not be given for installed thickness exceeding that
specified in the plans or special provisions. The Contractor is to evaluate

Section 02582
Page 9 of 9
pavement surface texture, operational equipment and methods, and any other
factors affecting installation of thermoplastic marking thickness and compensate
for them in the unit prices bid for thermoplastic pavement markings.

END OF SECTION
Sections - 2600
Water Distributions

WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 02660 Water Distribution

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 1 of 21

SECTION 02660

WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all water main pipe and fittings meeting the Contract documents or
specified as follows.

B. Furnish and install valves and fire hydrants for water mains, together with related
appurtenances.

C. Construct water services, including water service piping, tapping mains,
corporation stops, curb stops and related items.

1.2 CERTIFICATION BY MANUFACTURER:

A. Furnish a manufacturers certification covering all pipe and fittings furnished,
certifying that the pipe and fittings meet applicable specifications.

1.3 REFERENCES

ANSI B16.1 Tapping Sleeves
ASTM B88-62 Copper Pipe
ASTM PE3406-3408 Polyethylene Pressure Pipe
AWWA B300 Hypochlorite for Disinfecting
AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine for Disinfecting
AWWA C104 Ductile Iron Cement-Mortar Lining
AWWA C110 Ductile Iron Fittings
AWWA C111 Ductile Iron Joints
AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe
AWWA C153 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings
AWWA C301 Concrete Cylinder Pipe
AWWA C500 Gate Valves
AWWA C502 Fire Hydrants
AWWA C504 Butterfly Valves
AWWA C509 Gate Valves
AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C900 PVC Water Main Pipe

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 2 of 21

1.4 STANDARD DRAWINGS:

A. Standard Drawings in Appendix A applicable to this section are as follows:

Standard Drawing No. 02660-1 Thrust Blocking for Water Main Fittings
Standard Drawing No. 02660-2 Water and Sewer Main Separation
Standard Drawing No. 02660-3 Thrust Blocking for Water Main Valves
Standard Drawing No. 02660-4 Fire Hydrant Setting
Standard Drawing No. 02660-5 Hydrant Location Detail
Standard Drawing No. 02660-6 Water Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02660-7 Blowoff Valve

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish Water Main pipe and fittings as specified in the Contract Documents and
meeting the material and testing requirements of this Section. Furnish fittings and
service line piping of the same material and design as the water main pipe unless
specified otherwise. Pipe strength classifications are shown on plan drawings
and/or are listed in the Contract Documents.

B. References made to ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, USASI or AASHTO designations
are the latest revision at the time of call for bids.

2.2 PIPE MATERIALS

A. General

1. Furnish the pipe specified in the contract documents meeting the materials
and testing requirements as outlined in this section.

2. Assure all pipe is clearly marked showing type, class and/or thickness.
Lettering must be legible and permanent under normal handling and
storage conditions.

B. Ductile Iron Pipe

1. Furnish Class 51 wall thickness meeting AWWA C151, American
National Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe.

2. Use underground pipe and fittings having mechanical or push-on joints
meeting AWWA C 111.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 3 of 21

3. Assure the pipe interior is cement mortar lined meeting AWWA C104
requirements. Assure the outside pipe surface for underground service is
bituminous coal tar base coated 1 mil thick.

4. Fittings

a. Furnish fittings meeting one of the following;

1) Class 250 fittings meeting AWWA C110, latest edition,
Gray-Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings For Water And Other
Liquids

2) Compact fittings meeting AWWA C153.

5. Joints

a. Assure joints are mechanical or push-on joints meeting AWWA
C111. Assure the fitting interior is cement mortar lined meeting
AWWA C104. Assure the fitting exterior is bituminous tar coated
1 mil thick. Use compact fittings having a rated working pressure
of 350 psi (2410 kPa) following manufacturer recommended
laying lengths.

6. Couplings

a. Use pipe couplings meeting one of the following:

1) Cast type with cast iron or ductile iron sleeves and
malleable or ductile iron flanges.

2) Gray iron or ductile iron, mechanical joint solid sleeves,
with a minimum 12 inch length (30 cm).

3) Limit use of the first type to a maximum 16 inch (40 cm)
diameter. Use the manufacturers standard gasket for use in
potable water systems. Use stainless steel bolts and nuts.
Coating to be manufacturers standard.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe

1. Furnish PVC water main pipe meeting AWWA C900 requirements, made
to ductile iron O.D.s for Push-On joints. Assure pipe joints are bell and
spigot having an elastomeric gasket. Use DR 25 Class 165 pipe.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 4 of 21

D. Concrete Cylinder Pipe

1. Furnish prestressed, reinforced concrete water pipe, steel cylinder type
meeting AWWA C301 and having rubber gasketed bell and spigot joints.
Furnish the pipe class, marking, lengths, etc. specified in the Contract
Documents.

E. Water Service Pipe

1. Use copper or polyethylene pipe in water service line construction as
specified in the contract documents and meeting the following
specifications.

a. Furnish service pipe of the size or sizes specified. Service lines are
considered 2-inch (51mm) size and under. Service lines over 2-
inch (51 mm) size are considered as water mains and are specified
under the applicable sections.

b. Furnish and install the service pipe from the main to the property
line installing a curb stop and curb box at the property line. Meet
the water service installation requirements of Standard Drawing
02660-6.

c. Copper Service Pipe

1) Use copper, type K, meeting Federal Specification WW-T-
799 or ASTM B88-62.

d. Polyethylene Service Pipe

1) Use pipe meeting AWWA SpecificationC901,
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings, 1/2
inch through 3 inch for Water and ASTM PE3406-3408.
PE pipe to be pressure tubing meeting Table 6 requirements
of said specification. Use class 200 with a DR of 7
Polyethylene pipe.

2.3 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES:

A. Use tapping sleeves meeting either:

1. Gray iron or ductile iron, split-sleeve, mechanical joint type with end and
side gaskets,

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 5 of 21

2. Split-body type with circular gasket forming a seal around the
circumference of the outlet.

3. Assure both types have a class 125, ANSI B16.1 outlet flange, are rated
for a minimum 150 psi (1030 kPa) working pressure and contain a
threaded test plug on the neck or body of the tapping sleeve. Assure
gaskets are manufacturers standard for use in potable water systems. Use
stainless steel bolts and nuts. Assure mechanical joint type is fusion-
bonded, 12-mil thickness, and epoxy coated. Limit the use of mechanical
joint type to metal pipe. Assure tapping valves meet the applicable
requirements for gate valves, as outlined in this section, with flanged inlets
compatible with the flange of the tapping sleeve and mechanical joint
outlet.

2.4 CORPORATION STOPS

A. Furnish brass corporation stops with inlet end to meet tapping requirements and
flared outlet for copper tubing or pressure coupling for polyethylene tubing.

2.5 SERVICE CLAMPS

A. Furnish flat, double strap, bronze metal service clamps with Neoprene gaskets and
corporation stop threads. Assure service clamps for PVC provide full support
around the pipe circumference with a bearing area of the width along the axis of
the pipe so the pipe is not distorted when the clamp is tightened.

2.6 CURB STOPS

A. Furnish curb stops with bronze plug, tee head key with Minneapolis pattern and
screw box mount.

2.7 CURB BOXES

A. Furnish extension type curb boxes having a 6- 1/2 foot (2 meters) extended
length.

2.8 VALVES

A. Gate Valves

1. Furnish iron body gate valves, resilient seat or double disc gate valves
with non-rising stems with design, construction and pressure rating
meeting AWWA C500 or AWWA C509 requirements and the following.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 6 of 21

2. Assure stem seals are double O ring seals capable of replacing the seal
above the stem collar with the valve under pressure in full open position.

3. Furnish gate valves for underground installation equipped with a 2-inch
(31 mm) square operating nut for key operation. All valves to open
counterclockwise. Valves to be equipped with push-on joints or
mechanical joints for pipe connections.

B. Butterfly Valves

1. Furnish Class 150, rubber seated, butterfly valves for water distribution
systems meeting AWWA C504 requirements. Valves to be equipped with
mechanical joint ends and lubricated screw type operators designed for
underground service.

2. Rubber valve seats to be replaceable without disassembling the valve and
not interrupted by the shafting. Rubber seats may be retained on the disc
edge by stainless steel clamping instead of bonding to the valve body.
Assure shaft packing is the self-adjusting, permanent type.

3. Assure underground service operators are permanently lubricated, screw
type, totally enclosed and watertight constructed. Assure overload
protection is incorporated in the operator allowing 450 foot-pounds (610 j)
input torque at full-open and full-closed positions without damaging the
operator or valve. Provide a 2-inch (51mm) square operating nut and valve
box for operating the valve. Valves to open counter clockwise. Furnish
performance certification, leakage and hydrostatic tests as specified in
AWWA C504. Assure valve manufacturer has at least five years
experience manufacturing waterworks and distribution valves.

2.9 VALVE BOXES

A. Furnish cast iron valve boxes, 5-1/4-inch (13 cm) diameter, adjustable valve
boxes with the required base for the valve size used. Assure valve boxes are screw
type and of the specified length for the pipe bury. Assure the valve box cast iron
cover has an arrow indicating the opening direction and stamped with the word
Water.

2.10 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Furnish fire hydrants meeting AWWA C502; Standard Specifications for Fire
Hydrants for Ordinary Water Works Service, and the Contract requirements.

B. Furnish hydrants with 5-1/4-inch (13 cm) valve openings, 6-inch (15 cm)
mechanical joint, flanged or push-on inlet, one pumper connection and two, 2-1/2-

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 7 of 21

inch (63 cm) hose connections. Assure hose nozzle threads meet ASA
Specification B26 for National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Threads, 7 1/2
threads per inch. Assure pumper nozzle size and threads match owners existing
pattern. Furnish National Standard operating nut. Furnish hydrants opening
counter clockwise and having an arrow on the hydrant top designating the
opening direction.

C. Furnish Compression type hydrants with safety flange and safety stem coupling
above the ground line permitting repair without shutting off the water. Assure
hydrants are of the dry top design with two or more O rings sealing the water
from the operating mechanism. Assure the operating mechanism is automatically
lubricated from a sealed, self-contained lubricating reservoir.

D. Paint the hydrant portion above the ground line meeting the owners standards.
Furnish hydrants for 6.5 foot (2 meters) bury.

2.11 SPECIAL FITTINGS

A. Furnish special fittings meeting the Contract Documents. The Engineer will
specify gasket materials for contaminated soil or special groundwater situations.

2.12 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. Furnish polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105,
Polyethylene Encasement for Fray and Ductile Cast Iron Pipe for Water and
other Liquids.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR WATER MAINS

A. This work includes all excavation, backfilling, disposal of surplus and unsuitable
material, and all other work incidental to trench construction, including
excavation for valves, fittings, hydrants, thrust blocks or other pipeline structures
and not classified as Structural Excavation.

B. Perform this work in accordance with Section 02221: TRENCH EXCAVATION
AND BACKFILL FOR PIPELINES & APPURTENANT STRUCTURES.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 8 of 21

3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION FOR WATER MAINS

A. General

1. Install pipe following the manufacturers specifications and instructions.
Provide all tools and equipment required to install each type of pipe used.

2. The Contractor is responsible for all contractor furnished material.
Replace all defective material or material damaged by handling after
delivery by the manufacturer. This includes the furnishing of all materials
and labor required to replace installed material discovered damaged or
defective before final acceptance of the work, or during the guarantee
period.

3. Store all material safely and to prevent damage. Keep pipe interior and
other accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.

4. Deliver and distribute all Contractor furnished pipe at the site. Load and
unload pipe, fittings, specials, valves and accessories to prevent damage.
Do not permit pipe handled on skidways to skid or roll against pipe
already on the ground.

5. When distributing material at the work site, lay each piece adjacent to its
installation point. Repair or replace all damaged pipe at Contractors
expense on the jobsite.

B. Dewatering of Trench

1. Remove all water in the trench during pipe laying and maintain a dry
trench until the pipe ends are sealed. Do not permit the pipe to float. Do
not allow any trench water to enter the pipe at any time.

C. Laying of Pipe

1. Inspect the pipe and pipe coating for damage or defects before installation.
Lay pipe without damaging the pipe coating. Repair all pipe coating
damage following the manufacturers instructions before laying the pipe.
When using belt slings to lower the pipe into the trench, remove the slings
without damaging the pipe coating.

2. Lay pipe to the specified lines and grades with fittings and valves at the
required locations. Plumb all valve stems.

3. Grade and alignment on un-graded streets will be provided using hubs set
parallel to the pipe line, and on graded streets from established points on

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 9 of 21

the existing curbs or sidewalks, when directed by the Engineer. Excavate
pipe trenches to the lines and grades given or to the standard cover depth
specified. Transfer lines and grades to the pipe from hubs or from existing
concrete curbs or sidewalks as an incidental part of this work.

4. Use implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer for the
safe and convenient prosecution of the work. Carefully lower all pipe,
fittings and valves into the trench using a derrick, rope or other tools or
equipment, without damaging pipe materials and protective coatings and
linings. Do not drop or dump materials into the trench.

5. Take every precaution to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe
as it is placed in the line. During laying operations, do not permit debris,
tools, clothing or other materials to be placed in the pipe. At times when
pipe laying is not in progress, close the open ends of the pipe using a
watertight plug or other approved methods to prevent material entering the
pipe.

6. Place pipe bedding in the bottom of the trench meeting Section 02221;
TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPELINES &
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES. Voids may be left in the bedding
material to remove pipe slings and for pipe bells to allow support along
the full length of the pipe barrel.

7. Long radius curves, either horizontal or vertical, may be laid with standard
pipe with deflections at the joints where approved. If the pipe is shown
curved on the plans and no special fittings are shown, assume that the
curves can be made by deflection of the joints with standard lengths of
pipe. If shorter lengths are required, the plan will indicate maximum
lengths that can be used.

8. The Engineer will determine the method of deflection or curving where
required but not specified. No additional payment will be made for laying
pipe on planned curves, nor for field changes involving standard pipe
lengths deflected at the joints.

9. Do not exceed the applicable material and joint specifications of AWWA
or the pipe manufacturers recommendations at pipe joints for various
types of pipe. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on a curve, joint the pipe
in a straight alignment and then deflect to the curved alignment. Excavate
trenches to accommodate deflections and curves.

10. Construct reaction or thrust blocks at all tees, plugs, valves, reducers, caps
and at bends deflecting 22-1/2 degrees or more. Construct thrust blocks at
tapping sleeves where the outlet diameter exceeds one-half the diameter of

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 10 of 21

the main being tapped. Limit using metal rods or straps for thrust restraint
to those specified on the plans, or where the use of concrete thrust blocks
would be impractical. Do not use metal rods or straps without the
Engineers approval. Construct reaction blocks from concrete having a
minimum compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch (14,000
kPa) at 28 days. Place blocking between undisturbed ground and the
fitting to be anchored, as shown on Standard Drawing 02660-1. Place the
blocking so that the pipe and fitting joints are accessible for repair.

11. Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces in a neat and
workmanlike manner without damaging the pipe or coating and leaving a
smooth end at right angles to the pipe axis. Do not cut pipe using an
oxyacetylene torch.

D. Pipe Jointing

1. Rubber Gasket, Push-On Joints

a. Follow the manufacturers recommendations for jointing of pipe
and fittings with a rubber gasket, push-on type. Wipe the rubber
gasket and gasket seat inside the bell clean with a cloth. Wipe the
plain end of the adjoining pipe clean, lubricate and insert into the
bell to make contact with the gasket. Force the plain end home
using a crow bar, fork tool, or jack assembly.

2. Mechanical Joints

a. Thoroughly brush the bell and the outside of the spigot of the
mechanical joint fitting with a wire brush to remove all loose rust
or other foreign material just before assembly. Brush the cleaned
surfaces with soapy water just before slipping the gasket over the
spigot end and into the bell.

b. Center the spigot end of the pipe or fitting in the bell before
jointing is begun. Once the gasket is in place, bring the gland up
toward the pipe flange evenly, maintaining approximately the same
distance between the gland and the face of the flange at all points
around the socket. Partially tighten the bolts, alternately around the
socket, maintaining approximately equal tension until the final
tension is reached.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 11 of 21

c. Use the following bolt torque range for the joints:

Bolt Size Range of Torque
Inch (millimeters) Ft. - Lb. (joules)
5/8 (16) 40 - 60 (54-81)
3/4 (19) 60 90 (81-122)
1 (25) 70 100 (95-135)
1-1/4 (32) 90 120 (122-163)

d. Apply the torque loads with torque measuring or indicating
wrenches, or apply using regular socket wrenches, checked with
torque wrenches.

e. If the joint is not sealed using the maximum torque indicated
above, disassemble and re assemble the joint after thorough
cleaning. Do not overstress bolts to provide the seal.

3. Connections to Existing Mains

a. Make all connections to existing water mains in use unless
otherwise specified. Furnish the special fittings, as shown on the
plans, and all other material required. Make all necessary
excavations to assure gradual transition between the new and
existing water main, and perform all necessary backfilling.

b. Where the connection of new work to old requires a service
interruption and customer notification, the Engineer and the
Contractor are to mutually agree upon a date for connections to
permit adequate time to assemble labor and materials, and to notify
all affected customers. All notifications are the Contractors
responsibility.

3.3 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. Wrap all direct bury cast iron or ductile iron pipe and fittings including hydrants,
valve boxes, curb boxes, and all other metal parts and surfaces, in polyethylene
encasement.

3.4 TESTING, CLEANING & DISINFECTING WATER MAINS, VALVES & FITTINGS:

A. Hydrostatic and Leakage Testing

1. Perform hydrostatic and leakage testing in accordance with AWWA C600.
Once the pipe is laid and backfilled, test for at least 2 hours, all newly laid
pipe, or any valved section, to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 12 of 21

the normal operating pressure at the test point or 1.25 times the normal
operating pressure at the highest point along the test section.

2. Slowly fill the pipe with water, purging all air, and apply the test pressure
using a pump hooked up so that the pressure and leakage can be measured.
To purge the pipe of air during the test, it is necessary to tap the pipe at its
highest points if permanent air vents, water services, hydrants, etc. are not
located at the high points. Use corporation stops for this purpose. Furnish
the pump connections, gauges, stops, and all necessary apparatus for
testing.

3. Disassemble and reassemble all joints showing leakage after thorough
cleaning. Remove and replace all cracked or defective pipes or fittings
discovered in during the pressure test with sound material and repeat the
test.

4. Conduct the leakage test concurrently with the pressure test for 2 hours.
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water supplied into the pipe, or any
valved section thereof, necessary to maintain pressure within 5 PSI of the
pressure test after the pipe has been filled with water and purged of air.

5. The pipe installation will be rejected if the leakage exceeds that
determined by the following formula:

L = SD( P )
1/2

148,000

6. In which L equals the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the
length of pipe tested, in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in
inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds
per square inch gauge.

7. Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage exceeding that specified
above, locate and repair the defective joints until the leakage is within the
specified allowance.

8. Conduct the pressure and leakage tests with the Engineer present.

9. When testing against closed metal-seated valves, an additional leakage per
closed valve of 0.0078 gallon per hour per inch of nominal valve size is
allowed. Repair all visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage.

10. Pressure test tapping sleeves after installation and before tapping.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 13 of 21

B. Cleaning Water Mains

1. Before chlorination, except when hypochlorite tablets are used, flush the
mains thoroughly after the pressure and leakage test are completed.

2. It is understood that such flushing removes only the lighter solids and
cannot be relied upon to remove heavy material allowed to get into the
main during laying. Use a minimum flushing velocity in the main of 2.5
feet per second (0.7 meters/second). If no hydrant is installed at the end of
the main, provide a tap of the size to produce a velocity in the main of at
least 2.5 feet per second (0.7 meters/second). Table 2 shows the rates of
flow required to produce a velocity of 2.5 feet per second (0.7
meters/second) in various size pipes.

TABLE 1
REQUIRED FLOW AND OPENINGS TO FLUSH PIPELINES
1/

(40 psi (276 kPa) Residual Pressure in Water Main)

Hydrant Outlet

Pipe Diam.
Inches (cm)
Flow Required
To Produce
2.5 fps (approx.)
Velocity in Main,
gpm (epm)
Size of Tap
(inch)(mm)
1(25)1-1/2(38)2(51)
number of taps
on pipe
2/

Number
Size
in. (mm)
4 (10) 100 (380) 1 1 2-1/2 (63)
6 (15) 200 (760) 1 1 2-1/2 (63)
8 (20) 400 (1510) 2 1 1 2-1/2 (63)
10 (25) 600 (2270) 3 2 1 2-1/2 (63)
12 (30) 900 (3400) 2 2 2-1/2 (63)
16 (41) 1600 (6060) 4 2 2-1/2 (63)

1. With a 40 psi (267 kPa) pressure in the main with the hydrant flowing to atmosphere, a 2-1/2-inch
(63mm) hydrant outlet will discharge approximately 1000 gpm(3786 epm) and a 4-1/2-inch
(114mm) hydrant nozzle will discharge approximately 2500 gpm (9463 epm).

2. Number of taps on pipe based on discharge through 5 feet (1.5 meters)of galvanized iron (GI) pipe
with one 90 elbow.

3. Exercise extreme care and conduct a thorough inspection during the water
main laying to prevent and detect small stones, pieces of concrete,
particles of material, or other foreign material that may have entered the
mains. To remove this material, flush and inspect all hydrants on the lines
to assure that the entire valve operating mechanism of each hydrant is in
good condition.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 14 of 21

4. In 24-inch (61 cm) or larger diameter mains, in addition to flushing,
broom-sweep the main, removing all sweepings before chlorinating the
main.

C. Disinfecting Water Mains

1. General

a. Disinfect the water mains subject to the Engineers approval in
accordance with AWWA C651, Disinfecting Water Mains, and
these specifications, before placing the main in service. Keep the
interior of all pipe, fittings and appurtenances free from dirt, heavy
and foreign particles.

2. Forms of Chlorine

a. The forms of chlorine that may be used, subject to the approval of
the Engineer, are:

1) Liquid chlorine containing 100 percent available chlorine
under pressure in steel containers. Meet AWWA B301
requirements and use only in combination with appropriate
gas-flow chlorinators and ejectors.

2) Sodium hypochlorite in liquid form containing
approximately 5 to 15 percent available chlorine. Meet
AWWA B300 requirements.

3) Calcium hypochlorite in granular form or in 5g tablets
containing approximately 65 percent available chlorine by
weight. Meet AWWA B300 requirements.

3. Methods of Chlorination

a. Three (3) methods of chlorination may be used. The tablet method
gives an average chlorine dose of approximately 25 mg./L; the
continuous feed method gives a 24 hour chlorine residual of not
less than 10 mg./L; and the slug method provides a three hour
exposure of not less than 50 mg./L free chlorine.

1) Tablet Method

a) This method may be used if the pipes and
appurtenances are kept clean and dry during
construction.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 15 of 21

b) During construction, place calcium hypochlorite
granules at the upstream end of the first section of
pipe, at the upstream end of each branch main, and
at 500-foot (150 meter) intervals. Use the quantity
of granules shown in Table 2.

c) Warning: Do not use this procedure on solvent
welded plastic or on screwed joint steel pipe
because of fire or explosion hazard from the
reaction of the joint compounds with the calcium
hypochlorite.

TABLE 2
OUNCES OF CALCIUM HYPOCHLORITE GRANULES TO BE PLACED AT
BEGINNING OF MAIN AND AT EACH 500-FOOT (150 METER) INTERVAL

Pipe Diameter .
Calcium Hypochlorite
Granules .
Inches (cm) oz
4 (10) 0.5
6 (15) 1.0
8 (20) 2.0
12 (30) 4.0
16 and larger (41) 8.0

d) During construction, place 5g calcium hypochlorite
tablets in each section of pipe and also place one
tablet in each hydrant, hydrant branch and other
appurtenance. Use the number of 5g tablets for each
pipe section required to provide a minimum
chlorine concentration of 25 mg/L. Appendix B
provides information on the number of tablets
required for commonly used sizes of pipe. Attach
tablets to the inside of the pipe using an adhesive
such as Permatex No.1 or equal. Assure no adhesive
is on the tablet except on the broad side attached to
the surface of the pipe. Attach all the tablets at the
inside top of the main, with approximately equal
numbers of tablets at each end of a given pipe
length. If the tablets are attached before the pipe
section is placed in the trench, mark their position
on the section so it can be readily determined that
the pipe is installed with the tablets at the top.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 16 of 21

e) When installation has been completed, fill the main
with water at a velocity not exceeding 1 fps(0.3
mps). Take precautions to assure that air pockets are
eliminated. Leave this water in the pipe for at least
24 hours. If the water temperature is less than 41 F
(5C), leave the water in the pipe for at least 48
hours. Position valves so that the chlorine solution
in the main being treated will not flow into water
mains in active service.

2) Continuous Feed Method

a) Before chlorinating, fill the main with water to
eliminate air pockets and flush as specified above.

b) Use water from the existing distribution system or
other approved source of supply to flow at a
constant, measured rate into the newly laid water
main. At a point not more than 10 feet (3 meters)
downstream from the beginning of the new main,
assure water entering the new main receives
chlorine fed at a minimum 25 mg/L free chlorine.
To assure that this concentration is provided,
measure the chlorine concentration at regular
intervals.

c) Appendix B provides information on the amounts of
chlorine compound required for various pipe sizes.

d) During chlorine application, position valves so that
the chlorine solution in the main being treated does
not flow into water mains in active service. Do not
stop chlorine application until the entire main is
filled with chlorinated water. Retain the chlorinated
water in the main for at least 24 hours, operating all
valves and hydrants in the section treated to
disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of the 24-
hour period, the treated water in all portions of the
main must have a minimum free chlorine residual of
10 mg/L free chlorine.

e) The preferred equipment for applying liquid
chlorine is a solution feed vacuum operated
chlorinator to mix the chlorine gas in solution
water, in combination with a booster pump for

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 17 of 21

injecting the chlorine gas solution water into the
main to be disinfected. It is recommended that
direct feed chlorinators not be used. Hypochlorite
solutions may be applied to the water main with a
chemical feed pump designed for feeding chlorine
solutions.

f) If approved, an optional continuous feed method
utilizing calcium hypochlorite granules may be
used. Place the granules in the pipe sections as
specified under the Tablet Method.

3) Slug Method

a) Before chlorinating, preliminary flush the main as
specified herein.

b) Use water from the existing distribution system or
other approved source of supply to flow at a
constant measured rate into the newly laid water
main.

c) Not more than 10 feet (3 meters) downstream from
the beginning of the new main, add chlorine to the
water entering the new main at a constant rate that
the water will have a minimum 100 mg/L free
chlorine. Measure this concentration at regular
intervals. Apply the chlorine continuously and for
the time required to develop a solid column or
slug of chlorinated water that will, as it moves
through the main, expose all interior surfaces to a
100 mg/L for at least 3 hours.

d) Measure the free chlorine residual in the slug as it
moves through the main. If at any time it drops
below 50 mg/L stop the flow and relocate the
chlorination equipment at the head of the slug, and
as flow is resumed, add chlorine to restore the free
chlorine in the slug to not less than 100 mg/L.

e) As the chlorinated water flows past fittings and
valves, operate related valves and hydrants to
disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 18 of 21

4. Final Flushing

a. After the retention period, flush the chlorinated water from the
main until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in
the water leaving the main is no higher than that in the system, or
is acceptable for domestic use.

D. Bacteriological Tests

1. After final flushing and before the water main is placed in service, test a
sample, or samples, collected from the main(s) for turbidity and
organisms. Collect at least one sample from the new main and one from
each branch.

2. Redisinfection

a. If the initial disinfection fails to produce approved bacteriological
or turbidity samples, re-flush and resample the main. If check
samples show bacterial contamination, re-chlorinate the main until
approved results are obtained.

3. Swabbing

a. Where connections are made to existing piping and the
connections are not disinfected along with the newly installed
main, swab or spray the interior of all pipe and fittings used in
making the connections with a 1 percent hypochlorite solution
before installation.

3.5 WATER AND SEWER MAIN SEPARATION

A. Maintain horizontal and vertical separation between water mains and sewer mains
in accordance with Standard Drawing No. 02660-2.

3.6 VALVES

A. Set and joint gate valves and butterfly valves to the pipe as specified for pipe
laying and jointing. Set valves with operating nut vertical. Center and plumb
valve boxes over the operating nut to prevent shock or stress being transmitted to
the valve.

B. Valve Boxes

1. Center and plumb valve boxes over the valve operating nut. Set valve box
tops flush with the ground surface or street surfacing.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 19 of 21

2. Place bedding gravel around all water main valves and under the valve
box bottom to drain any water entering the valve box.

C. Valve Thrust Blocks

1. When specified, install valves with thrust blocks and anchor rods meeting
Standard Drawing 02660-3 requirements.

3.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Set all hydrants plumb with the pumper nozzle facing the street. Set the hydrant
with the ground line at the location indicated by the hydrant manufacturer.

B. Provide drainage at the hydrant base by placing clean gravel under and around it.
Place gravel at least 1 foot (30 cm) on all sides from the base of the hydrant to at
least 6 inches (15 cm) above the drain opening. Brace the hydrant against
unexcavated earth at the trench end with concrete backing as detailed on the
plans. Furnish hydrants with the specified gate valves. Install hydrants meeting
Standard Drawing No.02660-4 or 02660-5 as specified by the Owner.

3.8 SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION

A. Provide all work and materials for the complete service line installation, including
trench excavation and backfill; making the water main tap; furnishing and
installing the corporation stop, curb stop and box, service clamp where necessary,
and service line with fittings to make the connections to the stops. Bend the
service line adjacent to the water main into a figure S in a horizontal or vertical
plane to avoid a rigid connection. Assure all services have a minimum 6-1/2 feet
(2 meters) of cover measured as specified in Standard Drawing No. 02660-6.

B. Mark the water service line end at the property line using a steel fence post, 5 feet
long (1.5 meters), buried in 3 feet (1 meter) in the ground. Paint the post blue.
Where applicable, mark the concrete curb to identify the service locations.

3.9 TAPPING:

A. Tap the newly installed water mains unless specified otherwise. The Owner will
tap any existing water mains not installed by the Contractor. If owner tapped, be
responsible for scheduling and coordinating with the Owner. The Contractor will
be charged a fee for each Owner made tap.

B. Perform tapping using an approved tapping machine using clean, sharp drill taps
and/or shell cutters. Do not tap directly into AWWA C900 PVC pipe. 3/4-Inch
(19 mm) and 1-inch (25 mm) taps may be made directly into the barrel of ductile

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 20 of 21

iron pipe without using service saddles. Direct tap into the pipe barrel to the depth
exposing a maximum three threads of the corporation stop. Use maximum direct
tap sizes of 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) for 6-inch (15 cm) diameter mains and 2-inch (51
mm) for larger mains.


4.1 GENERAL

A. The following items are pay items for the work covered under this section.

4.2 WATER MAINS

A. Measurement of water mains is made in lineal feet (meters) along the centerline
of pipe through all valves, fittings and appurtenances. Payment for water main
will be made at the contract unit price bid per lineal foot (meters) of the various
sizes called for, which includes furnishing and installing pipe, furnishing and
placing Type 1 pipe bedding, trench excavation and backfill, cleaning, testing and
disinfecting the water main and all other work necessary or incidental for

4.3 FITTINGS

A. Measurement of water main fittings is by numerical count of the various types
and sizes listed in the Contract Documents. Payment for fittings is made at the
contract unit price bid for each fitting, and includes furnishing and installing the
fittings as required, thrust blocking and any other work necessary or incidental for

4.4 WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. This item is measured by numerical count of water services of the various sizes
listed in the Contract Documents. Payment for water service connections is made
at the contract unit price bid per each, which includes furnishing and installing the
water service line from the main to the property line, tapping the main, furnishing
and installing all fittings, corporation stops, curb stops and boxes and tapping
saddles if required, trench excavation, backfill, pipe bedding, shoring, and
dewatering, cleanup and all other work necessary or incidental to complete the
item.

Section 02660 6
th
Edition
WATER DISTRIBUTION
Page 21 of 21

4.5 WATER SERVICE LINE

A. Payment for water service line is made at the contract unit price bid per each,
which includes furnishing and installing the water service line from the main to
the property line, trench excavation, backfill, pipe bedding, shoring, and
dewatering, cleanup and all other work necessary or incidental to complete the
item. No separate measurement and payment is made for trench excavation and
backfill for water service lines. Include the cost of this work in the price bid for
service lines.

4.6 VALVES

A. Measurement of water valves is made by numerical count of the sizes and types of
valves listed in the Contract Documents. Payment for water valves is made at the
contract unit price bid each; which includes furnishing and installing the valve
and valve box, all excavation, backfill, and special compaction required for the
installation, thrust and anchor blocking (if required), and all other work necessary
or incidental for completion of the item.

4.7 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Measurement of fire hydrant assemblies is by numerical count. Payment is made
at the contract unit price bid each; which includes furnishing and installing the
fire hydrant and auxiliary gate valve, piping from main waterline to hydrant, all
excavation, backfill, and special compaction required for the installation, thrust
and anchor blocking, drain gravel, and all other work necessary or incidental for

END OF SECTION
Sections - 2700
Sewerage and
Drainage

SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE

SECTION 02720 Storm Drain Systems
SECTION 02725 Drainage Culverts
SECTION 02730 Sanitary Sewer Collection System

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 10

SECTION 02720

STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install all storm drains, including manholes, inlets, service lines and
other appurtenant structures as specified in the Contract and this section. Pipe
strength classifications are specified on the plans, listed in the Contract
Documents or herein.

1.2 CERTIFICATION BY MANUFACTURER

A. Furnish a manufacturers certification on all pipe, certifying that the pipe and
fittings meet the contract requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

AASHTO M36 Corrugated Galvanized Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M196 Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M245 Pre-Coated Galvanized, Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe
Arches
AASHTO M274 Type II Aluminized Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
ASTM C76 Reinforced Concrete Pipe
ASTM D361 Low Head Pressure RCP
ASTM C443 O-ring Rubber Gaskets
ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C506 RCP - Arch Pipe
ASTM C507 RCP - Elliptical Pipe
ASTM C655 RCP - Tongue & Groove Pipe
ASTM C665 RCP D-Load Pipe
ASTM C789 RCP Concrete Box Section
ASTM C850 RCP Concrete Box Sections
ASTM D1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds
ASTM D3034 Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM 3350 High Density Polyethylene Pipe
AWWA C151 Bituminous Coated Ductile Iron Pipe
ASTM F949 PVC O pen Profile Pipe

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 10


A. Standard drawings in Appendix A applicable to this section are as follows:

Standard Drawing No. 02720-1 30" (76 cm) Standard Storm Drain Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-2 24" (61 cm) Standard Riser Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-3 Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-4 Standard Straight Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-5 48" (122 cm) Standard Manholes Showing
Standard Drawing No. 02720-6 Pre-cast Manhole Bases
Standard Drawing No. 02720-7 Typical Manhole Channel Details
Standard Drawing No. 02720-8 Standard Cast Iron Cover
Standard Drawing No. 02720-9 Standard 24" (61 cm) Cast Iron Ring
Manhole Frame
Standard Drawing No. 02720-10 Storm Drain Service Line

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish all storm drain piping as specified in the Contract Documents and
meeting the materials and testing requirements of this Section. Furnish wye and
tee branches of the same material and design as the specified storm drain pipe.
Furnish the pipe sizes and strength classifications shown in the Contract
documents.

B. References to ASTM, ANSI or AASHTO designation, means the latest revision at
the time of call for bids.

C. Assure all pipe is clearly marked with type, class and/or thickness as applicable.
Assure lettering is legible and permanent under normal handling and storage
conditions.

D. Furnish the joint type, class, thickness designation, casting, lining, marking,
testing, etc. as specified.

2.2 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Pipe

1. Furnish concrete storm drain and culvert pipe meeting ASTM C76 or
C655. Use round reinforced pipe having O-ring rubber gasket joints

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 10

meeting ASTM C443 with the O-ring gasket confined in the pipe tongue
groove.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

1. Furnish PVC pipe produced by a continuous extrusion process employing
a prime grade of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride. Assure the grade used is
highly resistant to hydrogen sulfide, sulfuric acid, gasoline, oil, detergents
and other chemicals found in sewage and industrial wastes. Assure the
material meets Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds, ASTM D1784
requirements. Assure the pipe has self-extinguishing flammability
characteristics. Assure the pipe meets ASTM D3034, Standard
Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings, with an
SDR of 35 4"-15" (10 cm - 38 cm) ASTM F679, Standard Specification
for PVC Large Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: 18
36 (46 cm 91 cm), or ASTM F949, Standard Specification for PVC
Corrugated (Open Profile) Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and
Fittings, 12 36 (10 cm 91 cm).

2. The nominal laying length is a minimum 12.5 feet (3.8 meters), 13 feet (4
meters) or 20 feet (6.1 meters)except shorter lengths are permitted
adjacent to manholes, lampholes or other appurtenances. Assure each pipe
length is marked with size, SDR, Sewer Pipe and Code Number. Assure
each pipe length has a bell providing a watertight joint when jointing the
bell and spigot with a rubber ring. Make the rubber gasket joint using a
rubber gasket compressed between the outer surface of the spigot and the
inner surface of the bell. Assure the joint is completely sealed by the
gasket providing a watertight joint under all service conditions, including
expansion, contraction, settlement and pipe deformation. Assemble the
rubber ring joint assembly following the manufacturers
recommendations.

3. Furnish wye or tee fittings of the same material, construction and joint
design as the main sewer pipe.

C. An Owner may allow ULTRA FLO or approved equivalent steel pipe.
Connections must be made with minimum coupling band width of 10-1/2 and
appropriate gasketing material. When specified by the Engineer, materials shall
meet the following standards:

ASTM A760 (AASHTO M36) Specifications for Corrugated Steel Pipe,
Metallic-coated for Sewers and Drains

ASTM A762 (AASHTO M245) Specifications for Corrugated steel Pipe,
Polymer Pre-coated for Sewers and Drains

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 10

ASTM A742 (AASHTO M246) Specifications for Steel Sheet, Metallic
Coated and Polymer Pre-coated for
Corrugated Steel Pipe

ASTM A929 (AASHTO M274) Specifications for Steel Sheet Metallic
Coated by the Hot Dip Process for
Corrugated Steel Pipe.

D. Other Pipe Material

1. An Owner may select other materials as appropriate for applications where
an Engineer has reviewed the circumstances and provided specifications
for installation. When specified by and Engineer, materials shall meet the
following standards:

ASTM C 76 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Tongue & Grove Joint
ASTM C 506 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Arch Pipe
ASTM C 507 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Elliptical Pipe
ASTM C 665 Reinforced Concrete Pipe D-Load Pipe
ASTM C 789 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections
ASTM 3350 High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)

AASHTO M 36 Corrugated Galvanized Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M 196 Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M 245 Pre-Coated Galvanized, Corrugated Steel Pipe and
Pipe Arches
AASHTO M 274 Type II Aluminized Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe
Arches
AASHTO M 294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)

E. MANHOLES

a. General

1. Furnish manholes constructed of precast concrete sections with
frames, covers and steps meeting Standard Drawing Details.

b. Precast Concrete Sections

1. Furnish manholes meeting ASTM C478: Precast Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Sections.

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 10

c. Steps

1. Furnish non-corrosive type, 12 inches (30 cm) in width, of 1/2-inch
(13 mm) steel rod encased with polypropylene. Assure steps
withstand 400 pound (180 kg) vertical loads and 1,000 pound (450
kg) pull-out resistance.

d. Frames and Covers

1. Furnish frames and covers meeting Standard Drawings 02720-8 and
02720-9. Furnish 2 hole type covers unless noted or specified
otherwise.

e. Concrete Bases

1. Concrete bases may be precast or field-poured on undisturbed earth.
Use concrete meeting Section 03310: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

F. INLETS AND CATCH BASINS

a. Furnish standard cast iron inlet frames and grates meeting standard drawing
requirements or as specified.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION

A. Excavation and Backfill

1. Excavate and backfill pipelines meeting the applicable portions of
SECTION 02221: TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT STRUCTURES.

B. Responsibility for Materials

1. Be responsible for all material furnished. Replace all material found
defective in manufacture or damaged in handling after delivery by the
manufacturer. This includes furnishing all material and labor required for
the replacement of installed material discovered defective before final
acceptance of the work or during the guarantee period.

2. Be responsible for the safe storage of material for the work until it has
been incorporated in the completed project.

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 10

C. Handling of Pipe

1. Deliver and distribute all Contractor furnished pipe. Load and unload pipe,
fittings and accessories by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid
shock or damage. Do not drop the materials. Do not skid or roll pipe
handled on skidways against pipe already on the ground.

2. In distributing the material at the work site, unload each piece opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. Keep the pipe interior
and other accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.

3. Handle pipe to prevent coating or lining damage. Repair or replace all
coating or lining damage in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

D. Laying Pipe

1. Lay and maintain all pipe to the specified lines and grades with fittings,
tees and manholes at the specified locations.

2. Install wye or tee fittings in the mainline sewer for service line
connections. Furnish wye or tee fittings of the same material, design and
specifications as the sewer main pipe. Joint service pipe to tee branches or
main line pipe other than PVC using special joint adapters manufactured
specifically for jointing the two types of pipe.

3. Use tools and equipment meeting Engineer approval for the safe and
convenient prosecution of the work. Carefully lower all pipe and fittings
into the trench preventing damage to pipe materials and protective
coatings and linings. Do not dump or drop materials into the trench.

4. Exercise care to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe as it is
installed. When pipe laying is not in progress, close the open ends of pipe
using a plug or other means approved by the Engineer. Remove and clean
all sand, gravel, concrete and cement grout that has entered the lines
during construction.

E. Tolerances

1. Install pipe within 1/2-inch (13 mm) of the specified alignment and within
1/4-inch (6 mm) of the specified grade for pipe 15-inch (38 cm) in
diameter and smaller and 1/2-inch (13 mm) of specified grade for pipe
larger than 15-inch (38 cm) diameter. These tolerances apply to any point
along the entire pipe length.

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 7 of 10

3.2 MANHOLES

A. Construction

1. Construct manholes to the specified dimensions. Assure invert channels
are smooth and semi-circular in shape conforming to the inside of the
adjacent pipe section. Make flow direction changes with a smooth curve of
as large a radius as the size of the manhole will permit. Make changes in
channel size and grade gradually and evenly. Form the invert channels
directly in the manhole base concrete or by laying a half-pipe in the
concrete. Smooth and slope the manhole floor outside the channel toward
the channel at one inch per foot (8 cm per meter).

2. Joint all connections between manhole walls and base and between wall
sections making the manhole watertight.

3. Install adjusting rings on each manhole to adjust the manhole top elevation
to the existing or specified ground elevations, with the total ring height of
2-inch (5 cm) minimum and 12-inch (30 cm) maximum. Assure adjusting
rings are reinforced with the same percentage of steel as the riser and top.

3.3 INLETS AND CATCH BASING

A. Construct inlets and catch basins meeting the standard drawing for the type
specified.

B. Construct inlet structures to the line, cross-section and dimensions specified.
Furnish concrete and reinforcing steel meeting Section 03310: STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE and Section 03210: REINFORCING STEEL. Inlet structures may
be precast or cast-in-place.

3.4 STORM DRAIN SERVICE LINES

A. Construct service lines meeting Standard Drawing 02720-10. Install the service
line to the property line. Plug the end of the service line with a stopper and gasket,
using a gasket of the same type used for pipe jointing. Do not grout the plugs.

B. Mark the sanitary sewer and storm drain service line ends at the property line
using a steel fence post 5 feet (1.5 m) long, buried at least 2 feet (0.6 m). Place a
2" X 2" (5cm X 5 cm) wood marker extending from the pipe invert to ground line.
Wire the 2" X 2" (5cm X 5 cm) marker to the steel fence post. Where applicable,
mark the concrete curb to identify the service locations. Paint sanitary sewer
service markers green and storm drain service markers gray.

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 8 of 10

3.5 TESTS

A. Light Test (Visual)

1. Once the trench is backfilled, perform a light test between manholes to
check alignment and grade for pipe displacement. Except for specified
curved alignments, the completed pipeline must permit a true circle of
light to be seen from manhole to manhole.

2. If alignment or grade does not meet specifications, correct alignment or
grade at Contractor expense.

B. Leakage Test

1. Unless specified, a leakage test will not be required. Obvious and
concentrated leaks, such as open joints, pinched gaskets, cracked barrels
or bells, are not allowed.

C. Deflection Test

1. The Engineer may require deflection testing of all flexible pipe
installations to assure the construction quality.

2. Conduct deflection tests meeting ASTM D3034 and satisfy either of the
following deflection limitations:

TABLE 3.1
DEFLECTION TESTING LIMITATIONS

Minimum Period Between
Trench Backfilling & Testing
Minimum Mandrel Diameter as a
Percent of Inside Pipe Diameter
7 Days 95.0
30 Days 92.5

3. Mandrels must have at least nine arms. Perform the mandrel test without
mechanical pulling devices.


4.1 GENERAL

A. The following are pay items for the work covered under this section. Payment for
these items is full compensation for providing all materials, tools, labor and

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 9 of 10

equipment necessary to complete the item and all incidental work related thereto,

4.2 STORM DRAINS

A. Measurement of storm drain pipe is in lineal feet (meters) of the various sizes and
classes along the centerline of pipe from center to center of manholes, or center of
inlet to center of manhole. Payment for storm drain pipe is made at the contract
unit price bid per lineal foot (meters) of the various sizes and classes called for,
which includes furnishing and installing pipe, trench excavation and backfill,
furnishing and placing Type 1 pipe bedding, specials required for connection to
manholes and inlets, testing and all other work necessary or incidental for

4.3 MANHOLES

A. Measurement of each manhole for payment is made in two parts: (1) for a basic
manhole, and (2) for any additional vertical height over and above the basic
depth. A basic manhole is defined as 5 feet (1.5 m) deep from the lowest invert to
the top of the manhole frame and cover. Any manhole less than 5 feet (1.5 m)
deep is considered as one basic manhole. Any manhole over 5 feet (1.5 m) deep is
considered as one basic manhole plus a vertical height measurement to the nearest
0.1 foot (0.03 m). Basic manholes are measured by numerical count and the
additional vertical feet (meters) of manhole. The measurement of the additional
vertical height of manhole is the vertical height of the manhole from the lowest
invert to the top of the cast iron frame minus 5 feet (1.5 m).

B. Payment for furnishing and installing a basic manhole complete, is made at the
contract unit price bid per each for Basic Manholes, 5.0 feet deep (1.5 meters).
Payment includes base, manhole sections, steps, cast iron ring and cover, joint
sealer and all other incidentals required to complete the item.

C. Payment for furnishing and installing manholes deeper than the basic manhole
depth is made at the contract unit price bid per vertical foot (meters) for
Additional Manhole Depth and includes manhole sections, steps, joint sealer
and all other incidentals to complete the item.


a. Basic Manhole, 50 (1.5 m) Depth - Per each
b. Additional Manhole Depth - Per vertical foot (meter)

Section 02720 6
th
Edition
STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS
Page 10 of 10

4.4 STORM DRAIN INLETS

A. Storm drain inlets shall be measured and paid for by the number of drain inlets
installed, complete in place, at the contract unit price bid for the various types of
inlets listed in the Contract documents, which price and payment shall constitute
full compensation for all excavation and backfill, furnishing and installing all
materials required (including grates), compaction, labor, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the item.

4.1 STORM DRAIN SERVICE LINES

A. Measurement is made along the pipe from the tee or wye of the main sewer
through tees, wyes and other fittings to the street margin or right-of-way margin.
Measurement is to the nearest foot (0.3m).

1. Payment for services is based on the following bid items as specified in
the contract:

a. Trench excavation and backfill is included in the linear foot price
bid for sewer service pipe.
b. (size) (class) Sewer Service Pipe in Place, per linear foot.

4.2 GENERAL

A. The contract bid prices are full payment for all labor, materials, tools and other
incidentals as maybe required to complete the items of work in the Contract.

END OF SECTION

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 1 of 6

SECTION 02725

DRAINAGE CULVERTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install all drainage culverts and other appurtenant structures as
specified in the Contract and this section. Pipe strength classifications are
specified on the plans, listed in the Contract Documents or herein.


A. Furnish a manufacturers certification on all pipe, certifying that the pipe and
fittings meet the contract requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

AASHTO M 36 Corrugated Galvanized Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M218 Galvanized Steel Coil
AASHTO M245 Pre-Coated Galvanized, Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe
Arches
AASHTO M274 Type II Aluminized Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
AASHTO M294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
ASTM D361 Low Head Pressure RCP
ASTM C506 RCP - Arch Pipe
ASTM C507 RCP - Elliptical Pipe
ASTM C655 RCP - Tongue & Groove Pipe
ASTM C665 RCP D-Load Pipe
ASTM A761 Corrugated Steel Structural Plate
ASTM C789 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections
ASTM C850 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish all culvert piping as specified in the Contract Documents and meeting the
materials and testing requirements of this Section. Furnish the pipe sizes and
strength classifications shown in the Contract documents.

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 2 of 6

B. References to ASTM, ANSI or AASHTO designation, means the latest revision at
the time of call for bids.

Assure lettering is legible and permanent under normal handling and storage
conditions.

D. Furnish the joint type, class, thickness designation, casting, lining, marking,

E. Culverts: Culverts shall be defined as open ended pipes in inlet or outlet control.
If plastic pipe is used in Culvert applications, concrete headwalls or prefabricated
metal end sections shall be used to protect the pipe ends from Ultraviolet
Radiation. All culverts larger than 15-inch diameter shall have and treatments
conforming to the embankment side slopes such as flared end terminal sections
(FETS) or road approach culvert end treatment (RACET). The engineer shall
determine if cut-off walls and edge protection are necessary to protect the
installation from erosion.

2.2 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Pipe

1. Furnish reinforced concrete culvert pipe meeting ASTM C76, C506, C507
or C655. Use round reinforced pipe having O-ring rubber gasket joints
meeting ASTM C443 with the O-ring gasket confined in the pipe tongue
groove.

B. Corrugated Metal Pipe

1. Furnish corrugated metal pipe meeting ASTM A 760(AASHTO M36).
Connections must be made with minimum coupling band width of 10-
1/2. When specified by the Engineer, materials shall meet the following
standards:

ASTM A760 (AASHTO M36) Specifications for Corrugated Steel
Pipe, Metallic-coated for Sewers and
Drains

ASTM A762 (AASHTO M245) Specifications for Corrugated steel
Pipe, Polymer Pre-coated for Sewers
and Drains

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 3 of 6

ASTM A742 (AASHTO M246) Specifications for Steel Sheet,
Metallic Coated and Polymer Pre-
coated for Corrugated Steel Pipe

ASTM A929 (AASHTO M274) Specifications for Steel Sheet
Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip
Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe.
(Aluminized Type II)

C. An Owner may select other materials as appropriate for applications where an
Engineer has reviewed the circumstances and provided specifications for
installation. When specified by an Engineer, materials shall meet the following
standards. Refer to

1. ASTM A761 Corrugated Steel Structural Plate

2 Furnish HDPE Pipe with a corrugated exterior and a smooth interior
waterway. Pipe must be made from virgin polyethylene (PE) compounds
with dimensions and markings to conform to AASHTO M252, M294 and
MP7. Pipe joints must meet ASTM E-1417 and ASTM D3212 standards
for watertight joints.

AASHTO M252 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe

AASHTO M294 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Pipe

ASTM D3350 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Pipe and
Fittings

ASTM E1417 Liquid Penetration Examination

ASTM D3212 Joints for Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION


1. Excavate and backfill culverts in accordance with manufacturers
specifications and Standard Drawings No. 02725-1 and 02725-2 (MDT).

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 4 of 6

2. Bedding material and backfill around and over culverts shall be compacted
to 95% of maximum laboratory dry density, ASTM D690 for all culverts
installed in roadway embankments, unless specified otherwise by
Engineer


defective in manufacture or damaged in handling after delivery by the
manufacturer. This includes furnishing all material and labor required for
the replacement of installed material discovered defective before final
acceptance of the work or during the guarantee period.

2. Be responsible for the safe storage of material for the work until it has
been incorporated in the completed project.

C. Handling of Pipe

1. Deliver and distribute all Contractor furnished pipe. Load and unload pipe,
fittings and accessories by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid
shock or damage. Do not drop the materials. Do not skid or roll pipe
handled on skidways against pipe already on the ground.

2. In distributing the material at the work site, unload each piece opposite or
near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. Keep the pipe interior
and other accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.

3. Handle pipe to prevent coating or lining damage. Repair or replace all
coating or lining damage in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

D. Laying Pipe.

1. Lay and maintain all pipe to the specified lines and grades with fittings, at
the specified locations.

2. Use tools and equipment meeting Engineer approval for the safe and
into the trench preventing damage to pipe materials and protective
coatings and linings. Do not dump or drop materials into the trench.

3. Exercise care to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe as it is
installed. When pipe laying is not in progress, close the open ends of pipe
using a plug or other means approved by the Engineer. Remove and clean

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 5 of 6

all sand, gravel, concrete and cement grout that has entered the lines
during construction.

E. Tolerances

1. Install pipe within 1/2-inch (13 mm) of the specified alignment and within
1/4-inch (6 mm) of the specified grade for pipe 15-inch (38 cm) in
diameter and smaller and 1/2-inch (13 mm) of specified grade for pipe
larger than 15-inch (38 cm) diameter. These tolerances apply to any point
along the entire pipe length.

3.2 TESTS

A. Visual Inspection

1. Inspect culverts for line, grade and roundness. Repair or replace culverts
that are out of round, excessively deflected, or not installed to line and
grade requirements.

B. Joints

1. All joints shall be silt tight joints to prevent infiltration and exfiltration of
soil and water.


4.1 GENERAL

A. The following are pay items for the work covered under this section. Payment for
these items is full compensation for providing all materials, tools, labor and
equipment necessary to complete the item and all incidental work related thereto,

4.2 CULVERTS

A. Measurement of culvert piping is by lineal feet (meters) of the various sizes and
classes along the centerline of pipe for the length of pipe installed, including
flared ends. Payment for culvert piping is made at the contract unit price bid per
lineal foot (meters), which includes furnishing and installing pipe, including any
specials or flared end sections, trench excavation and backfill, and all other work
necessary or incidental for completion of the item.

Section 02725 6
th
Edition
DRAINAGE CULVERTS
Page 6 of 6

4.3 GENERAL


END OF SECTION

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
SANITARY SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM
Page 1 of 15 *

SECTION 02730

SANITARY SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEMS

PART I: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install sewer pipe and fittings including manholes, service lines and
other appurtenant structures as specified in the Contract and this section. Pipe
strength classifications are shown on the plans, listed in the Contract Documents
or specified herein.


A. Furnish a manufacturers certification for all pipe and fittings, certifying that the
pipe and fittings meet the contract requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

ASTM C361 Low Head Pressure RCP
ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C655 D-Load RCP
ASTM D1784 Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds
ASTM D2241 PVC Pressure Pipe
ASTM D3034 Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F679 Large Diameter PVC Pipe
ASTM F714 HDPE Pipe-Dimensions
ASTM 3350 High Density Polyethylene Pipe
ASTM F949 PVC O pen Profile Pipe


A. Standard drawings in Appendix A applicable to this section are as follows:

Standard Drawing No. 02660-2 Water and Sewer Main Separation
Standard Drawing No. 02720-3 Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-4 Standard Straight Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-5 48" (122 cm) Standard Manhole Showing
Standard Drawing No. 02720-6 Precast Manhole Bases
Standard Drawing No. 02720-7 Typical Manhole Channel Details

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 15 *

Standard Drawing No. 02720-8 Standard Cast Iron Cover
Standard Drawing No. 02720-9 Standard 24" (61 cm) Cast Iron Ring
Manhole Frame
Standard Drawing No. 02730-1 Nomograph for Air Testing Gravity Sewer
Mains
Standard Drawing No. 02730-2 Sanitary Sewer Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02730-3 Deep Sanitary Sewer Service Line

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish sewer pipe and fittings as specified in the Contract Documents and
meeting the materials and testing requirements of this Section. Furnish wye or tee
branches and service line piping of the same material and design as the sewer pipe
unless specified otherwise. Pipe strength classifications are shown on the plans
and/or are listed in the Contract Documents.

B. References made to ASTM, ANSI or AASHTO designation are the latest revision
at the time of call for bids.

Assure lettering is legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling and
storage.

D. Furnish the joint type, class, thickness designation, castings, lining, marking,

2.2 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

1. General

a. Furnish PVC pipe produced by a continuous extrusion process,
employing a prime grade of un-plasticized polyvinyl chloride.
Assure the grade used is highly resistant to hydrogen sulfide,
sulfuric acid, gasoline, oil, detergents and other chemicals found in
sewage and industrial wastes. Assure the material meets Rigid
Polyvinyl Chloride Compounds - ASTM Designation D-1784
requirements. Assure the pipe has self-extinguishing flammability
characteristics.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 15 *

2. Gravity Sewer Pipe

a. Furnish gravity sewer pipe meeting one of the following
requirements:

1) ASTM D-3034, Standard Specifications for Polyvinyl
Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings, with an SDR of 35 4"-
15" (10 cm - 38 cm).

2) ASTM F679, Standard Specifications for PVC Large
Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings 18"-
36"(46 cm - 76 cm).

3) ASTM F949, Standard Specification for PVC Corrugated
(Open Profile) Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and
Fittings larger than 12 (10cm).

b. Furnish pipe having nominal 12.5 feet (3.8 meters), laying lengths,
except shorter lengths may be used adjacent to manholes,
lampholes or other appurtenances. Assure each pipe section is
marked, as a minimum, with size, SDR, Sewer Pipe and Code
Number.

3. Pressure Sewer Pipe

a. Furnish pressure sewer pipe meeting ASTM D2241, Standard
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR), with
an SDR of 26 and a pressure rating of 160.

b. Use a nominal laying length of 20 feet (6.1 meters), except shorter
lengths may be used adjacent to bends or other appurtenances.
Assure each pipe length is marked, as a minimum, with size, SDR,
pressure rating or both, ASTM designation and manufacturers
name and code.

4. Pipe Jointing

a. Furnish each pipe length with a bell designed to provide a
watertight joint when jointing the bell and spigot with a rubber
ring.

b. Make a rubber gasket joint for PVC pipe and fittings using a
rubber gasket compressed between the outer surface of the spigot

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 4 of 15 *

and the inner surface of the bell. Assure the joint is completely
sealed by the gasket so that the assembly remains watertight under
all service conditions, including expansion, contraction, settlement
and pipe deformation. Follow the manufacturers
recommendations when assembling the rubber ring joint.

5. Fittings

a. Assure wye or tee fittings for connecting service lines are of the
same material, construction and joint design as the main sewer
pipe.

B. Concrete Pipe

1. General

a. Furnish concrete sewer pipe meeting ASTM Specifications C76 or
C655, latest revision, except as noted herein. Assure cement used
to make concrete pipe is Type II A Modified, Type V or other
approved cement containing less than 5 percent Tricalcium
Aluminate. The pipe strength classifications for C76 or C655
specification pipe is listed in the plans or Contract Documents.

b. Furnish pipe meeting the referenced ASTM specifications on
permissible variations in pipe dimensions. Assure the barrel
thickness is uniform to providing a constant flow area without
projections across joints.

2. Fittings

a. Use wye or tee fittings for connecting service lines of the same
material, construction and joint design as the main sewer pipe.

3. Jointing Material

a. Make joints for concrete pipe using flexible, watertight, rubber-
type gaskets meeting to ASTM C443, with an O-ring gasket
confined in the pipe tongue groove.

4. Pipe Jointing

a. Thoroughly clean the spigot and bell ends of the pipe before joint
assembly. Follow the pipe and joint manufacturers
recommendations for pipe jointing. Check the position of the
rubber gaskets and pipe assembly using a feeler gauge before

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 5 of 15 *

backfilling the trench. Visually inspect and gauge pipe and joints
from inside the pipe where pipe size permits to assure proper
gasket position and joint gap tolerances.

5. Material Testing

a. When the pipe supplier is not an American Concrete Pipe
Association Certified plant, the pipe supplier shall furnish the
Engineer with certified test results from an independent testing
laboratory on the following: (a) crushing strength (3-edge bearing
method), (b) absorption, and (c) hydrostatic test. Furnish test
results for each pipe as specified in ASTM C76 or C655, or a
minimum two percent of the number of pipe supplied, whichever is
greater. Cost of these tests to be borne by the pipe supplier. The
engineer retains the option to witness all testing completed at the
production facility.

C. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe

1. Pipe

a. Furnish non-profile wall HDPE pipe meeting ASTM D3350,
having a cell classification of PE 34-5434C. Assure dimensions
and workmanship meet ASTM F714 requirements.

2. Fittings

a. Use wye or tee fittings for connecting service lines of the same
material construction and joint design as the main sewer pipe.

3. Pipe Jointing

a. Heat fusion weld all field joints to meet the manufacturers
recommendations.

D. Other Pipe Materials

1. Other pipe materials may be specified at the discretion of the Engineer and
Owner.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. General

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 6 of 15 *

1. Construct manholes from precast concrete sections having frames, covers,
and steps meeting Standard Drawings.

B. Precast Concrete Sections

1. Furnish manholes meeting ASTM C478; Precast Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Sections, specifically including mandatory rejection
requirements.

C. Steps

1. Furnish non-corrosive steps, 12-inches (30 cm) in width, of 1/2-inch (13
mm) steel rod encased with polypropylene. Assure steps withstand 400
pound (180 kg) vertical loads and 1,000 pound (450 kg) pull-out
resistance.

D. Frames and Covers

1. Furnish frames and covers meeting Standard Drawing Nos.02720-8 and
02720-9. Furnish 2-hole type covers unless specified otherwise.

E. Concrete Base
1. Furnish precast concrete bases or field poured on undisturbed earth. Use
concrete meeting Section 03310: STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION


1. Perform pipeline excavation and backfill meeting the applicable
requirements of Section 02221: TRENCH EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL FOR PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT STRUCTURES.


defective in manufacture or damaged in handling after delivery. This
includes furnishing all material and labor required for the replacement of
installed material discovered defective before final acceptance of the work
or during the guarantee period.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 7 of 15 *

2. Be responsible for the safe storage of material intended for the work until
it has been incorporated in the completed project.

C. Handling of Pipe

1. Deliver and distribute all pipe to the site. Load and unload pipe, fittings
and accessories by lifting with hoists or skidding to avoid shock or
damage. Do not drop any materials. Do not roll or skid pipe handled on
skidways against pipe already on the ground.

2. In distributing the material at the site of the work, unload each piece
opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. Keep the
interior of all pipe and other accessories free from dirt and foreign matter
at all times.

3. Handle pipe to prevent damaging coating or lining. If any part of the
coating or lining is damaged, make all repairs in a manner satisfactory to
the Engineer.

D. Laying Pipe

1. Lay and maintain all pipe to the specified lines and grades with fittings,
tees and manholes at the required locations. Establish line and grade using
batter boards and string line, laser equipment or other approved methods.
When batter boards and string line are used, use a minimum of three
batterboards at all times.

2. Install wye or tee fittings in the mainline sewer for service line
connections. Furnish wye or tee fittings of the same material, design and
specifications as the sewer main pipe. Joint service pipe to tee branches or
main line pipe other than PVC using special joint adapters manufactured
specifically for jointing the two types of pipe.

3. Use tools and equipment, satisfactory to the Engineer, for the safe and
into the trench to prevent damage to pipe materials and protective coatings
and linings. Do not drop or dump any materials into the trench.

4. Take every precaution to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe
while it is being installed. At times when pipe laying is not in progress,
close the open ends of pipe using a plug or other means approved by the
Engineer. Clean and remove all sand, gravel, concrete and cement grout
that has entered the lines during construction.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 8 of 15 *

E. Tolerances

1. Install the pipe within 1/2-inch (13 mm) of the specified alignment and
within 1/4-inch (6 mm) of the specified grade.

3.2 MANHOLES

A. Construction

1. Construct manholes to the specified dimensions. Make invert channels
smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to the inside of the adjacent
sewer section. Make changes in flow direction with a smooth curve of as
large a radius as the manhole size will permit. Make changes in channel
grade and size gradually and evenly. The invert channels may be formed
directly in the manhole base concrete or by laying half-pipe in the
concrete. Make the floor of the manhole outside the channel smooth and
slope toward the channel at one inch per foot (8 cm per meter).

2. Joint all connections between manhole walls and base and between wall
sections adjusting rings and frame making the manhole watertight. For all
horizontal joints located below the established high groundwater
elevation, install a preformed rubber gasket joint. The established high
groundwater level is shown on the plans or noted in the Special
Provisions. For all sewer pipe to manhole joints, use gasketed, flexible,
watertight connections that will accommodate differential settlement.
Acceptable options for these connections to the manhole are as follows:

a. Adjacent Joints: Bell and spigot pipe joints with rubber sealing
rings located within 12 inches (30 cm) of the manhole wall.

b. Compression-Type Flexible Connector: A resilient, flexible
connection, cast into manhole wall, providing 10 degrees
deflection.

c. Boot-Type Flexible Connector: A flexible, watertight connection
consisting of a rubber gasket or boot, metal expansion ring and a
metal take-up clamp. Assure the expansion ring holds the gasket in
the manhole wall, with the take-up clamp holding the gasket to the
pipe.

d. Options (b) and (c) are limited to precast manhole base inverts and
other installations where the flexibility of the connection is not
compromised.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 9 of 15 *

e. Construct manholes meeting ASTM C478, and the rejection
criteria stated therein.

f. Keep manhole construction within one manhole distant behind
sewer pipeline construction.

3. Install adjusting rings on each manhole to bring the manhole top elevation
to match the existing or specified ground elevations. Use manhole rings
with a 2-inch minimum (5 cm) and 12-inch (30 cm) maximum height.
Furnish adjusting rings reinforced with the same percentage of steel as the
riser and top.

3.3 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES

A. Construct service lines meeting Standard Drawing 02730-2. Install the service
line to the property line. Plug the end of the service line with a stopper and gasket,
using a gasket of the same type used for pipe jointing. Do not grout the plugs.

B. Mark the sanitary sewer and storm drain service line ends at the property line
using a steel fence post 5 feet (1.5 m) long, buried at least 2 feet (0.6 m). Place a
2" X 2" (5cm X 5 cm) wood marker extending from the pipe invert to ground line.
Wire the 2" X 2" (5cm X 5 cm) marker to the steel fence post. Where applicable,
mark the concrete curb to identify the service locations. Paint sanitary sewer
service markers green and storm drain service markers gray.

3.4 TESTS

A. Make all tests after backfill is completed, but before any surface restoration or
street surfacing. Be responsible for finding and repairing all breaks and leaks
revealed by the tests. Additionally, perform all tests in the presence of the
Engineer, resident inspector, or the Owners other designated representative.

B. Light Test (Visual)

1. After the trench has been backfilled and compacted as specified in Section
02221, perform a light test between manholes to check alignment and
grade for pipe displacement. Excluding curved alignments shown on the
plans, the completed pipeline is to permit a true circle of light to be visible
from one manhole to the next. If alignment or grade is not that specified
and displacement of pipe is found, remedy all defects.

C. Leakage Test

1. New sewer line will not be finally accepted until leakage tests are made
assuring the Engineer that pipe laying and jointing are satisfactory.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 10 of 15 *

D. Water Test

1. Where groundwater is at least 2 feet (0.6 m) above the sewer line, make
tests by sealing off the section of lines between manholes and measuring
the actual flow by collecting or pumping the discharge into barrels or other
approved methods. Continue tests at a minimum of 4 hours for each
section tested. Allow time to soak lines and manholes in advance of
performing tests.

2. When groundwater is not 2 feet (0.6 m) above the pipe, test as follows: On
flat slopes where the depth over the centerline of the pipe in the lower
manhole of the section being tested will be not more than 10 feet (3 m),
fill the upper manhole to 2 feet (0.6 m) over the top of the pipe or 2 feet
(0.6 m) above the groundwater elevation (whichever is higher), and block
the lower manhole. When the above conditions cannot be met, the
Engineer may order testing the line in sections between manholes.
Measure the leakage by checking the water level drop in the manhole over
a 4 hour period.

3. The allowable infiltration or exfiltration, including manholes, cannot
exceed 200 gallons per day per mile of sewer per inch of pipe diameter
(185 liters per day per kilometer of sewer per centimeter of pipe diameter).
This does not exclude obvious and concentrated leaks and physical
defects, such as open joints, pinched gaskets, cracked barrels or bells, etc.
Make repairs on concentrated leaks, and as required to reduce infiltration
or exfiltration leakage below the specified rate.

E. Air Test (Alternative)

1. As an alternate method to water testing, the Contractor may utilize low
pressure air to test the sewer mains. Use the test procedure described
below: Plug both ends of the pipe under test with airtight plugs and brace
to prevent slippage and blowout. Furnish one plug with an inlet tap or
other provision for connecting an air hose.

2. Equip the air supply hose, connected between the air compressor and the
plug, with a throttling valve, an air bleed valve and a high pressure shutoff
valve for control. Equip the low pressure side of the throttling valve with a
tee for a monitoring pressure gauge, protected by a gauge cock. This cock
is kept closed except when the pressure loss is being timed.

3. If the pipeline is submerged under groundwater, the back pressure, caused
by the water head, is measured and added to the standard test pressures to
compensate for the groundwater effect on the air test.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 11 of 15 *

4. Apply air slowly to the pipeline until the pressure reaches 4.0 psig(27.6 j).
Throttle the air supply to maintain the internal pressure between 4.0 and
3.5 psig (27.6 -24.1 j) for at least 2 minutes. During this time check the
plugs with soap solution to detect any plug leakage.

5. When the pressure reaches exactly 3.5 psig (24.1 j), disconnect the air
supply, start a stop watch and record the time for the pressure to drop to
2.5 psig (17.2 j). The minimum time allowed for the pressure drop is
computed on an air loss rate of 3.5 cfm (5.9m 3 /min) or an air loss rate of
0.0030 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot (0.055 m 3 /min per
square meter) of inner pipe surface area under test, whichever rate yields
the least time for the pressure drop. Should the time of the pressure drop
between 3.5 and 2.5 psig (24.1 - 17.2 j) be less than the allowable
specified time, make the necessary leakage repairs and repeat the air test.

6. Standard Drawing 02730-1 provides a nomograph which may be used to
compute testing times for air testing. The nomograph computes results
based upon English (U.S. Customary) units.

7. For single pipe size test sections, the length limits for minimum test times
obtained from Standard Drawing No.02730-1 entitled Nomograph for Air
Testing Gravity Sewer Mains are contained in the following table.

TABLE 3.1
LENGTH LIMIT FOR MINIMUM TEST TIMES

Pipe Diameter, Inches
(cm)
Test Section Length, Foot (m)
Minimum Maximum
4 (10) 642(196) 1124(343)
6 (15) 429(131) 751 (229)
8 (20) 322(98) 564 (172)
10(25) 257(78) 450 (137)
12(30) 215(66) 376 (115)
15(38) 172(52) 300 (91)
18(46) 43(44) 1250 (76)
21(53) 123(37) 215 (66)
24(61) 107(33) 188 (57)

8. For test sections that are shorter than the minimum lengths, new test times
must be calculated. This is done by multiplying the test time from the
nomograph by the actual length of the test section (in feet) and then
dividing the resultant product by the minimum test section length from the
preceding table.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 12 of 15 *

9. For test sections exceeding the maximum lengths, either shorten the test
section to an allowable length or use the water test.

F. Number of Tests

1. Perform the number of leakage tests directed by the Engineer to assure
that materials and workmanship are acceptable. Repair defective joints
using only approved methods. Replace pipe having cracked or broken
barrels. Do not exceed 800 feet (240 m) of sewer line per test unless
otherwise approved.

G. T.V. Inspection

1. All sewer mains shall be inspected using a television camera before final
acceptance. A sewer line is deficient and unacceptable if (1) the alignment
is outside the specified limits, (2) water ponds in any section are equal to
or greater than 2 times the grade tolerance specified herein under Section
02730.3.E.1, or (3) the pipe has visible defects such as open joints,
pinched gaskets, cracked barrels or bell, or similar defects.

2. Pay all costs incurred in any television inspection performed solely for
Contractor benefit.

3. Record all television inspections in a format acceptable to the Owner. Pull
the camera through the sewer at 30 feet per minute (9 meters per minute
maximum). If the camera is pulled by attaching to the hose of a hydraulic
sewer cleaner, assure the hose is not active during the pulling process.

H. Deflection Testing

1. The Engineer may require deflection testing of all or any portion of a
flexible pipe installation to assure the construction quality. Flexible pipe is
pipe that will deflect at least 2 percent without any sign of structural
distress.

2. Conduct deflection tests, when performed on PVC pipe, meeting ASTM
D3034 and satisfy either of the following deflection limitations:

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 13 of 15 *

TABLE 3.2
DEFLECTION TESTING LIMITATIONS

Minimum Period Between
Trench Backfilling & Testing
Minimum Mandrel Diameter as a
Percent of Inside Pipe Diameter
7 Days 95.0
30 Days 92.5

3. Mandrels must have at least nine arms. Perform the mandrel test without
mechanical pulling devices.

I. Material and Equipment for Testing

1. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials (including water) necessary for
performing the sewer line tests at Contractor expense.

3.5 WATER AND SEWER MAIN SEPARATION

A. Horizontal and vertical separation between water and sewer mains is dictated by
Montana Department of Environmental Quality.


4.1 GENERAL

A. The following items are the pay items for the work covered under this section.

4.2 SEWER MAINS

A. Measurement of sewer mains are made in lineal feet (meters) of the various sizes
and classes along the centerline of pipe from center to center of manholes.
Payment for sewer main is made at the contract unit price bid per lineal foot
(meters) of the various sizes and classes called for, which includes furnishing and
installing pipe, trench excavation and backfill, furnishing and placing Type 1 pipe
bedding, specials required for connection to manholes, testing and all other work
necessary or incidental for completion of the item.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 14 of 15 *

4.3 MANHOLES

A. Measurement of each manhole for payment is made in two parts: (1) for a basic
manhole, and (2) for any additional vertical height over and above the basic
depth. A basic manhole is defined as being 5 feet deep (1.5 m) from the lowest
invert to the top of the manhole frame and cover. Any manhole less than 5 feet
deep (1.5 m) is considered as one basic manhole.

B. Any manhole over 5 feet deep (1.5 m) is considered as one basic manhole plus a
vertical height measurement to the nearest 0.1 foot (0.03 m). Basic manholes are
measured by numerical count and the additional vertical heights feet (meters) of
manhole. The measurement of the additional vertical height of manhole is the
vertical height of the manhole from the lowest invert to the top of the cast iron
frame minus 5 feet (1.5 m).

C. Payment for furnishing and installing a basic manhole, complete in-place, is made
at the contract unit price bid per each for Basic Manholes, 5.0 feet deep. Such
payment includes base, manhole sections, steps, cast iron ring and cover, joint
sealer and all other incidentals required to complete the item.

D. Payment for furnishing and installing manholes deeper than the basic manhole
depth is made at the contract unit price bid per vertical foot (meter) for
Additional Manhole Depth and includes manhole sections, steps, joint sealer
and all other incidentals to complete the item.


a. Basic Manhole, 5'-0" (1.5 meter) Depth - Per Each.
b. Additional Manhole Depth - Per Vertical Foot (meter).

4.4 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES

A. Measurement is made along the pipe from the tee or wye of the main sewer
through tees, wyes and other fittings to the street margin or right-of-way margin.
Measurement is to the nearest foot (0.3m).

1. Payment for services is based on the following bid items as specified in
the contract:

a. Trench excavation and backfill is included in the linear foot price
bid for sewer service pipe.
b. (size) (class) Sewer Service Pipe in Place, per linear foot.

Section 02730 6
th
Edition
Page 15 of 15 *

4.5 GENERAL


END OF SECTION
Sections - 2900
Landscaping

LANDSCAPING

SECTION 02910 Seeding
SECTION 02920 Hydraulic Seeding

Section 02910 6
th
Edition
SEEDING
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02910

SEEDING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes ground surface preparation; furnishing and applying
fertilizer; and furnishing and planting seed in areas described in the contract
documents or directed by the Engineer.

B. Hydraulic seeding is not included in this section. Hydraulic seeding is covered in
Section 02920, Hydraulic Seeding.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer applicable seed mixture certifications, fertilizer
descriptions and mulch certifications. Furnish duplicate signed copies of the
vendors statement certifying that each seed lot has been tested by a recognized
seed testing laboratory within 6 months of date of delivery. Assure the statement
includes: Name and address of laboratory, date of test, lot number for each seed
species and the test results including name, percentages of purity and of
germination, percentage of weed content for each kind of seed furnished and, for
seed mixes, the proportions of each kind of seed.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Furnish seed and seed mixture, free of all prohibited noxious weed seed or any
other weed seed prohibited by state or local ordinance.

B. Seal and label all seed containers to comply with Montana Seed Law and
Regulations or meeting U.S. Department of Agriculture and Regulations under the
Federal Seed Act, if shipped in interstate commerce.

C. Do not use wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed in the work.

D. Furnish seed mixture of the species described in the contract documents. Furnish
seed in standard containers labeled with the seed name, lot number, net weight,

Section 02910 6
th
Edition
SEEDING
Page 2 of 4

percentages of purity, germination, hard seed, and percentage of maximum weed
seed content for each seed species.

2.2 TOPSOIL

A. Use topsoil that is loose, friable, loamy soil, free of excess acid and alkali. Assure
topsoil does not contain objectionable amounts of sod, hard lumps, gravel, sub-soil or
other undesirable material that would form a poor seedbed. Before striping topsoil,
assure it has supported the growth of healthy crops, grass or other vegetable growth.

2.3 LIME

A. Furnish ground limestone or other material deemed suitable by the Engineer
containing a minimum 85 percent of total carbonate equivalent ground so that 90
percent will pass through a No. 100 mesh sieve. Coarser material may be acceptable,
if the application rates are increased to provide at least the minimum quantities and
depth specified using an approved Dolomitic lime or a high magnesium lime
containing at least 10 percent magnesium oxide.

2.4 FERTILIZER

A. Furnish standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in mixtures containing
the specified percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, and water
soluble potash. Apply fertilizer at the specified rate and depth meeting the applicable
State and Federal laws. Furnish fertilizer in standard containers clearly labeled with
name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents. No cyanamide compounds of
hydrated lime are permitted in mixed fertilizers.

B. Fertilizers may be supplied in one of the following forms:

1. A dry, free-flowing fertilizer suitable for application by a common fertilizer
spreader;

2. A finely-ground fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by power
sprayers; or

3. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment.

2.5 SOILS FOR REPAIRS

A. Use soil for filling and topsoiling repair areas of equal quality to the existing topsoil
being repaired. Assure the soil is free of large stones, roots, stumps, or other

Section 02910 6
th
Edition
SEEDING
Page 3 of 4

materials that interfere with sowing, compacting, and establishing turf. Obtain
approval from the Engineer before placing topsoil.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 TOPSOIL

A. Place at least 6 inches (15 cm) of topsoil in all areas to be seeded. Import topsoil
if sufficient topsoil is not available from excavated areas of the project.

3.2 ALLOWABLE SEEDING MONTHS

A. Perform seeding when the temperature and moisture are favorable to germination
and plant growth. Seed preferably before June 1st and after October 1st of each
year. Seeding dates must be approved by the Engineer.

3.3 SEEDBED PREPARATION AND SOWING

A. Clear the areas to be seeded of all debris, vegetation, and other material
determined by the Engineer to be detrimental to the preparation of a seedbed.
Once the area is cleared, disc, harrow, rake, or work the area by other suitable
methods, into a smooth, even seedbed. Assure the prepared seedbed surface is
firm enough to prevent seed loss from high winds or normal rainfall. If rolling is
required, perform rolling before seeding using a suitable roller, of a weight
appropriate to the soil conditions.

B. Sow seed in the areas described in the contract documents at the specified
application rates.

C. Sow seed using a force feed drill having a grass seed attachment, except of slopes
steeper than three to one or on areas too small to be seeded with a force feed drill.
In these areas, seed may be sown by power sprayers, blowers or other effective
methods. Use equipment in good working order.

D. Seed Kentucky Bluegrass at a depth of one-quarter inch or less and cultipack the
seed.

E. Do not sow seed in winds that prevent proper imbedment into the surface.

Section 02910 6
th
Edition
SEEDING
Page 4 of 4

3.4 FERTILIZER

A. Spread and work fertilizer into the soil during the final seedbed preparation.
Apply fertilizer at the rate described in the contract documents.

3.5 CARE OF SEEDED AREAS

A. Keep the seeded area moist until it has germinated and its continued growth is
assured. Prevent erosion during watering. Water is incidental to the item
Seeding.

B. Protect all seeded areas from traffic or pedestrian use with warning barricades or
other Engineer approved methods.

C. Maintain the seeded area, performing any required watering and mowing until the
seed is firmly established. Prevent weeds and other undesirable vegetation from
establishing in the seeded area. Mow weeds and rake and remove the clippings
from the areas.

D. Replace any seeded areas failing to germinate which have died or been damaged
by construction activities. Replace such areas to meet the contract requirements.
The contract warranty period applies to this item.


4. 1 GENERAL

A. Seeding is measured by the square yard (square meter) and paid for at the unit
price bid including topsoil salvage and/or importing, topsoil placement, seedbed
preparation, and seeding, complete in place and accepted by the Engineer.


END OF SECTION

Section 02920 6
th
Edition
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Page 1 of 2

SECTION 02920

HYDRAULIC SEEDING

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section includes the hydraulic seeding of the areas shown on the contract
documents or as directed by the Engineer. Hydraulic seeding is typically
employed for slopes steeper than 3:1 (horizontal to vertical) or when the seedbed
surface is impractical to drill seed.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 Products are as described in Section 02910, Seeding, Part 2, Products.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TOPSOIL

A. Place at least 6 inches (15 cm) of topsoil in all areas to be seeded. Import topsoil
if sufficient topsoil is not available from excavated areas.

3.2 APPLICATION RATES

A. Apply seed mixture to the areas described in the contract documents at the
specified application rates.

3.3 MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Maintain and protect newly seeded areas until the grass is established and
accepted by the Engineer. During this period, repair damaged areas and reseed
areas where complete establishment has not occurred.

Section 02920 6
th
Edition
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Page 2 of 2


4. 1 GENERAL

A. Hydraulic seeding is measured and paid for by the square yard (square meter) and
paid for at the unit price bid including topsoil salvage and/or importing, topsoil
placement, seedbed preparation, fertilizer, mulch and seed, complete and in place
and accepted by the Engineer.


END OF SECTION

Division 3
Concrete

CONCRETE

SECTION 03210 Reinforcing Steel
SECTION 03310 Structural Concrete

Section 03210 6
th
Edition
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 03210

REINFORCING STEEL

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work is furnishing and placing reinforcing steel or wire fabric meeting the
quality, type and size specified in the contract.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM A-615
ASTM A-705
AASHTO M 31 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M 32 Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
AASHTO M 55 Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
AASHTO M 54 Fabric Deformed Steel Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement

PART 2: PRODUCT

2.1 Furnish all new material meeting the following requirements.

A. Bar Reinforcement

1. Furnish deformed reinforcement steel meeting ASTM A 615, (AASHTO
M3 1) or ASTM A705, Grade 40 or Grade 60.

a. Small quantities purchased from warehouses may, at the
Engineers direction, be accepted if bend tested under ASTM A615
or AASHTO M31. The test specimen must cold bend around a pin
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.

B. Wire and Wire Mesh

1. Furnish wire meeting cold-drawn steel wire AASHTO M32 (ASTM A82)
requirements.

2. Furnish wire mesh for concrete reinforcement meeting AASHTO M 55
(ASTMA A 185).

Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 2 of 4

3. Furnish bar mats meeting AASHTO M54 (ASTM A 184).

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect steel reinforcement from damage at all times. Place steel free from dirt,
detrimental scale, paint, oil and other foreign substance. Clean steel reinforcement
having easily removed rust, loose scale, and dust using an approved method.

3.2 FABRICATION

A. Furnish four copies of shop details and placing drawings for all reinforcing steel
to the Engineer for approval. Once checked, the Engineer will return two marked-
up sets of prints or drawings for correction. The Engineers review is only for
general conformity with the plans. Checking the detailed dimensions is the
Contractors responsibility. The Engineers review does not relieve the
Contractors responsibility to furnish all material meeting the Contract
requirements. Detail Reinforcing, steel meeting the ACI Standard Details and
Detailing of Concrete Structures and the Manual of Engineering and Placing
Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures published by the American
Concrete Institute (ACI 315).

B. Assure all bars are bent cold. Do not field bend any bar partially imbedded in
concrete except as specified on the plans.

C. Ship bar reinforcement in standard bundles, tagged and marked meeting the
Details and Detailing of Concrete Structures (ACI 315) requirements.

D. Concrete reinforcement and accessory details, not covered herein or on the
drawings, must meet Details and Detailing of Concrete Structures and the
Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete
Structures (ACI 315 and 315R) requirements.

3.3 PLACING AND FASTENING

A. Accurately place and hold firm all steel reinforcement in the plan locations as
concrete is being placed.

B. Support and fasten together all reinforcement to prevent displacement due to
construction loads. It is permissible to use on ground, where necessary, concrete
support blocks having a minimum 4 square inches (2580 MM2) bearing area and
having a compressive strength equal to the concrete being placed. Use approved
bar chairs and spacers over form work. For concrete surfaces exposed to the

Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 3 of 4

weather in the finished structure, assure the portions of all accessories within -
inch (12.7 mm) of the concrete surface are noncorrosive or protected against
corrosion.

C. Overlap welded wire fabric for successive mats or rolls providing an overlap
measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet at least 2 inches
(50.8 mm). Extend the fabric across supporting beams and walls to within 4
inches (101.6 mm) of concrete edges. It may extend through contraction joints.
Adequately support the fabric during concrete placement to maintain its position
in the slab using the methods previously described or by laying the fabric on a
concrete layer of the required depth before placing the upper slab layer.

D. Offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar diameter at lap splices. Furnish
templates for all column dowels.

E. Obtain Engineer approval for all splices not shown on the plans. Mechanical
connectors for reinforcing bars may be used if approved.

F. Do not use pebbles, pieces of broken stone, concrete rubble, broken brick or
building blocks, metal pipe, or wooden block to position the fabric.

G. Follow the minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement below.

1. Concrete deposited against ground: 76.2 mm (3 inches)

2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with the ground:

a. #6 bars or larger 50.8 mm (2 inches)
b. Smaller than #6 bars 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)

3. Interior Surfaces:

a. Beams, girders and columns 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)
b. Slabs, walls and joists:

1) #11 bars or smaller 19.05 mm (3/4-inch)
2) #14 and #18 bars 38.1 mm (1-1/2 inches)

H. For corrosive atmospheres or fire protection, see special provisions for minimum
covering requirements.

I. Obtain Engineer approval of reinforcement placement before placing concrete.
Remove and replace concrete placed without Engineer approval of reinforcing.

J. Straighten fabric reinforcement shipped in rolls into flat sheets before placing it.

Section 03210
REINFORCING STEEL
Page 4 of 4

3.4 WELDING

A. When specified or approved, weld reinforcing steel meeting Reinforcing Steel
Welding Code (AWSD 1 4). Do not weld at bends in bars. Do not tack weld
crossbars without Engineer approval.


4.1 GENERAL

A. Reinforcing steel used in the work is not measured. The cost of furnishing and
placing reinforcing steel is incidental and included in the unit price or lump sum
price bid for various items of the work.

END OF SECTION

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 1 of 18

SECTION 03310

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish structural concrete meeting all specified requirements that is composed of
Portland cement, aggregates, water. Furnish Ready-mixed concrete meeting
ASTM C94 unless otherwise specified.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM C-94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C-150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C-618 Specification for Coal Flyash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete
ASTM C-989 Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
ASTM C-595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C-157 Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C-33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C-260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C-494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C-1017 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in producing
Flowing Concrete
ASTM D-98
ASTM C-138 Test Method for Density(Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content(Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C-173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C-231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM C-31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
ASTM C-39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM C-172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ACI 301 Standard Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concrete
ACI 306 Cold Weather Concrete
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 2 of 18

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: The codes and standards referred to in this section are
declared to be part of this specification as if fully set forth herein. In addition, the
following ACI Standards are incorporated in their entirety, unless specifically
required otherwise:

1. ACI Standard 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings,"
American Concrete Institute, Edition.

2. ACI Standard 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete", American Concrete Institute, current edition.

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".

4. International Building Code of I.C.B.O.

B. Concrete Testing: The Contractor shall employ at his expense a testing laboratory
acceptable to the Engineer to perform material evaluation tests and/or perform the
mix design prior to placing any concrete. The Engineer will perform all
acceptance testing during the onsite placement of the concrete .. Retesting or
additional testing of concrete or materials failing to meet the requirements of
these specifications shall be done by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Owner.

PART 2: PRODUCT

2.1 CLASSIFICATION

A. Concrete is classified as set forth below. Place the specified class of concrete for
each structure element as specified. Concrete with prefixes "C" contain 1-1/2 inch
(38.1 mm) size aggregate and those with "M" contain 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) size
aggregate.. Concrete with prefixes "M" may be substituted for concrete with
prefixes "C."'

1. Use M-4000 concrete for curb and gutter, sidewalks, driveways,
approaches, curb turn fillets and valley gutters and structural concrete.

2. Use M-3000 concrete for manholes, storm drain inlets and miscellaneous
or C-3000 Concrete Construction class.

3. M-3000 is concrete with 3/4 inch (19-05 mm) maximum aggregate and a
28-day compressive strength of 3000 pounds per square inch (psi) (20.7
Mpa).

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 3 of 18

4. M-4000 is concrete with 3/4 inch (19-05 mm) maximum aggregate and a
28-day compressive strength of 4000 pounds per square inch (psi) (27.6
Mpa).

5. C-3000 is concrete with 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) maximum aggregate and a
28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 Mpa).

B. If concrete strength or durability requirements established by design exceed the
above strength classifications, the Engineer may specify additional concrete
classifications to meet those requirements.

2.2 COMPOSITION OF CONCRETE

A. Upon receipt of the notice of award of the contract, furnish the Engineer with
names of suppliers and locations of sources of materials proposed for use.

1. Materials

a. Cementitious Material: Cementitious material consists of Portland
cement meeting ASTM C 150, with or without the addition of
cementitious or pozzolanic mineral admixtures meeting, ASTM
C618 or ASTM C989, or blended hydraulic cement meeting
ASTM C595 or hydraulic cement meetingASTM 1157. Unless
otherwise specified, assure cementitious material meets ASTM C
150 Type I or Type II. Assure cementitious material used in
concrete is the same brand and type and from the same plant of
manufacture as the cementitious material used in the concrete
represented by the submitted field test date or used in the trial
mixtures.

b. Aggregates: Assure aggregates meet ASTM C33. When a single
size or a combination of two or more sizes of coarse aggregates are
used, assure the final gradation meets the grading requirements of
ASTM C33. Obtain concrete aggregates from the same source and
use the same size ranges as the aggregates used in the concrete
represented by submitted historical data, or used in trial mixtures.

c. Water and Ice: Use concrete mixing water and water to make ice
meeting requirements of ASTM C94.

d. Admixtures: Use admixtures meeting the following requirements:

1) Air entraining, admixtures - ASTM C260
2) Chemical admixtures- ASTM C494

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 4 of 18

3) Chemical admixtures for use
in producing, flowing concrete- ASTM C1017
4) Calcium Chloride - ASTM D98
5) Use admixtures in the concrete that are the same as those
used in the concrete represented by submitted field test data
or in trial mixtures.

2. Change of materials

a. When brand, type, size, or source of cementitious materials,
aggregates, water, ice or admixtures are requested to be changed,
submit new field data or data from new trial mixtures or furnish
evidence that indicates that the change will not adversely affect the
relevant properties of the concrete for acceptance before using the
concrete.

B. Performance and Design Requirements

1. Assure the cementitious material content is adequate to meet the specified
requirements for strength, water-cement ratio and finishing requirements.
For concrete used in floors, assure the cement content is at least that
indicated in Table 2.1. For concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or
concrete exposed to deicers, assure a maximum water-cement ration of
0.45.

TABLE 2.1
MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT REQUIREMENTS

Nominal Maximum size Minimum cement content
of aggregate, in(mm) lb/yd3 (kg/m3)

1-1/2 (38-1) 470* (163.0)
1 (25.4) 520 (180.3)
3/4 (19-05) 540 (187-3)
3/8 (9-5) 641 (222.3)

* Minimum cement content is 520 lb/yd
3
(180.3 kc,/m
3
) and maximum
H2O/cement ratio of 0.45 if concrete will be exposed to freezing and thawing
and/or in the presence of deicing chemicals.

2. Furnish concrete at the point of delivery having a slump of 4 inches (max)
(100 mm) determined by ASTM C 143. Meet slump tolerances in ACI 117.
When a plasticizing admixture is used meeting ASTM C 10 17 or when a
Type F or G high range water reducing admixture meeting ASTM C494 is
approved to increase the concrete slump, assure the concrete has a slump

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 5 of 18

of 2 to 4 inches (50-100mm) before the admixture is added and a
maximum slump of 8 inches (200 mm) at the point of delivery after the
admixture is added.

3. Assure the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate does not exceed
three fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, one-
fifth of the narrowest dimension between sided of forms or one-third of
the thickness of slabs or toppings.

4. Concrete must be air entrained. Measure air content under ASTM C 138,
C 173 or C231. Unless otherwise specified, ASTM C231 shall be used.

TABLE 2.2
TOTAL AIR CONTENT* OF CONCRETE
FOR VARIOUS SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATE

Total air content, percent
Nominal maximum
Size of aggregate mm, (in.)
Severe
exposure
Moderate
exposure
Mild
exposure
Less than 9.53(3/8) 9 7 8
9.53 (3/8) 7.5 6 4.5
12.5(1/2) 7 5.5 4
19 (3/4) 6 5 3.5
25.4(l) 6 4.5 3
12.7(1-1/2) 5.5 4.5 3
50.8(2) 5 3.5 1.5
76.2(3) 4.5 3.5 1.5
152.4(6) 4 3 1
* Measure in accordance with ASTM C 138, C 173, or C 231.
Air content tolerance is +/- 1 1/2 percent

a. When admixtures are specified in the Contract documents for
particular parts of the work, use types specified. Use of calcium
chloride or other admixtures containing chloride ions is subject to
the limitations in Table 2.3 Chloride Ion Concentration. When
approved, use calcium chloride in solution form only, when
introduced into the mixture.

1) Assure the maximum water soluble chloride ion
concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42
days attributed to the ingredients including water,
aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures do not
exceed the limits of Table 2.3. Use tests to determine water
soluble chloride ion content meeting AASHTO T260. The

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 6 of 18

type of member described in Table 2.3 applies to the work
as indicated in the Contract Documents.

TABLE 2.3
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHLORIDE ION CONTENT

Type of Member
Maximum water soluble chloride (CI) Content in
concrete, percent by weight of cement
Prestressed concrete 0.06
Reinforced concrete exposed to
chloride in service
0.15
Reinforced concrete that will be dry or
protected from moisture in service
1.00

Other reinforced concrete construction .30

b. When the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the
period from midnight to midnight is expected to drop below 40F
(40C) for more than three successive days, deliver concrete in
accordance with ASTM C-94.

c. Furnish the compressive strength and the water-cement or water
cementitious, material ratio of concrete for each portion of the
work as specified in the Contract documents.

1) If cementitious or pozzolanic mineral admixtures meeting,
ASTM C618 or ASTM C989 are used, the cement portion
of the water-cement ratio must be the total weight of
cementitious material.

2) The maximum weight of fly ash, pozzolan or ground
granulated blast-furnace slag included in the calculation of
water-cementitious material ratio cannot exceed the
following percentages of the total weight of portland
cement plus fly ash, pozzolan and ground granulated blast-
furnace slag:

3) The combined weight of fly ash and pozzolan meeting
ASTM C618 cannot exceed limits in ACI 318.. The fly ash
and pozzolan present in an ASTM Type IP or IPM blended
cement meeting ASTM C595 must be included in the
calculated percentage.

4) The weight of ground granulated blast-furnace slag meeting
ASTM C989 cannot exceed 50 percent of the total weight

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 7 of 18

of cementitious material. The slag used in manufacture of a
Type IS or ISM blended hydraulic cement meeting ASTM
C595 must be included in the calculated percentage.

5) If fly ash or pozzolan is used in concrete with ground
granulated blast-furnace slag, the portland cement
constituent meeting ASTM C 150 cannot be less than 50
percent of the total weight of cementitious material. Fly ash
or pozzolan must not constitute more than 25 percent of the
total weight of cementitious material.

6) Strength requirements are based on the 28-day compressive
strength determined on 6" x 12" (150mm x 300mm)
cylindrical specimens made and tested under ASTM C31
and C39 respectively.

2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory
trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch
method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

B. Submit written reports of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have
been reviewed and approved.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch
match mixer. For mixers of one cu. Yd., or small capacity, continue mixing at
least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer,
before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu.
Yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 2.5 minutes for each
additional cu. yd., or fraction thereof.

B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating
project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, batch quantities,
and amount of water introduced.

C. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C94, and as herein
specified.

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 8 of 18

D. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete,
a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C94 may be required.

E. When air temperature is between 85F (30C) and 90F (32C), reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is
above 90F (32C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

3.2 CONSISTENCY

A. Assure concrete is of such consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel,
but individual particles of the coarse aggregate, when isolated, show a coating of
mortar containing its proportionate quantity of sand. The consistency of the
concrete will be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place the
concrete in its final position and not by the difficulty in mixing or transporting.
Use the minimum quantity of mixing water necessary to provide workability
within the ranges of slump specified.

3.3 MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix concrete to assure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass. Mix concrete only in quantities required for immediate use
and place it within the time limits specified. Waste all concrete which initial set
has begun. Retempering of concrete is prohibited. Aggregates, or bags of cement
containing lumps or crusts of hardened material shall not be used. Mix concrete
in an approved truck mixer meeting the requirements of ASTM C94 herein.

B. The capacity of the plant and the transportation equipment must ensure delivery at
a rate that will permit proper handling, placement and finishing at the point of
delivery. Maintain the concrete delivery rate to provide for the continuous
operation of placing, handling and finishing concrete as is practical. Maintain the
interval between delivery of loads so that layers or lifts of concrete in place do not
harden before succeeding layers or lifts are placed. In general, no lift or layer of
concrete can remain exposed for more than 20 minutes before being covered by
fresh concrete.

C. The volume of mixed concrete in the mixing drum shall not exceed the
manufacturer's rating, on the capacity plate.

D. During freezing weather, other approved methods of measuring water will be
permitted.

E. A recording water metering device is always required at the primary point of the
batching operation.

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 9 of 18

F. Do not add water to concrete in transit. Water may be introduced into the mixer at
the job site under direction of the Engineer, if the specified water-cement ratio is
not exceeded. Water must be added in accordance with ASTM C94, Assure the
drum revolves continuously after the introduction of the cement and water until
the concrete is discharged.

G. Begin mixing immediately after introduction of the cement and water and
continue for at least 70 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. This minimum
revolution count will be waived when the concrete is produced at a central mixing
plant. Not more than 100 drum revolutions can exceed 6 revolutions per minute.
All other revolutions must be at agitating speed of not less than 2 or more than 6
revolutions per minute.

H. Discharge the concrete at the job and place in its final position within 1- 1/2 hours
after the introduction of the mixing water and cement. When the air temperature is
90F (30C) or above, place the concrete in its final position within 1 hour after
the introduction of the mixing, water and cement. Concrete mixes with an
approved set retarding admixture may be held an additional hour beyond limits
specified above.

I. No mixed or agitated concrete that has remained in the drum of the truck mixer
more than 10 minutes without agitation can be used. If the Engineer determines
the concrete has not suffered any detrimental effects. It may be used, after
remixing for a minimum of 20 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed, if it can
still be placed in the forms within the specified time limits.

J. Provide a revolution counter on each truck that registers the number of
revolutions of the drum.

K. Mount the counter so it can be easily read by both the operator and the Engineer.


A. Thoroughly compact concrete into its final position. Assure it is thoroughly
consolidated around fittings and embedded items. Assure all reinforcement and
embedded items are accurately placed as shown on the plans and are clean and
free from coatings of dried mortar, detrimental rust, scale, oil or foreign matter.
Place concrete meeting the applicable requirements of Sections 02528 and 02529.

3.5 CURING CONCRETE

A. Thoroughly cure concrete surfaces subject to premature drying by covering as
soon as possible with canvas, plastic sheets with sealed joints, burlap and sand or
other satisfactory materials and keep concrete moist. If the concrete surfaces are
not covered, keep them moist by flushing or sprinkling. Continue curing for at

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 10 of 18

least 7 days after placing the concrete. Concrete surfaces placed against forms
may be cured by leaving the forms in place for at least 7 days, when approved.

B. Protect concrete against freezing or other conditions detrimental to strength
development meeting the applicable requirements of this specification.

C. To aid finishing, side forms on ornamental work, curbs and sidewalks, railing and
parapets may be removed after 12 hours, not to exceed 48 hours, depending on
weather conditions. Continue moist curing during the concrete finishing operation.

D. Untreated forms and existing concrete must be kept continuously wet for at least 1
hour before any concrete is placed. Keep wet until covered with concrete except
that adequately treated forms must be thoroughly washed with a water spray
immediately before placing the concrete.

E. The curing of concrete, by either water curing or membrane curing, must be as
follows unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. Water Curing

a. Keep all concrete top surfaces continuously moist after finishing,
with a fine water spray, until the concrete has set. Cover the moist
concrete with water or an approved curing covering.

b. Cure concrete deck slabs and concrete floors for at least 7 days.
Cure by placing burlap, cotton mats or other absorptive material as
close behind the finishing operation as possible without marring
the finished surface. Keep the absorptive material continuously
moist for the full time it is used. The absorptive material may be
kept in place for the entire curing period or it may be removed as
soon as practical and the entire surface covered with approximately
1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) of sand, kept continuously moist for the
entire curing period.

c. Remove forms and repair surface irregularities without interfering
with any of the curing requirements. As soon as the vertical forms
have been removed and the surface irregularities repaired, cover
the concrete with absorptive material, kept continuously wet for
the balance of the curing a period.

2. Impervious Membrane Curing

a. Assure membrane curing compounds are delivered to the job in the
manufacturers original container, clearly labeled to show the
name of the manufacturer and the contents. The clear curing

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 11 of 18

compound must be sufficiently transparent and free from
permanent color that would change the color of the natural
concrete. Use clear compound containing a fugitive dye having
color sufficient to render the film visible on the concrete for at
least 4 hours after application. The concrete surface must maintain
its natural color after curing.

b. Use a compound ready for use as shipped by the manufacturer.
Dilute following the manufacturer's recommendations. Use curing
compound only with written approval. Sampling will not be
required if manufacturer's certification is available. Apply the
curing compound under pressure with a spray nozzle to cover the
entire exposed surface thoroughly and completely with a uniform
film not exceeding manufacturer's specifications. Maintain the
required pressure in the spray machine to force the material to
leave the nozzle in a fine mist. Keep all concrete surfaces moist
with a fine water spray or with wetted burlap until the sealing
compound is applied. Keep the curing compound application close
to the finishers of the top surface of concrete at all times. Seal the
concrete immediately after the finishing operations have been
completed, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

c. If it is necessary to allow workers or equipment on the surface
before the 7 day curing period is completed, cover the top surface
of sealed concrete with a protective cushion for runways. Use a
cushion consisting of a moist, 1 inch (25mm) minimum thick
layer of fine sand, or layers of moist burlap that will prevent
damage to the finished concrete. Cover the approved cushion with
four by eight foot sheets of 3/4 inch(19mm) plywood laid over the
cushion. Do not place the cushion material for at least 8 hours after
the final application of the curing compound. Obtain the Engineer's
written approval for any other proposed cushion material before
use. Layers of plastic, visqueen or canvas are not an acceptable
cushion material.

d. Keep concrete, which has not completed its curing period,
continuously moist during the stripping and surface repair
operations. Remove all surface irregularities, repair all depressions,
voids or holes, including those formed by trapped air, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Immediately apply the curing
compound before the surface has had an opportunity to dry out.
Keep concrete, from which forms have been stripped, continuously
moist until surface repair and finishing are completed and the
impervious membrane curing has been applied.

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 12 of 18

3.6 WEATHER AND NIGHT LIMITATIONS

A. General

1. Stop concreting operations when darkness prevents obtaining the specified
placing, and finishing work. Night operations may be conducted with
written approval and when approved artificial lighting is provided.

2. Cold weather concreting is governed by ACI 306 unless otherwise
specified herein. Hot weather concreting methods is governed by ACI 305
unless otherwise specified herein. Except by specific written authorization,
stop concreting operations when a descending air temperature in the shade
and away from artificial heat falls below 40F (4C), or do not resume
until an ascending air temperature in the shade and away from artificial
heat reaches frozen foundation course or subgrade.

3. Assume all risk of placing concrete in cold weather. Placing concrete
during cold weather does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for obtaining the specified results. Remove and replace all concrete
injured by frost at Contractor expense.

4. Before any concrete is placed, remove all ice, snow and frost completely
from the formwork receiving the concrete.

5. Heating and Placing Concrete

a. When concreting is authorized during cold weather, assure
concrete temperature meets ASTM C94.

6. Protection of Concrete

a. During the curing period, if the air temperature is anticipated to fall
below 32F (0C, provide an approved blanket type insulating
material along the work for covering all concrete that has been in
place for 7 days or less. If, at any time, the ambient temperature
drops to 32F(OC) or less, protect the concrete using a method
approved by the Engineer. The minimum method of protection
under such conditions is as follows: between two layers of plastic
sheeting, the insulating materials, with the exception of
commercial blankets, must be spread loosely to a minimum depth
of 6 inches (150mm), but in all cases, to the depth required to
prevent freezing of, or frost damage to, the concrete. Maintain the
blanketing material at least until the end of the regular specified
curing, period which is not less than 7 days. The Engineer may
direct leaving the blanketing material in place for an additional

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 13 of 18

period if the recorded temperatures indicate that additional curing
may be necessary. If during the construction period the mean daily
temperature is expected to fall below 40F(4C) for 3 consecutive
days, furnish approved heating enclosures and devices capable of
maintaining the surface temperature of the concrete in place
between 55F (13C) and 80F (26C). The curing, period under
these conditions is 7 days when Type I-II cement is used and 5
days when a pre-approved "high early strength" mix is used. At the
close of the curing period, the heat may be reduced so that the
temperature inside the housing does not decrease faster than 15
per hour until the temperature inside the housing is the same as
outside.

b. A Contractor may, at their own expense, field cure concrete
cylinders with their in-place concrete and discontinue protection
when those field cylinders reach 70 percent of design strength as
indicated by the 28 day requirement of these specifications.

c. Perform all concrete protection using methods consistent with
ACI-306-1-87 and approved by the Engineer.

3.7 TESTING

A. All concrete must be tested by an ACI Grade I or equivalent certified testing
technician. Unless otherwise specified, the engineer shall be responsible for all
acceptance testing during the on-site placement of the concrete.

1. Materials

a. The Engineer or their representative must have access to the ready
mix production facility for sampling constituent materials during
production to assure the materials meet these specifications and
represent those stated on the approved mix design.

2. Standard Slump Tests

a. The Engineer shall , during each day's placement, check the
consistency of the concrete by slump test. A slump test will also be
made each time that strength specimens are made . Slump tests are
performed meeting ASTM C143"Method of Test for the Slump of
Portland Cement Concrete".

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 14 of 18

3. Compression Tests

a. A minimum of three specimens, 6 inch (150 mm) in diameter or 4
inch(100 mm) , shall be made and tested for every concrete
placement. Mold and test one set of test cylinders for every 100
yards (76.5 cubic meters) of concrete or fraction thereof placed
each day. On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is
such that frequency of testing required above would generate less
than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, make tests from
at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer
than 5 batches are used. Cure these cylinders under laboratory
conditions except that additional test cylinders cured entirely under
field conditions may be required by the Engineer to check the
adequacy of curing and protection of the concrete.

b. Take samples for strength tests in accordance with ASTM C172,
entitled "______________.

c. Mold test cylinders and laboratory-cure in accordance with ASTM
C31. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39, entitled "
"Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens", ASTM C39, using an independent testing laboratory,
as approved by the Engineer.

d. Of each of the 3 cylinders take for a pour, test 1 for information
strength at 7 days and test 2 for acceptance strength at 28 days. To
meet this specification, average strength of two cylinders from the
same sample, tested at 28 days or the specified earlier age, is
required for each strength test. Strength level of an individual class
of concrete is considered satisfactory if both of the following
requirements are met:

1) The average of all sets of 3 consecutive tests equal or
exceed the specified strength.
2) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders) falls
below specified strength by more than 500 psi (3400 kPa).

e. Cure field cured cylinders under field conditions meeting Section
7.4 of "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field" (ASTM C31).

f. Mold field cured test cylinders at the same time and from the same
samples as laboratory cured test cylinders. Improve procedures for
protecting and curing concrete when strength of field cured
cylinders at the test age designated for measuring specified

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 15 of 18

strength is less than 85 percent of that of companion laboratory
cured cylinders. When laboratory cured cylinder strengths are
appreciably higher than the specified strength, field cured cylinder
strengths need not exceed the specified strength by more than 500
psi (3400 kPa) even though the 85 percent criterion is met.

g. The strengths of any specimens cured on the job are to indicate the
adequacy of protection and curing of the concrete and may be used
to determine when the forms may be stripped, shoring removed or
the structure placed in service. When the strengths of the job cured
specimens are below those specified above, the Contractor must
improve the procedures for protecting and curing the concrete.

h. When concrete fails to meet the requirements above or when tests
of field cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and
curing, the Owner's representative may order tests on the hardened
concrete under Chapter 17.3 of ACI-301-84 or order load tests in
Chapter 20 of the ACI Building Code (ACI 318-83) for that
portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been
placed. In the event the load or core tests indicate that the structure
is unsatisfactory, make all modifications as directed by the
Engineer to make the structure sound. If the load or core tests
indicate the concrete is satisfactory, all cost of testing shall be paid
by Owner.

4. Air Content Tests

a. The Engineer shall during each strength test, check the air content
by either the "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method" (ASTM C23 1), "Method of
Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method" (ASTM C173) or "Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield
and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" (ASTM C138)

5. Temperature

a. Test hourly when air temperature is 40F (4C) and below, and
when 80F (27C) and above; and each time a set of compression
test specimens is made.

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 16 of 18


4.1 GENERAL

A. The method of measurement and basis of payment is as outlined in the
specifications for the various items of concrete work.

4.2 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS

A. The following are submittals required to become an approved source of supply for
Portland Cement concrete placed in the City right-of-way:

1. Complete concrete mix design meeting all specification requirements.
Meet the Mix proportions specified in ACI 301, Chapter 3. Submittals will
include the following:

MIX PROPORTIONS
-cement in lbs (kgs) ........ Type and source of supply
-coarse aggregate ........... Size and source of supply
-fine aggregate ............. Source of supply
-water, gallons(liters) ...... City or well
-admixtures,oz/yd3(g/M3) .... Brand and description*

*description as retarder, accelerator, air entraining, etc.

B. MATERIALS INFORMATION

1. Specific gravity (bulk s.s.d. Basis) of coarse and fine aggregate and 1
percent absorption-coarse aggregate unit weight (dry-rodded)-ASTM C33
quality tests including the following:

a. Fine aggregate

1) gradation AASHTO, T27 and T11 deleterious substances
soundness (AASHTO T104) organic impurities (AASHTO
T21) mortar-making properties (AASHTO T71)

b. Coarse aggregate

1) deleterious substances gradation (AASHTO T27 and T11)
soundness (AASHTO T104) percentage of wear (AASHTO
T96)

c. Current chemical analysis of mixing water (if well)

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 17 of 18

d. Current cement mill analysis

2. CONCRETE MIX DATA

a. slump

b. % air

c. unit weight

d. 7 and 28 day compressive strength

3. VARIATIONS

a. The following variations will be cause for submittal of a new mix
design.

1) Change of aggregate source
2) Change of cement content
3) Addition or exclusion of certain admixtures including, but
not limited to, pozzolans, accelerators, retarders and water
reducers
4) Change in aggregate size
5) Change in type of cement
6) Failure to attain strength requirements as outlined in ACI
214 or ASTM C94

b. A variation in any of the following will require 'Informing the City
Engineer and possibly data indicating acceptability for use in
existing mix designs.

1) Change of cement supplier
2) Change of admixture brands or dosages (not types)
3) Minor adjustments of aggregate proportions accompanying
materials changes or to accommodate placement conditions
(same w/c ratio)

C. Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities

1. Concrete producers are to allow access to their facilities by Engineeror
their representatives for inspecting their facilities and/or sampling
materials. All facilities should meet the requirements of the "National
Ready-Mix Concrete Association" check list for concrete production
facilities.

Section 03310 6
th
Edition
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Page 18 of 18

2. Items directly affecting a facility's ability to properly proportion, transport
and deliver concrete may be reason for disqualifying that facility as a
source of supply until such deficiencies are corrected. Examples would
include cement and aggregate scales that will not accurately weight
materials or mixer units that will not thoroughly mix concrete materials.

D. The following chart indicates the submittal frequency for each item required for
approval as a source of supply.

TABLE 4.1
SUBMITTAL FREQUENCY

SUBMITTAL FREQUENCY
Monthly Twice Yearly Other
1- Complete mix design (See Item 1, No 4)
2. Aggregate gradations X With mix design
3. L.A. Abrasion With mix design
4. Soundness With mix design
5. Deleterious substances With mix design
6. Water quality (if well) X
6a. Cube strengths and time
of set
With mix design
7. Cement mill certificates X
8. Organic Impurities With mix design
9. Inspection of facilities As indicated
Note: The above chart applies to the first year of this program. Frequency of submittals may
change as dictated by variations of test data.

END OF SECTION

Appendix A
Standard Drawings

APPENDIX

APPENDIX A Standard Drawings

Standard Drawing No. 02213-1: Manhole Adjustment
Standard Drawing No. 02213-2: Water Valve Adjustment
Standard Drawing No. 02221-1: Typical Utility Trench
Standard Drawing No. 02221-2: Pipe Bedding Alternate
Standard Drawing No. 02222-1: Trench Plug Excavation
Standard Drawing No. 02528-1: Standard Curb & Gutter
Standard Drawing No. 02528-2: Drive Over Curb & Gutter
Standard Drawing No. 02529-1: Double Gutter Detail for Street Intersections
Standard Drawing No. 02529-2: Standard Fillet
Standard Drawing No. 02529-5A: Boulevard Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-5B: Curb Walk Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-6: Retrofit Drive Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-7A: Boulevard Alley Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-7B: Curb Walk Alley Approach
Standard Drawing No. 02529-8: Accessibility Ramp
Standard Drawing No. 02529-9: Swale Crossing
Standard Drawing No. 02529-10: Mail Box Mounting for Curbline Delivery
Standard Drawing No. 02660-1: Thrust Blocking for Water Main Fittings
Standard Drawing No. 02660-2: Water and Sewer Main Separation
Standard Drawing No. 02660-3: Thrust Blocking for Water Main Valves
Standard Drawing No. 02660-4: Fire Hydrant Setting
Standard Drawing No. 02660-5: Hydrant Location Detail
Standard Drawing No. 02660-6: Water Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02660-7: Blowoff Valve
Standard Drawing No. 02720-1: 30 (76 cm) Standard Storm Drain Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-2: 24 (61 cm) Standard Riser Inlet
Standard Drawing No. 02720-3: Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-4: Standard Straight Manhole
Standard Drawing No. 02720-5: 48" (122 cm) Standard Manhole Showing Two Types of
Cone Sections
Standard Drawing No. 02720-6: Precast Manhole Bases
Standard Drawing No. 02720-7: Typical Manhole Channel Details
Standard Drawing No. 02720-8: Standard Cast Iron Cover
Standard Drawing No. 02720-9: Standard 24" (61 cm) Cast Iron Ring Manhole Frame
Standard Drawing No. 02720-10: Storm Drain Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02730-1: Nomograph for Air Testing Gravity Sewer Mains
Standard Drawing No. 02730-2: Sanitary Sewer Service Line
Standard Drawing No. 02730-3: Deep Sanitary Sewer Service Line
Appendix B
Chlorine Disinfecting
Procedures
APPENDIX B 6
th
Edition
Page 1 of 3

APPENDIX B

CALCULATING QUANTITIES OF CHLORINE FOR DISINFECTING WATER MAINS

The amount or weight of chlorine required to disinfect a particular segment of water line is
directly related to the volume of water contained in that particular segment of water main.

A. Volume of Water in Pipe

Volume of Water (Gallons) = Area of Pipe (Ft2) x Length (ft) x 7.48
= 7C R2 L X 7.48
Where: = 3.1416
R = Inside Radius of Pipe in Feet
L = Length of Pipe to be Disinfected, in Feet
7.48 = Gallons per Cubic Foot

B. Formula to Determine Lbs. of Chlorine Required

Lbs. of Chlorine = ppm x MG x 8.34

where: Lbs. of Chlorine = 100% Effective Chlorine
ppm = Chlorine Dosage in Parts per Million
MG = Million Gallons of Water
8.34 = 8.34 Lbs. of Water per Gallon

C. Sample Calculations

Example: 4,500 lineal feet of 8" water main to be disinfected at a chlorine concentration of 25
ppm.

Volume of Water = R
2
L x 7.48
R = 4" = 4/12 Ft = 0.333 Ft
L = 4,500 Ft

Volume of Water = 3.1416 x (.333)2 x 4,500 x 7.48
= 11,726 Gallons
= 0.011726 MG

Lbs- of Chlorine = ppm, x MG x 8.34
ppm = 25

Lbs. of Chlorine = 25 x 0.011726 x 8.34
= 2.44 Lbs. of 100% Effective Chlorine

APPENDIX B 6
th
Edition
Page 2 of 3

D Using Chlorine Compounds or Solutions Less Than 100% Effective Chlorine

Most dry chlorine compounds or chlorine solutions on the market do not contain 100% effective
chlorine. Normally the containers of the compound or solution will state the amount of effective
chlorine as a percentage.

Example: Determine how much Chlorox (Sodium Hypochlorite) solution is required to provide
2.44 lbs. of 100% effective chlorine- Chlorox container is labeled at 5.25% effective chlorine.

Effective Chlorine Per Gallon Chlorox =.0525 x 8.34 Lbs./Gal= 0.44 Lbs.
Gallons of Chlorox Required = 2.44 = 5.55 Gallons
0.44

E. Clorine Dosage Table

Table 1 following presents the chlorine required to produce a 25 ppm concentration in 100 feet
of pipe. Also shown are the gallons required for a solution containing 1 percent effective chlorine.

TABLE 1
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 mg/L
Concentration in 100 ft. of Pipe -- by Diameter

Pipe
Diameter
Inches
100% Effective
Chlorine
Lbs.
1 Percent
Chlorine Solutions
Gallons
4 0.013 0.16
6 0.030 0.36
8 0.085 1.02
10 0.120 1.02
12 0.22 1.44
16 0.27 2.60
18 0.34 3.30
20 0.49 4.07
24 0.76 5.87
30 1.10 9.17
36 1.96 13.19
48 23.50

F. Dosage Table for Hypochlorite Tablets

The number of 5-g tablets required for each pipe section to provide a chlorine dosage of 25
mg/L is equal to 0.0012 x d
2
x L., where d is the inside pipe diameter in inches and L is the
length of the pipe section in feet. Table 2 shows the number of tablets required for commonly
used sizes of pipe.
APPENDIX B 6
th
Edition
Page 3 of 3

TABLE 2
Number of a5-g Hypochlorite Tablets
Required for Dose of 25 mg/L
a

Pipe 13 Length of Pipe Section, ft.
Diameter or Less 18 20 30 40
4 1 1 1 1 1
6 1 1 1 2 2
8 1 2 2 3 4
10 2 3 3 4 5
12 3 4 4 6 7
16 4 6 7 10 13
18 5 7 8 12 16
20 7 9 10 15 20
24 9 13 14 21 28

______________________
a
Based on 3.25 g available chlorine per tablet. Any portion of tablet rounded to next higher
number.

END OF SECTION

Appendix C
Suggestions/Comments

MPWSS (6th Edition) Comment/Suggestion Form

1) Use a new comment form for each section/specification address (if applicable)

2) MPWSS Section
Specification
Page
Paragraph (if applicable)

General Boiler Plate Technical Spec Typographical

3) COMMENTS: (you may attach a marked-up pages (2) MPWSS or other documents)

4) Name
Company
Address
Phone

5) Mail completed form to:
Montana Contractors Association
ATTN: MPWSS Committee
P.O. Box 4519
Helena, MT 59604 or fax to 406-449-3199

MPW Standard Spec 2010

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MPW Standard Spec 2010

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MOTAA I!I!IC WO!

Potrebbero piacerti anche